Jinx: The Piercing 🪬Amber 🪙 Shore 🏖️

The Language of Foreshadowing

Have you ever noticed how Jinx often tells us what is about to happen, long before the characters themselves realize it? I am quite certain that my avid readers are already thinking about the puppy (chapter 57) and its future adoption which got reinforced with the reappearance of an old picture showing Kim Dan holding a puppy. (chapter 94)

Yet a small detail from episode 93 (!) caught my attention, and I couldn’t ignore it. Do you remember the breakfast scene in episode 18? (chapter 18) Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung are sitting together, but there is still a distance between them. And between them, almost quietly, hangs a painting: a winter landscape. Bare trees, cold tones, a distant city. Everything feels still… almost frozen. (chapter 18) This image reflects their state at that moment, that’s why it is placed between them, even behind them. They are close in space, yet emotionally far apart — trapped in silence, routine, and roles. Alive, but not truly living. At the same time, this shows how they treat their past and themselves. Additionally, they seem to draw a line between themselves and others, as if hiding behind invisible walls. Present, yet unreachable.

The painting reinforces this impression. It is not shown as a single, unified image, but divided into separate panels. Fragmented—just like them. They are not whole.

Much later, in episode 93, we encounter a similar composition. (chapter 93) The setting remains, but the painting has changed. Winter has given way to a living landscape: trees with leaves, a mountain rising in the background, and beneath it a stretch of water reflecting the light. (chapter 93) The atmosphere is warmer, softer, alive … yet not fully bright. The colors matter. The trees are not green, but muted—brown, almost beige. Life has returned, but it remains subdued, as if the scene itself is hesitating between seasons. And yet, the structure persists. The image is still divided. The fragmentation remains—but the distance between the panels has narrowed.

This shift is not incidental. It reflects a transformation in both Joo Jaekyung’s and Kim Dan’s internal states. (chapter 93) The winter of isolation gives way to a quieter, emerging warmth—one that prepares the ground for the conversation on the beach. There, under the amber light of the setting sun, this internal change becomes visible: what was once buried in silence begins to surface, and what once signified loneliness is reinterpreted as endurance.

But the characters are not whole yet. The walls have not disappeared. They had only begun to soften, until the both of them went to the beach together.

So what exactly are we witnessing here? (chapter 94) A simple change in atmosphere? A moment of intimacy? Or the beginning of a deeper transformation in the way Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung perceive themselves and, above all, each other?

To answer that question, we need to look more closely at what comes next. I would like to begin with a contrast: the expensive golden keychain on the one hand, and the beach conversation on the other. Why gold then—and why amber now?

Gold as Silence

The contrast began long before the beach. On his birthday, Kim Dan tried to express what he felt through a gift and a card. He chose an expensive golden keychain (chapter 55) —something polished, valuable, appropriate. Alongside it, he wrote a message that sounded careful, respectful, almost rehearsed: (chapter 55) “I truly appreciate everything you’ve done for me.” “I’ll work even harder.” “I hope to work with you for many years.” At first glance, nothing seemed wrong. The gesture was thoughtful, the words polite. And yet, something felt restrained.

The language belonged to a world of duty and hierarchy. It reflected the position Kim Dan believed he had to occupy: a subordinate expressing gratitude to someone above him. His words were correct—but they were not fully his. And the card itself revealed that.

He began to write “To be honest”… but stopped after “To be ho”. (chapter 55) The letters were erased before the sentence could even exist. This is not a correction. It is a hesitation made visible. The thought emerged—but it was interrupted. Before honesty could take shape, it was already suppressed.

What remained on the card was therefore not what he first intended to say, but what he allowed himself to say. What was missing was not sincerity, but freedom. He did not speak from a place of confidence, but from a need to maintain balance. The gift and the card functioned as a safe substitute for something he could not yet articulate. They allowed him to remain within the structure he knew: gratitude, effort, loyalty.

Gold, in this context, carried a precise meaning.

It represented value, recognition, and status. It was something that could be measured, offered, and accepted without ambiguity. But it was also impersonal. It created distance rather than closing it. The keychain was expensive, but carried no warmth of its own.

This only becomes fully clear later, on the beach. (chapter 94) There, when he finally spoke without the protection of formality, his words shifted. He admitted what had remained hidden at the time of the gift: To be honest, he did not think he could do it. He did not feel confident enough to stay by Joo Jaekyung’s side. (chapter 55) Though his words seemed clear, this “hope” was not entirely his. It was shaped by something that had not yet been severed. At that point, Kim Dan had not truly separated himself from his grandmother. (chapter 94) His sense of self was still tied to her—emotionally, morally, almost structurally. He was not yet standing on his own, but continuing a role he had long internalized: enduring, adapting, staying where he was needed.

So when he spoke of “many more years,” it was not the expression of a free decision. It was an extension of obligation. (chapter 41) A continuation of a life he had learned to accept, rather than one he had chosen. This is why the card feels so careful, so measured. Not because he lacked sincerity – but because he lacked strength in his eyes.

And the erased beginning—“To be ho”—makes this even clearer. Because what he had wanted to say was not a promise. It was doubt. He did not trust himself. (chapter 51) And because of that, he clung to Joo Jaekyung—not simply as an employer, but as a figure through whom he could stabilize his own sense of worth. Remaining by his side, working harder, staying useful… all of this allowed him to compensate for what he felt he lacked. (chapter 55)

His “hope” was therefore not an expression of desire, but a strategy. A way to hold himself together. This is why the confession on the beach reframed the entire birthday scene. (chapter 94) He can no longer use his grandmother or the champion to define himself, as their collaboration is limited in time as well.

What had once appeared as gratitude now revealed itself as restraint. What had sounded like commitment now exposed hesitation. And what looked like gold… turned out to be something else entirely. Under this new light, we begin to understand why Kim Dan could neither confess his affection—nor fully express his gratitude.” (chapter 45) Because gold, in that moment, could only represent value imposed from the outside—status, reward, recognition.

But the sunset on the beach spoke a different language. (chapter 94) And perhaps this shift is not only carried by words—but already visible.

If we look closely, something subtle emerges. (chapter 94) The colors of the scene echo the keychain itself. (chapter 55) The gold, of course—but also the red and black attached to it. On the beach, these same tones reappear in what they wear, in how they are visually composed within the frame.

What had once existed as an object—held, offered, external—now surrounds them. It is no longer something exchanged between them. It is something they inhabit together. (chapter 94) But there is more. They are not simply sitting side by side. They are looking at each other. And that gaze changes everything. Because for the first time, the connection is no longer mediated—neither by a gift, nor by roles, nor by unspoken expectations. It is direct. Mutual. Sustained. The gaze becomes the binding element.

It replaces the object. It replaces the silence. And in doing so, it creates something new. Without fully realizing it, they begin to form the outline of a team—one that is no longer defined by hierarchy or obligation, but by presence and recognition.

Not of display, but of transformation. Not of perfection, but of something preserved, altered, and made meaningful over time. And this is why I could no longer associate that scene with gold. The gold had spoken in his place—but it had spoken the wrong language. Only later did Kim Dan begin to replace that language with something more direct, more vulnerable. And it is precisely at that moment that the tone of the story begins to change.

The shift from gold to amber starts here.

Between Silence and Honesty

If we return to the beach scene, something immediately stands out—not only what Kim Dan says, but how he says it.

“To be honest…” (chapter 94)
(chapter 94) “If I’m being totally honest…”

This phrasing is not new, as we have seen its interruption before. On the birthday card, the sentence never reached completion. It stopped at “To be ho”. But what was interrupted there was not simply honesty. It was the fear of burdening someone else.

For Kim Dan, speaking honestly had never been neutral. (chapter 94) To express doubt, sadness, or uncertainty meant placing weight on another person. It meant becoming a problem rather than a solution. And this was something he had learned to avoid.

Even in small, seemingly harmless moments, this pattern had already been visible. Being called a “crybaby” may sound trivial (chapter 94), but it reveals something deeper: emotions were not meant to be expressed freely. They were something to control, to contain, to keep from overflowing. This means that by his grandmother’s side, he learned to hide his suffering behind a smile, something I had long detected.

Sincerity, for him, was inseparable from vulnerability. And vulnerability risked becoming a burden. This is why the sentence could not be completed. “To be honest…” was not just difficult to say. (chapter 94) It was something he believed he should not say.

And yet, on the beach, that same sentence returns. (chapter 94) Not once—but twice. Not as a clean declaration—but as something he repeats, almost carefully, as if testing whether he is allowed to continue. Each time, he creates a small distance before speaking, as if preparing both himself and the other for what might follow.

The hesitation is still there. Either he apologizes or he makes a pause. He lowers his gaze or looks at the horizon. He assumes that what he says might not be welcome. It even becomes truly palpable, when he employs this idiom for the first time on the beach: (chapter 94) He fears reproaches or discomfort. And this is where something shifts. Joo Jaekyung interrupts him: “Don’t say that.”

At first glance, this could sound like a refusal—as if he were rejecting what is about to be said. But in reality, it does something else. He is encouraging Kim Dan to speak. He rejects the assumption behind his words. Not the confession—but the idea that it is unwelcome. In that moment, Kim Dan is not silenced. He is allowed to continue. And this changes everything. He proceeds carefully, but he proceeds. So he is honest, but not yet free. And this is precisely what makes the moment meaningful. Because this time, he does not stop; not because fear has disappeared, but because it is no longer decisive.

And yet, something else becomes visible here. When he later says, (chapter 94), he does not look directly at Joo Jaekyung. His gaze shifts toward the horizon. At first, this might appear as hesitation reflected by the points of suspension, but it carries a different meaning. He is not withdrawing. He is protecting it. Because what he is about to say touches on something deeply personal—not only for himself, but for the other as well. By avoiding direct eye contact, he creates a space in which Joo Jaekyung does not have to respond, does not have to defend himself, does not have to expose what he may not yet be ready to show. In this sense, his restraint is not a sign of fear or shame. It is a form of respect. A way of allowing honesty to exist without embarrassing the other and forcing him into vulnerability.

To understand why he speaks here—and not before—we need to look at the place itself. (chapter 94) The beach is not a random setting.

But there is another reason why this place matters. Kim Dan does not only go there when he is alone. (chapter 59) He goes there when he is struggling—when something within him can no longer be contained. (chapter 94) In those moments, the usual mechanisms—enduring, adapting, maintaining balance—begin to loosen. The roles he has learned to perform no longer fully hold. And this is what links the beach to something more fundamental.

Honesty. Because if we think back, the first time this place was truly defined was not through him—but through his grandmother. (chapter 53) At the hospital, she spoke openly. She expressed regret, desire, and a final wish without filtering it, without protecting him from the weight of it. (chapter 53) It was a moment of sincerity that did not try to reduce itself.

And Kim Dan carried that moment with him. So when he returns to the beach, he is not only seeking comfort. He is returning to a place that has already been marked by truth—a place where emotions are not managed, but felt.

This is also why the scene in episode 59/60 becomes so significant. (chapter 60) When he reaches his breaking point, it is here that the boundary between control and collapse begins to dissolve. The beach is no longer just a refuge—it becomes a space where everything that has been contained threatens to surface at once.

And this is what Joo Jaekyung perceives as well. (chapter 80) For him, the place becomes associated with something dangerous: loss, disappearance, the possibility of not returning. Hence he taught him later how to swim.

But for Kim Dan, the meaning is different. The beach is not where he wants to disappear. It is where he can no longer pretend. He had come here before, in chapter 59, after Heesung and Potato had left. (chapter 59) It was already a place he chose in difficult moments. Not to avoid something—but to face it in his own way.

And this place carried meaning. (chapter 53) Through his grandmother , the ocean had been described as something beautiful, something capable of giving strength and comfort (chapter 53) — even when experienced alone. It did not require company to feel complete. Kim Dan held onto that idea.

So when he returned here, he did not come empty-handed. He came with an expectation. (chapter 59) That this place could give him something. That it could help him endure. That it might allow him to feel what she had felt—and, perhaps, soften what he himself was feeling. In that sense, the beach was more than a memory. It was a possibility. That’s why he visited the beach, when he was struggling.

But there is another layer to this. The beach was not only a place he returned to when he was struggling. It was also a place through which he tried to reconnect. (chapter 94) Not simply to escape— but to experience, in her place, what she had once described. To share that moment indirectly, as if the beauty of the ocean could bridge the distance between them, soften the absence, and momentarily silence his loneliness.

This is what gave the place its meaning in the past. Because if he could see what she had seen — if he could feel what she had felt — then perhaps he would not be alone in it. (chapter 59) And yet, this meaning does not remain stable.

In episode 94, he returns to the same place—but for a different reason. (chapter 94) Not to maintain the connection — but to bring it to an end.

But this possibility is no longer simple. Because the beach is also tied to his grandmother in another way. (chapter 94) When she suggested going for a walk together, he refused, for in his mind, the destination would be the ocean. To go there with her would have meant transforming that space into something else: a shared moment marked by what was about to end (chapter 53). It would have forced him to confront her condition directly, and don’t forget that this place is strongly intertwined with sincerity. He couldn’t mask his feelings. So he postponed it. And instead, he returns later—with Joo Jaekyung.

Now ask yourself: why here, and why with him? Because this is where the scene shifts. Kim Dan did not only come to the beach to find comfort. He also came to reach a form of closure. (chapter 94) For the first time, what had always structured him—enduring, adapting, protecting others—no longer works.

And in that moment, he is not alone. Joo Jaekyung is there. He could have stayed in the car. (chapter 94) He was even told to. But he didn’t. He chose to remain beside him.

This changes the situation entirely. Because Kim Dan is no longer speaking into silence. He is speaking in the presence of someone who stayed. And that creates a new tension. On the one hand, he still does not want to burden him. On the other, he can no longer remain silent. This is why his honesty takes this form: hesitant, repeated, apologetic—but expressed. So what are we witnessing here?

Not simply a confession. But a shift in conditions. The place offered meaning—but not enough to contain what he felt.
The memory of his grandmother gave direction—but not resolution. (chapter 94) And the presence of Joo Jaekyung created something new: A space where silence was no longer the only option. The sentence that once stopped at “To be ho” now reaches its end.

Not because fear has disappeared — but because, for the first time, it is no longer stronger than the need to speak.

The Shore: Where Two Worlds Meet

If we look more closely at the setting of this scene, we begin to understand why it had to take place here—and nowhere else. (chapter 94) The beach is not just a backdrop. It is a boundary.

A meeting point between two elements: Water and earth. Movement and stability. Depth and surface.

Water carries memory. It is fluid, unstable, impossible to fully grasp. It reflects what lies beneath—emotion, unconscious experience, everything that cannot easily be contained or articulated. The shore, by contrast, belongs to the realm of the tangible. Sand, ground, the space one can stand on. It represents reality, structure, adulthood—the world of roles and responsibilities.

And where are Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung positioned? (chapter 94) Exactly at that threshold. They are not in the water. They are not fully on stable ground either. They sit at the point where both worlds meet. And psychologically, this position mirrors their state. Both men are suspended between two identities:

  • the child shaped by past experiences (chapter 94) (chapter 94)
  • the adult defined by roles, expectations, and survival strategies (chapter 94) (chapter 94)

The amber light of the setting sun intensifies this ambiguity. It does not belong fully to day or night. It merges opposites rather than separating them. Just like this moment. Just like them.

But the meaning of this place becomes clearer when we compare two moments that occur here. When the grandmother speaks about Kim Dan, her words establish a distance: (chapter 65) Even though they have lived together for years, she positions herself outside his inner world. She observes him—but does not truly reach him. And the image reflects this separation. The water and the sand remain clearly divided. The boundary holds.

Now compare this to the later scene. (chapter 94) Joo Jaekyung appears to create distance—but in reality, he reduces it. The “friend” is himself. What cannot be said directly is nevertheless expressed. And this time, the image of the shore changes. The colors warm. The boundary between water and sand begins to dissolve. The elements no longer remain strictly separated—they begin to blend.

This shift is decisive. Where the grandmother’s words maintained distance, Joo Jaekyung’s words—however indirect—open a space. And this is why Kim Dan can ask a question here. (chapter 94) Because he does not interrupt. He listens. (chapter 94) He allows the confession to unfold—even in its distorted form. And once it has been spoken, he does something no one else has done before. He recognizes it. (chapter 94) In that moment, indirect speech is no longer needed. What Joo Jaekyung could not say directly is named—clearly, without hesitation. And this act changes the structure of the exchange.

Because Kim Dan is not simply responding. He is translating. (chapter 94) Not simply because of the place. But because of who is beside him.

Joo Jaekyung does not fully understand him. But he does something essential. He stays, as he has come to associate solitude with boredom. (chapter 94) He waits and later listens. And he does not turn away. He shows an interest in his thoughts and inner world. (chapter 94)

For the first time, Kim Dan is no longer facing a boundary that reflects distance—but a presence that allows something to pass through it. The shore, then, is not only a line between two worlds. (chapter 94)

But this exchange is not one-sided. Because Joo Jaekyung’s confession does more than reveal something about himself—it creates a form of acceptance and reciprocity. By exposing his own vulnerability, however indirectly, he does not remain outside Kim Dan’s inner world. He steps into it—and, at the same time, invites Kim Dan to do the same. Hence he is now capable to express his true admiration: (chapter 94)

And this changes not only their exchange—but the meaning of the place itself. Because for Kim Dan, the beach had never been just a location. It was tied to a memory that was not his own. To something his grandmother had described—something beautiful, something meaningful—but always experienced alone. What he sought there, in the past, was not simply comfort. Like mentioned above, it was connection.

The hope that, by returning to that place, he might feel what she had felt. That the beauty of the ocean could bridge the distance between them. That it could, even briefly, soften his loneliness. But that experience had always remained incomplete. Because it was never shared. Now, for the first time, that changes.

He is no longer alone in front of the ocean. He is not imagining what someone else once felt. He is living something—here, in the present—with someone beside him. (chapter 94) A moment that is not remembered. Not borrowed. Not projected. But shared.

That’s why he will never forget this moment. Because what he had longed for was not only to be understood—but to experience something meaningful with another person, without distance, without roles, without having to carry it alone.

And this is where the difference with the grandmother becomes clear. She spoke about Kim Dan without ever truly entering his experience. The distance remained intact. Joo Jaekyung, by contrast, does something else. He does not know Kim Dan’s entire past —but he reaches toward him. Not by asking directly. But by making himself available.

And this movement carries an implicit request: (chapter 94) not to remain alone in what has just been revealed.

In other words, Joo Jaekyung is not only confessing. He is asking—quietly, almost unconsciously—to be trusted and as such accepted. And Kim Dan responds to that request. Not by withdrawing. Not by protecting the other through silence. But by speaking.

The shore no longer separates. It begins to connect. Not fully. Not clearly. Not without hesitation. But enough for something new to emerge.

And this “something” can now be named more precisely. (chapter 94): friendship.

Not as a completed bond—but as a shift in how they relate to one another. Until this moment, their interactions had been structured by roles: patient and therapist, employer and subordinate, champion and supporter. Each exchange was framed by function, expectation, or necessity. Here, that structure loosens. They are no longer speaking from their roles—but to each other. Hence they look at each other at the end.

Not to fulfill a function. Not to maintain a balance. But to share something that belongs to neither of those frameworks. The first moment that carries the shape of friendship.

Signs of Direction: Sun, Lighthouse, Pier, and Umbrellas

If the shore marks a boundary, the horizon introduces another question altogether: not where they are, but where they are heading. (chapter 94)

And here, the visual composition becomes extremely revealing. The scene does not simply give us a beautiful beach. It places in front of the reader several structures of orientation: the sun (chapter 94), the lighthouse (chapter 94), the pier (chapter 94), and, more discreetly, the red tent with the two umbrellas (chapter 94). None of them is accidental. But their meaning is not only symbolic. They reveal something that neither of them have not yet fully realized. That they were never entirely alone.

The Lighthouse and the Sun: Two Models of Survival

The contrast between the two protagonists is rooted in how they seek light. For Kim Dan, orientation was never about an abstract goal, but a concrete person: his grandmother. She was the fixed point that prevented him from drifting into total darkness.

This is why the lighthouse is his defining symbol. (chapter 94) It stands visible and steady—a structure built to guide and prevent loss. Yet, Kim Dan associates it with loneliness. The lighthouse embodies the gap between what is present and what he is able to perceive. It provides direction, but not warmth; it signals, but does not embrace. It stands near, yet remains fundamentally separate. For Dan, the lighthouse represents support without true intimacy—a guidance that keeps him vertical but leaves him emotionally shivering.

Joo Jaekyung operates by a different celestial logic. When he speaks of his “friend,” he associates survival with the sun—a distant, overwhelming source of power. (chapter 94) In Jaekyung’s philosophy, one endures by fixing their eyes on a high, unreachable goal. The sun provides the energy to keep moving, but like the lighthouse, it offers no closeness. It is a strategy of survival based on projection and distance. It kept him alive, but it also kept him isolated. His “goal” is like his life strategy: disciplined and bright, but emotionally unreachable. And what is the common denominator between them? By keeping their gaze on the sun or lighthouse, they couldn’t see that they are surrounded —by nature and by human structures. (chapter 94) They are in reality not alone. The sea, the sky, the light… but also the lighthouse, the pier, the tent.

The Pier: The Human Path

Between the verticality of the lighthouse and the distance of the sun lies the pier. Extending outward into the water, it represents something fundamentally different: not a distant point, not a fixed signal—but a path. A human construction.
A movement toward something not yet reached.

But more importanty, the pier leads toward the lighthouse. (chapter 59) In other words, it connects movement to orientation.

And this is exactly what happens in the dialogue.

(chapter 94) his words seem, at first, to reinforce isolation. They reduce human experience to sameness. They remove the possibility of being uniquely understood. But that is only one side of it. Because these words also do something else. They reach Kim Dan. They meet him precisely at the point of his fear: the fear of being alone, of being left behind, of losing the only structure that gave his life direction.

By framing loneliness as something universal, Jaekyung transforms it. Not into something to escape—but into something survivable. And this is where the visual composition becomes decisive. While he speaks, the pier extends behind him—toward the lighthouse. His words follow the same movement. They begin in distance— but they arrive at Kim Dan, the “lighthouse”.

Even if unconsciously, he builds a bridge. On the other hand, his advice reflects his past philosophy. One could say that he isn’t offering empathy, for he is erasing difference. By reducing everyone to a single condition, he creates a defense against true connection. If everyone is “the same,” no one is uniquely lovable or truly distinct. His words reflect his indifference towards others.

Yet, his life contradicts his cynicism. He speaks as if he survived by solo strength, ignoring the “piers” in his own life—people like Hwang Byungchul (chapter 72) or his mother. He resists any narrative of dependence because to acknowledge others is to acknowledge vulnerability. He looks at the horizon and overlooks the pier at his side, even though he has been standing on it all along. It is because he was constantly staring at the “sun”. Therefore his reaction is not surprising. (chapter 94) To acknowledge others would mean acknowledging vulnerability—not just as a condition, but as something shared. So instead, he generalizes. He replaces relationship with sameness. And in doing so, he protects himself from the risk of trust.

As you can see, each element reflects something about Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung’s inner state and philosophy. This means that as soon as the athlete’s words reached the doctor’s lighthouse, the latter showed him that there was a light much closer to him than the “sun”… the “lighthouse”.

And then there are the more discreet signs in the background: the red tent and the two umbrellas. (chapter 94) These details are easy to overlook, and yet they may be among the most intimate symbols in the entire sequence. Observe that when Kim Dan admits that he wished he had met him sooner, the red tent and the two umbrellas already stand there in the background.

The symbolism is almost painfully clear. The red tent suggests shelter, enclosure, perhaps even the outline of a home. The two umbrellas echo the possibility of shared protection, of two people occupying the same protected space. And yet, neither character has stepped into that space. The tent remains in the distance, just as the umbrellas remain unused. Home exists as a possibility, but it is not yet inhabited.

This is what makes the image so moving. They are no longer completely separate, but they are not “inside” yet either. They are still outside the shelter that awaits them. The home is there, but it has not yet been entered. In other words, the beach scene does not conclude their journey. It stages the threshold of it.

And that is why all these directional symbols matter together.

The sun shows the old logic of survival through distant purpose. The lighthouse shows the old logic of attachment through lonely guidance. The pier shows the beginning of a path toward someone else and stands for connection, endurance and trust. The tent and the umbrellas show the possibility of a shared dwelling that has not yet been claimed.

So the horizon in this scene is not empty at all. It is crowded with future meanings. But none of them is fully realized. The characters are still between states, between models of life, between kinds of love. They can see direction now, but they have not yet arrived. And perhaps this is precisely the point.

The scene does not tell us that they are already safe. It tells us that they are no longer directionless and alone. (chapter 94) They are moving toward each other mentally and emotionally.

The Champion Without a Childhood

And yet, even within this setting, something is still missing. When Joo Jaekyung speaks about his past, the visual language becomes striking.´We do not see a child. (chapter 94)

We see an adult figure—walking through a space that should belong to childhood. A silhouette. A presence without age. It is not simply that the child is absent. It is that he was never allowed to exist. But this absence does not emerge in isolation. It is embedded in the environment itself. Look closely at the setting of his memory. The narrow streets. The damaged houses. The dense accumulation of structures. Everything is gray, as if there was no life at all.

And above all: the mountain in front of him—blocked, obscured, almost inaccessible. He is surrounded by civilization. But not in the sense of protection or community. Rather, as constraint. As enclosure. As a space already marked by hardship, deterioration, and survival. This is not a childhood landscape. It is a system.

And this observation leads me to the following deduction. Jaekyung does not know nature. Not as openness. Not as refuge. Not as something one can enter freely.

The mountain is there —but it is not reachable, as it has lost its true function. The sky is present—but it is not experienced. Everything is filtered through structures. Through walls. Through streets. Through necessity.

This is why the sun becomes so central in his narrative. (chapter 94) Not as beauty. Not as warmth in a relational sense. But as something else: as air. (chapter 94)

As the only available form of escape. When he speaks of finding “a goal to work toward,” and the image shifts toward the sun, this is not just ambition. It is survival. The sun is the only thing that cannot be blocked by his environment. The only thing that exists beyond the system surrounding him. He does not move toward nature. He looks upward—because upward is the only direction that remains open.

And this is precisely where Kim Dan’s response becomes so striking. (chapter 94) He can’t help himself asking him for a confirmation. When Joo Jaekyung begins with (chapter 94), the formulation appears to create distance. It suggests another person, another life, another experience. But this distance does not hold.

Because the narrative that follows immediately undermines it. The “friend” is described as someone who, at a decisive moment, felt as if he was completely alone in the world. (chapter 94) Someone who grew up without parents, without siblings, without any form of support. The statement is absolute. It leaves no room for exception. And this is where the logic of the confession reveals itself.

If this person truly experienced himself as entirely alone—if there was no one to rely on, no one to turn to—then the very idea of a “friend” becomes impossible. The term contradicts the condition it describes. (chapter 94) In other words, the story cancels its own premise. The “friend” cannot exist as a separate figure. He can only be the speaker himself. At the same time, the main lead’s confession displays that he has no true friend in his life in the end. These words expose his isolation and loneliness.

In addition, this allows us to understand the deeper structure of his trauma. This is not only parentification. It is deprivation on multiple levels. Emotional, yes. But also spatial. Experiential. He was not only denied care. He was denied an environment in which childhood could unfold. (chapter 94), the exact opposite of Kim Dan.

This is why the visual metaphor is so radical. (chapter 94) There is no rupture between past and present. No transition. No visible child. Only continuity. A life that begins already in function. A childhood replaced by endurance.

And this absence is reinforced later. When his mother denies this reality (chapter 74), she does not simply reject his suffering. She erases the condition that produced it. Which leaves him with no framework to understand what is missing.

This explains everything. Why he distances himself. (chapter 94) Why he reduces relationships to roles. Why he cannot understand his own emotions. Because there is no internal reference for them. The child is missing.

And this is precisely where the connection to the present becomes decisive. Because the landscape he carries within him—the enclosed streets, the obstructed mountain, the unreachable outside—stands in direct contrast to the image that surrounds him now.

The open horizon. The visible sea. The unobstructed light. (chapter 94) This shared experience makes him see the world in a whole new light. It is no longer gray, but colorful, as he is not alone anymore. He no longer needs to look at the horizon or the sun. (chapter 94)

And even more importantly: the painting. (chapter 93) The mountain.
The sunlight. A version of nature that is no longer blocked—but offered. This is not accidental. It suggests something fundamental: what was once inaccessible is now placed before him. But he cannot reach it alone.

This is where Kim Dan’s role becomes clear. Because Kim Dan is not only the one who listens. He is the one who already belongs to that space. He understands nature—not as distance, but as experience. (chapter 94) Not as something to look at—but something to enter.

And this is where we can return to the director’s words. (chapter 75) This was never only about people. It was about environment. About perception. About everything that exists beyond the narrow structure in which Jaekyung learned to survive: shared experience.

In that sense, Kim Dan does not simply recognize the child in him. (chapter 94) He represents something else: a path. Not upward, like the sun. But outward. Toward a world that was always there— but never truly lived.

The Piercing Amber Gaze

And this is precisely where Kim Dan’s role becomes decisive. When he says, (chapter 94) something subtle, but profound, happens. He is no longer addressing the champion, the figure admired by others for his strength and victories. He is speaking to the child. Not the one who succeeded, but the one who endured. That’s why later the author turned the adult Joo Jaekyung into a “child” (chapter 94) In that moment, admiration shifts into recognition. What is acknowledged is not performance, but survival.

This is where the symbolism of amber becomes essential. Amber is not merely a color. It is fossilized tree resin—something that once flowed from a living organism, exposed to light, warmth, and time. Over time, this fluid substance solidifies, preserving within it traces of what once existed: fragments of life, suspended and protected. For this reason, amber has long been associated with the preservation of time, with memory made tangible, with something that endures beyond its original state. But this preservation is not neutral. What amber holds within it are not only traces of life, but also moments of rupture —organisms (insects, pollen) that were caught, immobilized, unable to escape. In this sense, amber is inseparable from loss. It preserves not only what once lived, but also what was interrupted, what was wounded, what could not continue. It is memory—but memory marked by pain.

But amber carries another layer of meaning. Often described as “sunlight in solidified form,” it is linked to warmth, vitality, and life energy. At the same time, across many cultures, it has been used as a protective talisman—worn to ward off harm, to bring balance, to protect the vulnerable. It is both a carrier of memory and a source of protection. Something that does not erase what has been, but transforms it into something that can be held, endured, and even passed on.

This dual nature is crucial. Because Kim Dan embodies precisely this transformation.

Like amber, he originates from something living—from the “tree,” (chapter 41) from a place of growth, exposure, and vulnerability. This interpretation gets once again validated on the beach. (chapter 94) A tree is placed right behind the main lead. Doc Dan has experienced loss, abandonment, and instability. And yet, unlike Joo Jaekyung, he has not responded by distancing himself or hardening into detachment. He has not rejected what he felt. Instead, he has absorbed it.

What he carries is not untouched innocence, but something altered through time—something that has endured. His capacity to care, to attach, to return to others despite the risk of loss is not naïve. It is the result of transformation.

This is what defines his gaze. (chapter 94) When Kim Dan looks at Joo Jaekyung, he does not stop at the surface—the fame, the strength, the constructed identity. He perceives what lies beneath it, but he does not expose it in order to dismantle it. He preserves it differently. (chapter 94) And this is where the nature of his admiration becomes clear. Kim Dan does admire strength, but not the kind that needs to be constantly proven or displayed. (chapter 94) He recognizes something prior to all of that: endurance, resistance, the ability to survive without support, without childhood, without refuge.

When he says that enduring such hardship is a testament to Joo Jaekyung’s strength, he does not diminish that strength—he relocates it. (chapter 94) He shows him that it was never dependent on winning, never tied to performance or recognition. It existed long before the fights (chapter 94), long before the titles, long before anyone acknowledged it. And this changes everything. Because if strength has already been proven, then it no longer needs to be demonstrated again and again. It no longer needs to be defended, tested, or confirmed through every challenge.

This is why the moment is both destabilizing and liberating. It destabilizes Joo Jaekyung because it undermines the foundation of his entire system (chapter 94), which was built on proving himself through action and endurance. But at the same time, it frees him from that necessity. For the first time, strength is no longer something he has to chase: it is something he already possesses.

And this shift has a deeper implication, because it directly contradicts the words that had defined him for so long. The father’s voice that told him: (chapter 73) A statement that reduced his existence to failure from the very beginning, leaving him with only one option—to prove, endlessly, that this judgment was wrong.

Up until now, everything in his life can be understood as a response to that accusation. Every fight, every victory, every act of endurance functioned as a counterargument. Strength was not something he had—it was something he had to demonstrate, again and again, in order to negate that original condemnation. But Kim Dan’s words on the beach break that logic. (chapter 94) He even wishes, he had known him before so that he could express his admiration much sooner. That’s how the jinx gets removed.

By recognizing his endurance as strength, he removes the need for proof. He does not argue against the past. He does not deny what happened. Instead, he reframes it. What was once the basis for humiliation becomes the evidence of resilience. What was meant to define him as a “loser” is revealed as the very condition that required strength to survive.

In that sense, Kim Dan is not simply comforting him. He is undoing the structure of that internal voice. Because if Joo Jaekyung’s strength is already real—already proven through what he endured—then the accusation loses its power. It no longer requires an answer. It no longer demands a reaction. This is precisely why his response is not verbal, but visual. (chapter 94) He keeps looking at Kim Dan, unable to look away, as if held in place by something he cannot yet fully process. It is not fascination in the superficial sense, but recognition. The words reach a part of him that had remained unaddressed for years. (chapter 94) The child, who had long been denied acknowledgment, is finally being seen—and more importantly, affirmed.

If he no longer needs to disprove that he is “nothing,” then he is no longer bound to constant confrontation. He no longer needs to accept every challenge, no longer needs to measure himself through endless trials. For the first time, he can step out of that cycle. He can choose. He can decide what is worth engaging with—and what is not.

In other words, Kim Dan’s recognition does not simply validate him. It releases him. What he is responding to is not only kindness, but accuracy. For the first time, someone names his past without reducing it, without turning it into weakness or failure. (chapter 94) And this is what makes Kim Dan’s words so powerful: they do not impose meaning—they reveal it.

Because in that moment, the structure through which Joo Jaekyung had perceived both himself and others begins to shift. Kim Dan is no longer reduced to a role, no longer confined to the position of a physical therapist or a tool meant to counter his “jinx.” He becomes something else entirely.

A presence. Someone who sees him. Someone who understands him. Someone who reaches him. In other words, for the first time, Joo Jaekyung is able to recognize him not through function, but through relation. Not as a means—but as a person. And this is precisely what opens the possibility of something he has never truly experienced before:

friendship.

This is exactly what amber does. It does not erase the past, nor does it glorify it. It preserves it, but transforms its meaning. What was once a source of isolation becomes something that can be acknowledged. What was once hidden becomes something that can be seen without shame. This is why Kim Dan’s gaze is piercing—not because it is aggressive, but because it reaches what had been sealed away and makes it visible without destroying it.

And this transformation has consequences. Because if his past is no longer a source of shame, but of strength, then it no longer renders him silent. What he had once accepted—criticism, blame, humiliation—because he believed it reflected who he was, begins to lose its legitimacy. The internalized voice that reduced him to nothing is no longer left unanswered. And in doing so, it offers something new. Not judgment. (chapter 57) (chapter 89) Not expectation. (chapter 88) But a form of recognition that restores his position in relation to others. For the first time, he is no longer defined by what was done to him. He is no longer confined to enduring in silence. Instead, he gains something he had been denied: the ability to respond.

To speak back. To defend himself. To demand respect—not as a performance, but as a condition of his existence.

Seeing Each Other

This is why the final image of the scene carries so much weight. (chapter 94)

They sit on the same bench. They face the same horizon. There is no confrontation. That’s why they are no longer facing each other like rivals or challengers. (chapter 9) The tension that once structured their encounters has disappeared.No imbalance of power. No role to perform. For the first time, their positions align. (chapter 94)

Earlier, the movement seemed to come from Joo Jaekyung. (chapter 94) Like the pier, he extended something of himself outward—hesitant, indirect, not fully conscious—yet reaching toward the other. His words, even in their abstraction, had begun to bridge a distance. Now, something shifts. It is as if the lighthouse responds. (chapter 94) That’s why doc Dan is wearing the color than the lighthouse. Not by moving—but by illuminating.

By revealing how far that movement has already gone. (chapter 94) By casting light on a path that was not recognized as such. What Joo Jaekyung could not see—what he could not yet name—is made visible through Kim Dan’s recognition. The distance he believed to be absolute is shown to be already crossed, at least in part.

And this changes the meaning of the moment. Because for the first time, they are not approaching each other from opposite sides. (chapter 94) They are already there. Together. And this is why for the first time, they see each other.

Not as:

  • champion and employee
  • strength and dependence
  • giver and receiver

But as two individuals shaped by their past. Two people who have endured. Two people standing—at different points—on the same threshold between what was and what might still become. They are finally friends.

The Direction of The Gaze

So if we return, one last time, to the images that quietly accompanied them—the paintings—we might begin to see it differently. At first, it seemed to reflect distance. (chapter 18) A frozen landscape, divided, silent. Then, later, it changed: the trees regained life, a mountain appeared, water began to reflect the light. The scene softened, but it never became whole. (chapter 93) The fragmentation remained.

And perhaps this is precisely the point. Because what the painting was showing was not only a change in atmosphere—but a direction.

A destination. The forest. The mountain. The water.

Places that exist beyond the walls, beyond the roles they had learned to inhabit. And perhaps the scene in episode 93 makes this even clearer. (chapter 93)

This time, Kim Dan is the one facing the painting. He looks toward the landscape—the trees, the mountain, the water—while Joo Jaekyung sits beside it, almost turned away. The image is closer to him, placed on his side, and yet he does not truly see it. The distance between them has narrowed—but their orientations are not yet the same.

Kim Dan is already aligned with what the painting suggests. Joo Jaekyung is not. The destination is near him—but not yet accessible to him. And this is where their roles begin to shift. The painting is already announcing that doc Dan is taking the lead. Thus Joo Jaekyung followed him to the beach. (chapter 94)

Because if the painting indicates a direction—toward the woods, the mountain, a space beyond the structures that confined them—then it is Kim Dan who is able to recognize it. Not because he is stronger. But because he has already learned to move through loss without closing himself off. Hence he could confess in his drunken state and later recognize his feelings pretty quickly. (chapter 41)

And this is where the story quietly folds back onto itself. The puppy and the dog we are invited to remember… are no longer there. (chapter 94) They vanished from Doc Dan’s life, exactly like the puppy who is now buried near those same hills and trees. (chapter 59) The image of warmth we associate with it is, in reality, the trace of a loss. So he did not just lose his parents, but also pets.

Just like the painting. Just like the beach. What appears as beauty is never separate from what has been lost.

And yet—this is where Kim Dan becomes truly significant. Because despite that loss, he did not turn away.

He did not close himself off (chapter 57), nor reduce others to something distant or manageable. Instead, he remained capable of attachment. Of care. (chapter 7) Of returning, again and again, to places that carried pain—because they also carried meaning.

In this sense, the painting was never just a background. (chapter 93)

It was a quiet anticipation. Not only of the beach, or the conversation, or the emerging honesty—but of something more fundamental: a way of being. Not whole. Not free from fragmentation. But no longer frozen.

And perhaps this is why the image never becomes fully bright. Because what we are witnessing is not a completed transformation—but a movement. From silence to speech. From distance to presence. From loss… to the possibility of loving again.

And perhaps this is where the meaning of that moment on the beach becomes clearest. Because this is also where Joo Jaekyung begins to find an answer to a question he could not yet articulate: (chapter 93) “ The answer is not given to him directly. It appears in front of him on the beach. (chapter 94)

In the way Kim Dan looks at him—without distance, without calculation, without turning away. There is no performance in that gaze, no role to maintain. Only a quiet, unguarded presence. And in that moment, something shifts.

The one who had learned to distance himself, to objectify, to control… is now confronted with something he cannot reduce. Not strength. Not obligation. But something else. Something he does not yet fully understand — but can no longer ignore. Love. And perhaps this is why the image lingers. Because while the champion is still searching for words, the “child” has already sensed it.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Man 👤 Who Knew Too Much 👮‍♂️ – part 2

I know that my avid readers were expecting an analysis of episode 94, especially because the conversation between the two main leads was so moving. Actually, the illustration and the title are already prepared. Beautiful, right? Yet I could not help myself returning once again to the criminals. My fascination with thrillers and investigations probably gives it away: when I read this story, I instinctively begin to examine every image, words and event like a detective reconstructing a case.

You may therefore wonder what triggered this sudden return to the question of conspiracy.

Surprisingly, it started with a very quiet panel. (chapter 94) In this moment we learn that Kim Dan lost his parents in an accident when he was a child, though we shouldn’t trust this confession as the truth due to the debts. Anyway, the word “accident” immediately resonates with a principle that has appeared again and again throughout the story: someone being at the wrong time, at the wrong place.

In Kim Dan’s case, however, the catastrophe is natural. It is not the result of manipulation or conspiracy. Fate simply intervened. The tragedy shaped his life, leaving him alone with his grandmother and forcing him to grow up prematurely. This explains the origins of his powerlessness and passivity. His entire existence is marked by the consequences of that accident. Yet precisely because this accident is natural, it casts a revealing light on the world of the criminals.

In their world, accidents are manufactured. (chapter 40) What appears to be coincidence is often carefully engineered.

The Criminal Method

When we examine the schemes surrounding Joo Jaekyung and Kim Dan, a recurring structure becomes visible. The antagonists rarely attack their targets directly. Instead, they create situations where events unfold in such a way that someone appears to have been caught at the wrong place, at the wrong time.

The pattern is remarkably consistent. First, the media narrative is prepared. Hence an article about his shoulder injury was leaked to the press. (chapter 36) At the same time, social medias were manipulated in order to stir public pressure and push the champion toward accepting the match in the States. (chapter 36) But we only discover this MO thanks to the match with Arnaud Gabriel and the Entertainment agency’s involvement. (chapter 81)

After the incident in the United States, the manipulation did not stop. On the contrary, it entered a new phase. The media reported that Joo Jaekyung had been suspended because of his temperament. (chapter 52) Officially, the story suggested that his own behavior had caused the problem. In reality, however, this removal also had another function: it cleared space for Baek Junmin’s rise. That’s the reason why the article with The Shotgun was placed directly below the star’s and why the director Hwang Byungchul accepted easily the disqualification of his former pupil. (chapter 71)

At the same time, the public image of the champion was gradually reframed. (chapter 54) He was increasingly portrayed as reckless and irresponsible for continuing to fight despite his condition. (chapter 54) In this new narrative, the original leak of confidential medical information was no longer treated as the real wrongdoing. The focus shifted entirely onto the athlete himself.

Rumors about the champion’s injuries, his unstable recovery, and his arrogance could now circulate in advance, so that any later setback—including a possible defeat in Paris—would appear understandable, even inevitable. (chapter 70) Once such stories enter public discourse—injury, temper, arrogance—every later incident can be read as confirmation. The narrative becomes self-reinforcing. The media no longer merely reports events; it prepares the framework through which future events will be judged.

Second, a destabilizing trigger is introduced. Often this takes the form of drugs or pharmaceutical substances. The drugged beverage in the United States (chapter 37) and the suspicious spray (chapter 49) used during the manipulated match both belong to this category. These substances create uncertainty about the athlete’s physical condition and about the legitimacy of his treatment. But this implies the involvement of the pharmaceutical industry. (chapter 41)

The third step in this pattern is the involvement of authorities and institutions. Once the destabilizing event has occurred, official actors step in: security personnel, referees, medical staff, health centers, or the sports organization itself. Their intervention transforms a chaotic incident into an officially documented event.

This stage is essential, because institutions possess something criminals do not: legitimacy. The incident in the United States reveals how institutional authority can be used to control the narrative. After the incident with the drugged beverage was reported to the MFC, security personnel intervened and brought Kim Dan into an interrogation room. (chapter 40) The scene resembled a police investigation, yet these men were not representatives of the state. Hence there was no translator and lawyer. They were dressed-up employees of a private organization whose primary objective is to protect the company from scandal and as such from losing money

During the interrogation, the agents attempted to frame Kim Dan by focusing on the “nutrition shake” he had allegedly consumed. He seemed to be part of a scheme. (chapter 40) At first glance, this strategy appears effective. By redirecting attention toward the therapist, the organization can distance itself from the real problem: the suspicious beverage that had been introduced into the environment of the fight.

However, the scheme overlooks an important detail. The incident did not remain entirely undocumented. (chapter 40) A doctor took a blood sample from Kim Dan, and the laboratory later produced a component analysis report. (chapter 41) This report becomes significant for two reasons. First, it confirms that the contamination was real. The substance had indeed been introduced into the environment surrounding the fight. Such a finding inevitably raises questions about how the drink entered the system controlled by the MFC. In order to avoid institutional responsibility, the organization therefore needed a convenient explanation—someone outside its sphere of influence who could be blamed for the incident, antis. (chapter 41)

Second, the timing of the report is revealing. The results of the component analysis appear in the very same episode in which the MFC doctors give their approval for the next fight. (chapter 41) This coincidence exposes another layer of the mechanism. While the laboratory analysis confirms that an illicit substance had been present, the medical authorities simultaneously authorize the champion to continue fighting. The two decisions cannot easily be separated. Together, they suggest that the involvement of the doctors helps stabilize the narrative: the suspicious beverage becomes a secondary issue, while the focus shifts toward the champion’s physical condition and his decision to fight despite his shoulder injury.

In this way, medical authority does not simply clarify the situation. It contributes to transforming a troubling incident into a new plot and manageable story. To conclude, the MFC medical authorities approving the fight are now part of the scheme, accomplices of the set up as well. Doctors have entered the chain of events. But why did all the employees (security agents, doctors) started helping? The fear of a scandal and the involvement of the media … and naturally loss of money (chapter 40) That’s why they needed a scapegoat. First Kim Dan, later antis and finally the athlete himself. And who fears a scandal in Jinx? One might say Park Namwook (chapter 31) who always hides behind authorities and shows distrust toward fighters. But he is just reflecting the attitude of the other MFC accomplices.

The same mechanism appears during the events surrounding the manipulated match and the switched spray. Joo Jaekyung’s ankle got injured after the substance had been used. (chapter 50) Observe that in the locker room, the coach declares the athlete as fit despite the injury before going to the health center. The chronology is important, as the MFC doctors have the final saying. So when the champion is taken to the health center before the fight. the responsibility is shifted.

By examining the athlete and clearing him for the match despite the injury, the medical authorities effectively became responsible for the decision that allowed the fight to proceed. In principle, such a medical examination should have resulted in documentation of several elements: the condition of the ankle, the treatment administered, and the circumstances surrounding the injury. But I am suspecting that the documentation was either ignored or deliberately minimized the ankle injury. Why?

Keep in mind that the narrative that later circulated in the media tells a different story. Instead of focusing on the injured ankle and the suspicious spray, the discussion shifted almost entirely toward the champion’s shoulder injury. (chapter 54) The public narrative portrayed him as reckless for continuing to fight despite his physical condition. The responsibility for the situation was therefore redirected toward the athlete himself. MFC’s notoriety remained clean, the employees were all safe, they were not facing any financial or legal repercussion contrary to the star. (chapter 54) Hence Park Namwook remained passive.

The later meeting at the restaurant confirms this strategy of containment. The CEO of the MFC (chapter 69) apologized for the behavior of the security staff toward one of Joo Jaekyung’s team members. (chapter 69) Significantly, this apology took place behind closed doors, not in front of the media, and doc Dan is still left in the dark about it. The goal was therefore not transparency but damage control. They were in reality attempting to bury everything, to buy some time, until the athlete would lose his next match.

By presenting the incident as the result of overzealous security agents, the organization could deflect attention from the more troubling questions raised by the drugged beverage and the switched spray, the lack of security and neglect. (chapter 69) The problem was reduced to a matter of manners rather than a potential security failure or institutional complicity. In this way, the apology functioned less as an admission of guilt than as a mechanism to close the case quietly before it reached the public sphere.

Interestingly, the executive describes the substance as a “fake supplement.” This terminology already reveals a subtle shift in language. The laboratory analysis had identified the compound as an aphrodisiac. In other words, a drug that can exist within the legal pharmaceutical sphere. By presenting the substance as a “fake supplement,” the organization avoids raising uncomfortable questions about the origin and distribution of the compound. The problem is no longer framed as the misuse of a pharmaceutical drug but as the circulation of a counterfeit product introduced by an external criminal actor. In this way, the language protects not only the organization itself but also the broader pharmaceutical system from scrutiny. And don’t forget that Doc Dan got informed about the connection between the rival gym and the parent pharmaceutical company in the States.

And now, the modus operandi of the villains and schemers becomes clear. When these incidents are considered together, a consistent criminal method emerges. The antagonists try to trap their targets like hunters. Instead, they construct situations in which events appear to unfold naturally while responsibility is quietly redirected elsewhere.

The structure remains remarkably stable: first a compromised situation is created, then a destabilizing act of sabotage is introduced, and finally responsibility is redirected toward a convenient scapegoat. In this way, institutions remain intact while the blame falls on expendable individuals.

This is how the underworld functions. Someone is always placed in the wrong place at the wrong time, and the lowest figures in the hierarchy—the minions—are left to take the fall. For this very reason, criminal organizations and drug cartels are notoriously difficult to dismantle: the system protects itself by sacrificing those at the bottom while the structures above remain untouched.

If this pattern truly governs the criminal strategy, then the attack against Kim Dan cannot be limited to a single incident. The physical therapist represents the most vulnerable element in the entire situation: he comes from poverty, lacks institutional protection, and his professional credibility can easily be questioned. For this reason, it is likely that the conspirators will attempt not one manipulation but several. And the last one will force them to expose their true nature: they are criminals and no doctors, directors or athletes (kidnapping).

These stunts will almost certainly revolve around the same thematic field that has already appeared in the story: wrongdoings, drugs and substances. Whether through medication (chapter 91), drinks , smoking, (chapter 65), or other forms of contamination, each incident would undermine Kim Dan’s credibility as a medical professional. If the therapist can be portrayed as irresponsible, incompetent, or compromised by substances, the institutional narrative could once again shift responsibility onto him.

Kim Dan and The Medical Trap

Once this mechanism becomes visible, the events in the locker room acquire a different meaning. At the very moment when the scheme reaches its decisive phase (chapter 52), Kim Dan is no longer present. After confronting him and suspecting a betrayal (chapter 51), Joo Jaekyung leaves the locker room alone and goes to the health center. And don’t forget that before, he even refused his treatment for the ankle injury before. (chapter 50)

As a result, Kim Dan is absent when the champion is treated at the MFC medical center and at the health center. (chapter 50) He therefore has no knowledge of what happens there: the medical examination, the decisions taken by the doctors, and the institutional narrative that later emerges from this encounter.

This absence is crucial. The criminal method described above requires the presence of a convenient scapegoat at the moment when the official version of events is constructed. (chapter 51) But this time, the pattern is disrupted. Kim Dan is not there when the institutions intervene.

Paradoxically, the accusation that drove Joo Jaekyung to distance himself from his therapist also removes him from the very situation in which he might once again have been blamed. The scapegoat has disappeared from the scene.

That’s why Joo Jaekyung had to take the blame for the outcome and the “scandal”, the brawl burying the incident with the switched spray!! (chapter 52)

To understand the consequences of this absence, we must therefore return to the locker room itself—where suspicion, photographs, and accusations first triggered the rupture between the two men. The confrontation in the locker room marks the moment when this criminal mechanism nearly achieves its objective. At this point in the story, suspicion has already begun to circulate around Kim Dan. (chapter 48) Photographs of him had been sent to Joo Jaekyung, suggesting that the physical therapist might have been communicating with Baek Junmin through the director of the other gym. (chapter 51) Confronted with these images and the growing confusion surrounding the match, the champion reaches a painful conclusion: that his roommate may have betrayed him.

In the locker room, this suspicion finally erupts into open accusation. (chapter 51) Joo Jaekyung confronts Kim Dan directly and demands an explanation. For the first time, the therapist is placed in the exact position that the criminal schemes had been preparing all along: the position of the possible traitor.

From the champion’s perspective, the logic seems simple. The photographs appear to show a connection between Kim Dan and his rival. While Joo Jaekyung believes he has finally uncovered the truth behind the sabotage, he is in fact reacting to a carefully constructed illusion. He is not realizing that the match was rigged, the jury and moderator had been bought. They had planned the tie. That way, MFc appears as a legitimate sports organization. The images and circumstances that appear to implicate Kim Dan are themselves part of the larger mechanism designed to redirect suspicion toward the most vulnerable figure in the entire situation. (chapter 51)

Timing, however, remains the key element in the criminals’ strategy: everything depends on placing someone at the wrong time and at the wrong place. Yet in this instance, the timing fails. The report of the incident surfaces only much later, after Potato hears about the situation. (chapter 52) By that point, the circumstances have already changed. The use of the switched spray introduces a new dimension to the case, and with it the possibility that another authority must intervene.

For the first time, the matter can no longer remain confined within the internal structures of the MFC. (chapter 52) The situation now risks attracting the attention of the police. As you can see, by remaining passive, Joo Jaekyung in his own way protected the physical therapist from real trouble. If he had truly blamed him, he could have “called” the police, but he did not.

In other words, the conspirators would have obtained their perfect scapegoat. The champion’s rejection therefore becomes a blessing in disguise. By removing Kim Dan from the scene, he prevents the therapist from being trapped inside the very mechanism designed to destroy him.

Baek Junmin and the Shadow of the Police

The appearance of the police in chapter 52 introduces an element that cannot be ignored. Up to this point, the incidents surrounding Joo Jaekyung have largely been contained within private structures: the MFC, its security personnel, and its medical institutions. These actors possess authority, but they remain part of a controlled environment where scandals can be managed internally.

The police represent a very different kind of authority. Interestingly, the narrative later reveals that Joo Jaekyung himself had previously spent time at a police station following an incident involving damaged property and a street fight. (chapter 74) The coincidence between these two moments—chapter 52 and chapter 74—suggests more than a simple narrative repetition. Both situations involve the same institutional actor: the police.

This connection raises an important question. Why does Joo Jaekyung immediately suspect Baek Junmin with the switched spray (chapter 51), when the pictures only show Choi Gilseok and he was not even present in the locker room?

The answer may lie in his own past experience. When the champion finds himself at the police station in the earlier incident, the situation appears similar to the pattern we have already observed elsewhere: a chaotic confrontation, witnesses present, and a narrative that quickly identifies him as the responsible party. Moreover, observe that during that night, the future champion (chapter 74) has a similar wound on the forehead than The Shotgun. (chapter 74) If Baek Junmin had orchestrated that earlier event, the strategy would have been simple but effective. Instead of attacking his rival directly, he could create circumstances that forced the authorities themselves to intervene. But why would he involve the police, when he is involved in the criminal world? Such a tactic would allow him to remove or weaken Joo Jaekyung without openly violating the protection imposed by his hyung (chapter 74), who had explicitly forbidden him from harming the champion.

In this scenario, the police become an instrument. By manipulating witnesses—perhaps even paying students who had previously been bullied (chapter 74) —Junmin could ensure that the story presented to the authorities pointed toward Joo Jaekyung. For the students involved, the arrangement would offer a practical advantage: financial compensation and a chance to escape their own precarious situation. But for that stunt, The Shotgun got to pay a heavy price: not only the scar on his forehead (chapter 93), but also a life in the shadow forever. It is clear that he could never get rich and famous through his illegal fights. Hence he resents the main lead so deeply.

The result would be a classic example of the principle that governs the criminal world depicted in the story: placing someone at the wrong time and the wrong place. His suspicion toward Baek Junmin does not arise from speculation alone. It is grounded in experience.

If this interpretation is correct, Baek Junmin’s strategy becomes clear. By orchestrating a situation that attracts police intervention, he can remove his rival without ever directly attacking him. IMO, he is on his way to play a similar trick than in the past. Hence he looks at the calendar, timing is essential. (chapter 93) The authorities perform the task that Junmin himself is forbidden to carry out.

Moreover, the champion understands another important rule of the criminal world: organized crime usually avoids the police whenever possible. The mob prefers to settle conflicts quietly through money, intimidation, or internal arrangements. Calling the authorities risks exposing the entire network. This interpretation also explains why Joo Jaekyung doesn’t report the trespassing and assault to the authorities. (chapter 18) He knows how the criminal world functions.

Thus I deduce that with this new offer to the former hospital director, the Shotgun is involving not only the medical world more deeply into the scheme, but also the police. (chapter 91) The article reports that the director of X General Hospital was accused of sexual harassment by several members of the hospital staff. The scandal eventually forced the institution to suspend his medical license. Yet the wording of the report also exposes an important detail: the hospital reacted slowly, and the affair was handled primarily as an internal disciplinary matter.

In principle, repeated sexual harassment by a hospital director should not remain merely an administrative issue. Such actions constitute criminal offenses and could have led to a police investigation. Instead, the institution appears to have contained the scandal within its own structures.

In other words, the hospital followed the same logic that we have already observed in the MFC and within the criminal world itself: avoid the police whenever possible. The reasons are obvious. Once law enforcement becomes involved, internal arrangements lose their power and other crimes could come to the surface. Reports are reopened, testimonies are examined, and the entire chain of responsibility may become visible.

Another important ingredient of this plot is silence. The scandals are not denied outright; they are contained, privatized, and buried. The MFC admits the set-up only behind closed doors. The hospital treats criminal behavior as an internal disciplinary matter. The underworld, for its part, prefers money and intimidation to police reports. In each case, silence becomes a tool of power. What remains unspoken protects the system. That’s why the witnesses and victims need to speak up and report the crimes. Doc Dan has not reported the assault yet: (chapter 90)

Seen from this perspective, the Shotgun’s proposal to the disgraced director acquires a new meaning. By recruiting a figure who already stands at the intersection of scandal and institutional cover-up, he introduces another fragile element into the situation. The director represents a man whose career collapsed precisely because a scandal nearly escaped the control of the institution that protected him. But in his eyes, he stands for “respectability and trust”, as he is called doctor. (chapter 93)

If such a person becomes involved in the scheme against Joo Jaekyung and Kim Dan, the consequences could extend beyond the criminal underworld or the sports organization. The medical world itself—and potentially the legal system—may be drawn into the conflict.

In that sense, the Shotgun’s move does not merely deepen the conspiracy. It risks bringing the one actor that all these systems usually try to avoid: the police. A lesson that he didn’t learn from the past.

And now you may wonder why I remain so focused on the earlier episodes instead of concentrating entirely on episode 94. The reason lies precisely in what this scene reveals.

The conversation between Joo Jaekyung and Kim Dan makes something suddenly clear: together, they embody the opposite principle of the one that has governed the criminal schemes throughout the story. (chapter 94) Up to this point, the antagonists have relied on a simple but effective strategy. By manipulating circumstances, they repeatedly place others at the wrong place and at the wrong time. Each incident—whether involving the media, drugs, or institutional authorities—follows this logic. Someone is caught in a situation carefully arranged by others and must carry the consequences.

Episode 94 breaks this pattern. (chapter 94) There is trust, recognition, admiration and open-mindedness. In their mutual confession, the two protagonists do something that none of the criminals ever achieve: they seize the moment at the right time and in the right place. They speak and listen to each other. Instead of being manipulated by circumstances, they recognize the opportunity before them and act upon it.

The result is not merely emotional reconciliation. It quietly undermines the very mechanism that has been used against them. For the first time, the logic of coincidence and manipulation no longer dictates the outcome.

Turning the Method Against the Criminals

Yet the story introduces an important twist. The main couple gradually learns to use the same modus operandi against their enemies: at the right time and the right place. (chapter 59) (chapter 79) (chapter 94)

A revealing example occurs when Joo Jaekyung publicly challenges Baek Junmin after the fight against Arnaud Gabriel. (chapter 87) By issuing the challenge in front of the cameras, the champion forces the MFC to respond. Even though the season had effectively ended, the public nature of the declaration creates pressure that the organization and the media cannot easily ignore.

In that moment, Joo Jaekyung takes control of the narrative.

Baek Junmin suddenly finds himself in the same position that his victims usually occupy: he cannot escape the situation. Instead of manipulating time and circumstances, he must react to them. His glance toward the calendar reveals his awareness that the timing is no longer in his control. (chapter 93)

The antagonists attempt to regain that control by scheduling events close to Christmas, a moment when institutions and public attention may be distracted. Time itself becomes another instrument within the conflict. A second possibility also emerges from the same logic of timing. If the grandmother were to pass away soon (chapter 94), the situation could disrupt the plans surrounding the anticipated fight with Baek Junmin.

A funeral represents the ultimate example of being at the wrong place and at the wrong time. Death does not follow the schedules of sports organizations or criminal schemes. It interrupts them. In such circumstances, Joo Jaekyung might decide not to appear at the match himself and instead send a replacement fighter, much as similar substitutions have already occurred in the past. (chapter 47)

But the champion’s public statement has already changed the balance of power. By drawing the attention of the media and the authorities, he forces figures like Choi Gilseok to operate under pressure and make mistakes. The latter must begin bribing officials and manipulating the environment simply to buy time. The system that once protected the criminals begins to turn against them.

The Man Who Knew Too Much

This development also explains the deeper meaning behind the title “The Man Who Knew Too Much.”

Knowledge in this story does not come from theory or speculation. It comes from experience. (chapter 94) Joo Jaekyung has survived the criminal world long enough to understand how its mechanisms operate. Through his actions, he gradually passes this knowledge on to Kim Dan. (chapter 88)

He taught him how to swim. He taught him how to fight. He taught him how to take care of himself and to express his opinion and desires. In other words, Kim Dan came to internalize that he also deserved respect. (chapter 91) The athlete exposed him to situations that forced him to grow stronger and more independent. He shared his thoughts and philosophy to his “pupil” as well (chapter 94) so that at the end, Kim Dan admits to see him as a “younger sibling”. (donsaeng in Korean) (chapter 94)

Yet his transformation has another consequence. Kim Dan has also become both a witness and a target of the champion’s jinx. By standing beside Joo Jaekyung, he has been drawn into the very chain of manipulations that once isolated the athlete. He can expose the existence of money laundering.

For the first time, the couple begins to grasp wrongdoings and even understand how this mechanism works. And once someone understands the trap, the outcome of the game can change.

The criminals may continue to rely on their favorite principles— money and placing others at the wrong place and at the wrong time. But the situation has now changed. In fact, the schemers will end up being caught at the wrong time and at the wrong place.

Until recently, however, Joo Jaekyung himself was unable to expose Baek Junmin openly. One reason lies in a more personal burden: shame. (chapter 94) The champion carried the weight of his past—his violent environment, the humiliation he endured, and the circumstances that shaped his rise. Speaking about these events would have meant revealing parts of his life he preferred to bury. (chapter 94) The conversation on the beach changes this dynamic. By confessing his past to Kim Dan, Joo Jaekyung frees himself from the silence that had protected his enemies. The shame that once prevented him from speaking begins to lose its power.

And once the athlete is no longer bound by shame, he can finally do something he had avoided for a long time: he can speak and reveal his knowledge to the media.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Man 👤Who Knew Too Much 🕵️‍♂️-part 1

Sorry for the hiatus, but as you can imagine, it is related to my work. I recently got more responsibilities.

The Importance of Knowledge

Many classic thrillers have explored the dangerous consequences of knowing the wrong thing at the wrong time. Alfred Hitchcock once built an entire film around this very idea: someone who accidentally discovers too much becomes a threat. In The Man Who Knew Too Much, knowledge is not merely information—it is a liability.

The moment someone understands how the hidden mechanism works, that knowledge becomes dangerous. Insight is inseparable from the plot itself, because it exposes the existence of a conspiracy. To know too much therefore means to become a threat to those who depend on secrecy. Information stops being neutral; it transforms into a risk that must be contained, silenced, or eliminated. The moment a hidden truth surfaces, those who possess it risk becoming targets themselves. Episode 93 of Jinx seems to echo this logic. (chapter 93) Beneath the apparent calm of the chapter lies a growing tension: secrets circulate quietly, alliances remain uncertain, and certain characters may already know more than they should. (chapter 93)

At first glance, the chapter appears to focus on the evolution of the relationship between Joo Jaekyung and Kim Dan. (chapter 93) linked to their previous night together. During the night they shared, the invisible wall that once separated them seemed to disappear completely. Their intimacy was no longer defined by domination or obligation. Instead, the encounter suggested equality (position of 69)(chapter 92) and reciprocity—an exchange, as Joo Jaekyung himself described it, of “give and take.” (chapter 92) In a striking reversal, Kim Dan took the initiative (chapter 92), after being asked about his own desires. (chapter 92) He was no longer driven by shame, debt or obligation. (chapter 92) For the champion, the moment carried the weight of something deeper than physical pleasure (chapter 92), for he was able to give pleasure to his partner. Thus his self-esteem could only be boosted. For Kim Dan, however, it remained simply sex. (chapter 92) The imbalance between their interpretations already foreshadowed the tension that would emerge the following morning.

That tension becomes visible when Kim Dan calmly refuses Joo Jaekyung’s attempt to continue taking care of him. (chapter 93) For the first time, he establishes a clear boundary. The gesture signals a new stage in his personal development: for the first time, Doc Dan speaks as a professional, as a physical therapist (chapter 93) who knows his role and his responsibilities. He refuses the help with the meals not out of pride, but because he clearly frames it as part of his job. In the past, he would have simply listened, letting others decide or speak in their name (chapter 42); now he asserts his own authority and expertise. But just as this moment seems to mark a quiet step forward in their dynamic (chapter 93), the narrative abruptly widens its focus, drawing the reader away from this personal shift toward a far more ominous development unfolding elsewhere. (chapter 93)

Far from the intimacy of the penthouse, Baek Junmin appears surrounded by an invisible barrier (chapter 93) separating him from Choi Gilseok and Heo Manwook. The atmosphere of that scene is strangely detached. Junmin seems unconcerned with the financial urgency discussed around him; his attention is fixed instead on the cellphone. Yet the readers cannot see what he is watching (chapter 93), while he casually blows a bubble of gum, creating a small moment of distraction that contrasts with the tension of the conversation around him. Only when he eventually reaches for the calendar on the desk, (chapter 93) does the focus of his attention become clear: the approaching match. What matters to him is not money, but time. What seems to occupy his mind is not the money being discussed, but the ticking clock before the fight—suggesting he may be searching for a way to reclaim his standing, restore his reputation, and probably settle an old score. But if this is indeed his objective, one question inevitably arises: what kind of weapon does he intend to use?

The cover illustration accompanying this essay proposes one possible answer. Rather than depicting a single event, it visualizes the network of hidden connections surrounding Baek Junmin: the underworld figures who support him, the organizations that benefit from his actions, and the champion who stands at the center of these intersecting interests. In such a configuration, information itself may become the most dangerous tool. If certain characters possess fragments of the past — memories, secrets, or assumptions about who Joo Jaekyung once was or about the physical therapist — then exposing or manipulating that knowledge could prove far more destructive than any physical confrontation.

This leads to the central question of this essay: who, in this story, truly knows too much—or believes that they do—and what happens when that knowledge is finally brought to light?

The Office – Where the Readers Begin to Know Too Much 😮

Episode 93 opens in a location that immediately signals danger: the office of Heo Manwook (chapter 93). The place is recognizable because the interior furniture (chapter 93) matches the office previously shown in episode 46. (chapter 46) Yet even before examining the room itself, the exterior sign already introduces an intriguing ambiguity. The building is labeled (chapter 93) “Errand Center – Repo – Demo.” At first glance, the name suggests a mundane service business. An errand center typically performs small tasks for clients—delivering packages, transporting items, or running administrative errands. Thus shortly after, Jinx-philes discover that a package has been successfully delivered. (chapter 93) The additional terms reinforce this impression: “repo” evokes repossession services that recover unpaid property, while “demo” suggests demonstrations or promotional tasks. Taken together, the sign appears to advertise a collection of ordinary logistical services.

However, within the narrative context the meaning becomes far more unsettling. Each of these activities revolves around the same principle: carrying out tasks on behalf of someone else. (chapter 93) The vocabulary is deliberately neutral, but the logic easily translates into criminal practice. Errands can become intimidation missions, repossession can turn into violent debt collection, and demonstrations can serve as distractions or staged incidents. The apparently harmless name therefore functions as a façade, masking a network that organizes coercion, surveillance, and illegal gambling operations. Even the office furniture contributes to this illusion. (chapter 46) The couch and armchairs resemble the kind of seating commonly found in legitimate businesses—familiar from many office settings in K-dramas—suggesting a place where clients might calmly sit down to discuss matters. Yet the scene reveals a striking contrast: no one actually uses this furniture except Baek Junmin. (chapter 93) The debtor is instead beaten near the entrance, deliberately kept far away from the seating area. In this way, the loan shark and his men ensure that the couch and chairs remain untouched, almost as if they were props. (chapter 93) The furniture thus reinforces the same strategy as the office name itself: it maintains the appearance of a respectable business while the violence of the operation is carefully kept out of sight.

This principle of delegated action (chapter 93) reveals something deeper about the structure of the organization itself. (chapter 46) At first glance, the office appears to belong to Heo Manwook (chapter 93), who confronts victims and manages the loan shark operation. Yet the scene gradually reveals that he is less a true mastermind than a frontman—a visible intermediary who handles the dirty work. (chapter 46) Hence he calls Choi Gilseok “boss” and asks about the current situation. (chapter 93) Behind him stands Choi Gilseok, the director of King of MMA, who clearly exerts greater influence over the situation. He coordinates financial decisions, negotiates with outside contacts, and attempts to contain the consequences of the recent scandal. And yet even Choi Gilseok is not the ultimate authority. (chapter 48) In episode 48, he revealed that his actions were connected to a parent pharmaceutical company (F Pharmaceuticals), suggesting that the criminal activities surrounding the fights, betting, and intimidation may ultimately serve a larger financial structure. In that sense, the Errand Center name becomes almost literal: every actor in this network appears to be running errands for someone higher in the hierarchy, forming a chain of delegated power in which responsibility constantly shifts upward.

This ambiguity becomes even more striking when one considers Kim Dan’s own situation in season 1. In order to offer an expensive gift to Joo Jaekyung, he took a job as a courier (chapter 42), delivering food or packages across the city during the night. His work is built on the same basic principle: completing tasks and transporting items for others which exposed him to dangers and shame. (chapter 42) The parallel is subtle but revealing. While Kim Dan runs legitimate errands for the athlete’s sake, the criminals in the Errand Center perform their own “services” within the shadow economy. Both operate within a system of delivery and obligation—yet one side does so out of feelings, while the other exploits the structure for predatory purposes. Gratitude versus Greed.

Thanks to my friend @Rin_de_eegana, I discovered that the Japanese translation

even labeled the place as a “detective agency,” a term that evokes investigation, surveillance, and the gathering of information. At first glance, the presence of such an office might suggest a professional organization specialized in surveillance and intelligence gathering. Earlier in the story, this is precisely the impression the narrative created. Kim Dan’s background was carefully investigated: photographs were secretly taken, a dossier was assembled, and details about his personal life were documented (chapter 46). The operation looked methodical, almost professional, as if a genuine investigative agency had been hired to monitor the champion’s environment.

Yet, the office scene in chapter 93 quietly dismantles that illusion. (chapter 93) Choi Gilseok, Heo Manwook and his minions are not behaving like investigators at all. No one is collecting new information. No one is analyzing evidence. Instead, the conversation revolves around debts, payments, and damage control. The supposed detective agency suddenly looks much closer to what it truly is: a loan shark operation that had previously hidden behind the façade of investigation. (chapter 93)

This shift becomes particularly visible in the dialogue between the director of King of MMA and Heo Manwook. The latter asks whether the situation has been “sorted.” (chapter 93) The reply reveals the underlying problem: they have already spent a considerable amount of money cleaning up the mess connected to Joo Jaekyung. The champion’s televised revelation has created waves. People had to be silenced, favors had to be paid, and the organization now finds itself under financial pressure. Choi Gilseok even admits bluntly that money is tight.

The financial tension visible in the office scene becomes even more revealing when one recalls an earlier accusation made by Heo Manwook in front of Kim Dan. (chapter 11) At that moment, the loan shark explicitly raised the possibility of money laundering. This detail suddenly casts the entire network in a different light. The illegal gambling operations visible on Heo Manwook’s computer are therefore not merely a source of profit; they may also serve as a mechanism through which larger sums of money circulate and are quietly reintegrated into the legal economy. (chapter 46) In this structure, Choi Gilseok himself appears less like the true mastermind than another intermediary in a much larger financial chain.

In episode 48, Gilseok revealed that his activities were connected to a parent pharmaceutical company (chapter 48), suggesting that the underground fights and betting operations might ultimately serve broader corporate interests. Yet the director of King of MMA does not behave as a purely obedient subordinate either. (chapter 46) In chapter 46, he was already acting behind the back of that parent company, manipulating events to influence the outcome of the fight. Later developments—such as the conversation at the café with Kim Dan and the suspicious use of the spray—suggest that he may eventually have received support from that higher structure. (chapter 49) At the same time, however, the director of the gym clearly took personal risks. By secretly betting on the “underdog” (chapter 52) and manipulating the situation through the switched spray, he appears to have pursued his own strategy within the system.

This double game helps explain why the organization now finds itself under financial strain. The fake director of the gym was not simply executing orders; he was gambling within the laundering mechanism itself. When Joo Jaekyung publicly exposed the situation on television, the carefully balanced financial structure began to wobble. Joo Jaekyung’s public provocation therefore did more than damage reputations—it interfered with the flow of money itself, forcing the network to spend resources on bribes and damage control while threatening the laundering pipeline that sustained it. Yet earlier in the story, the logic had been very different. As Park Namwook once remarked, Jaekyung’s fame made him the fighter who would “rake in the most cash.” (chapter 46) In other words, the champion was originally the system’s most valuable asset. His visibility and reputation attracted attention, betting activity, and therefore profit. However, once he disrupted the carefully orchestrated mechanisms behind the fights, that same visibility became dangerous. The athlete who once generated the most revenue suddenly turned into the network’s greatest liability. From that moment onward, the logic of profit shifted into the logic of elimination.

The sequence of panels reveals another layer of the network. Choi Gilseok is first shown speaking with a person (chapter 93) who may be connected to the police in a surprisingly casual tone, thanking him and even suggesting they play golf together. The expression “I’m glad it arrived safely” implies that the unknown person must have received some hush money. Rather than a confrontation between criminals and investigators, the conversation suggests familiarity and mutual benefit. Only later does he mention that they need to “wrap this up before the fuzz makes a move.” On the surface, this sounds like fear of law enforcement, but placed after the friendly phone call, the line reads less like genuine concern and more like a reminder to settle matters quickly before any official attention becomes inconvenient. In other words, they are attempting to buy some time, to interfere in the investigation so that they don’t get caught.

This moment becomes even more intriguing when one remembers an earlier scene involving Yosep. (chapter 52) After the dressing-room incident, Yosep reported the situation to both the MFC and the police, turning this incident into an official and legal issue. Yet the investigation immediately encountered a convenient obstacle: there were no cameras in the dressing room, meaning the case would take time to resolve. If the officer Choi Gilseok is speaking with belongs to the same network (police or MFC), the investigation itself may already be entangled in the system it is supposed to expose. But the revelation in the media made it impossible to bury it for good, as it was exposed to the “world”.

But there is another visual clue that deepens this interpretation. (chapter 93) If attentive readers look closely at the surroundings of the office in chapter 93, they will notice the presence of the rival gym King of MMA located next to the loan shark’s headquarters. This small detail quietly reveals the proximity between the world of professional MMA gyms and the underground economy of illegal fights and gambling. The boundary between legitimate sport and criminal activity appears far thinner than it first seemed. The gym known as “King of MMA” stands almost literally beside the loan shark operation, hinting at the structural connections that bind them together.

In this sense, the office scene becomes a place where readers begin to perceive the outlines of a hidden system. Throughout the story, they have witnessed conversations from multiple perspectives: between the protagonists and villains (chapter 48), between the loan shark and the director (chapter 46), and within the MMA world (chapter 69). They know, for instance, that Heo Manwook once misunderstood the name “Team Black,” interpreting it as a brothel rather than a gym (chapter 16). Jinx-Lovers have seen fragments of the schemes unfolding behind the scenes and can therefore begin to assemble the existence of several overlapping plots.

And yet, despite these clues, the full picture remains incomplete. One crucial element still escapes both the characters and the audience: the identity of the person who secretly took the photographs of Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung (chapter 46). If Heo Manwook’s organization—the supposed detective agency—had truly conducted that surveillance, they would already recognize Kim Dan and understand his connection to the gym. Moreover, the earlier phone conversation between the hyung and the loan shark indicates that Choi Gilseok already possessed those photographs while sitting in his own office at the gym. This strongly suggests that the person who gathered that information did not belong to the Errand Center at all.

The office therefore becomes the starting point of a different kind of investigation—not one carried out by the characters inside the story, but by the readers themselves. By piecing together scattered details across multiple chapters, Jinx-lovers gradually uncover the outlines of a conspiracy that none of the individual actors fully control. Somewhere in the shadows, (chapter 33) (chapter 46) (chapter 48) another observer must exist—someone who collected information long before Choi Gilseok revealed his second scheme to his right-hand. While the men in the office rush to repair their collapsing financial operation (chapter 93), the audience slowly realizes that the true structure behind these events may be far larger than any of them suspect.

Yet in this very moment another development quietly takes place. For once, Baek Junmin does not remain in the shadows behind his hyung, behind Choi Gilseok, or behind the criminal hierarchy. (chapter 93) He speaks himself. Addressing the disgraced hospital director, he offers to erase the man’s debt—on the condition that he carries out a task for him. (chapter 93) The threat that accompanies the proposal is unmistakable: failure will be punished with death.

In doing so, Junmin transforms the doctor’s debt into an instrument of coercion. (chapter 93) The indebted man is no longer merely a victim of the loan-shark system; he is being recruited as an expendable agent within a new scheme. Ironically, this moment also marks the point where Junmin unknowingly pulls another institution into the conspiracy. (chapter 91) By involving a former medical authority in an illegal act, he brings the corrupted medical world to the surface and connects it directly to the network of underground betting and money laundering.

What Junmin likely perceives as a safe and clever manipulation may therefore function as something far more dangerous. By offering to erase the doctor’s debt in exchange for a task, he believes he can remain safely removed from the action itself. (chapter 93) That’s why he is smirking. The wrongdoing will be carried out by someone else, allowing him to stay in the shadows as he always has. Yet Junmin underestimates the weight of his own words. (chapter 93) In both the criminal and the legal worlds, speech itself carries responsibility. A spoken order, a promise, or even the disclosure of information can create liability. The story has already demonstrated this elsewhere: the leaking of Joo Jaekyung’s patient file triggered legal consequences and led the champion to file a lawsuit against the hospital. (chapter 42)

Junmin’s proposal therefore does more than recruit a desperate man—it transforms him into the author of the scheme. (chapter 93) Hence the director asks him this question. He is now taking the lead. Knowledge and liability become inseparable. Once the doctor accepts the offer, Junmin’s words effectively pull the trigger: the moment the deal is spoken aloud, the hidden system that sustained the illegal fights begins to lose its stability. By drawing the corrupted medical world directly into the operation, the fighter who once thrived in the shadows may in fact become the spark that accelerates the collapse of the entire machine. I would even add, with this new stunt, he is not realizing that he could be blamed for the past crimes (drugged beverage, switched spray etc.).

Heo Manwook – The Hand of the Machine

Before turning to Baek Junmin’s intervention, it is worth examining the role of Heo Manwook more closely. Throughout the story, the loan shark repeatedly threatens the hands of his victims. (chapter 16) Doc Dan’s hand got crushed and the former hospital warden is warned that he might lose his fingers; thus he might no longer be able to work. (chapter 93) The threat is not random. It reveals the symbolic position Heo Manwook occupies within the criminal structure.

Heo Manwook represents the operational hand of the system. While others design schemes or manipulate financial flows, he executes the violence that keeps the network running. His task is not to think strategically but to enforce obedience: take care of the illegal gambling site (chapter 46), collect debts (chapter 11), intimidate victims, and ensure that money continues to circulate through the laundering mechanism. In this sense, the repeated focus on hands and fingers becomes meaningful.

The hand is the instrument of action (chapter 93) —the part of the body that allows people to work and generate the very income he seeks to extract. By threatening to destroy his victims’ hands, however, Heo Manwook undermines that capacity himself. The gesture exposes a certain narrow-mindedness: his violence contradicts the economic logic he is supposed to enforce, revealing not only his cruelty but also him as an enforcer who acts impulsively rather than strategically.

Yet the irony of his position becomes increasingly visible. Although he runs what appears to be a “detective agency,” he repeatedly demonstrates an inability to perform the most basic function of investigation. (chapter 11) When he confronts Kim Dan about the origin of the money used to repay his debt, he does not rely on financial records or systematic research. Instead, he interrogates the doctor through intimidation and violence. The encounter in episode 16 occurs almost by coincidence, when he meets Kim Dan on the street and hears about his imminent moving (chapter 16) rather than locating him through documentation or surveillance. This observation corroborates my previous deduction: he is not the one following the physical therapist in secret and taking pictures of him. Secondly, observe his reaction, when he reads the money transfer: (chapter 16) The loan shark reads the name quickly or without interest, so that he can only remember the most striking word. In this case, “Black” stands out, while “Team”—a generic word—disappears from his memory. So his phrasing suggests he did not pay attention to the full name. This displays his lack of professionalism. He doesn’t investigate carefully.

Even his interpretation of evidence proves unreliable. Upon seeing the name “Team Black,” his minions and Heo Manwook quickly assume that it refers to a brothel. (chapter 16) Instead of verifying the information, he projects his own criminal assumptions onto the situation. (chapter 16) The supposed detective agency therefore produces not knowledge but distortion. Rather than gathering reliable intelligence, it generates blind spots that weaken the entire network. In this sense, the situation ironically echoes the logic behind The Man Who Knew Too Much. In Hitchcock’s story, the danger lies in possessing knowledge that exposes a hidden conspiracy. In Heo Manwook’s case, however, the problem emerges from a different form of knowledge: experience. Years of operating in the criminal underworld have convinced him that he already understands how the world works. Hence he misjudged the champion’s skills. (chapter 17) Instead of investigating carefully, he interprets every new piece of information through the lens of his past encounters and knowledge. His boss is rigging fights, so the others must do the same. When confronted with the name “Team Black,” he immediately assumes it must refer to a bar or brothel. What appears to be practical experience therefore becomes a liability. The man who believes he knows reality best may in fact be the one most vulnerable to misreading it.

This failure becomes particularly significant when one considers his connections to the medical underworld. During his threats, Heo Manwook casually refers to organ trafficking (chapter 93), suggesting that his operations intersect with the shadow side of the medical system. Such activities require the knowledge and complicity of doctors. The earlier intimidation of Kim Dan and the threats directed toward his grandmother (chapter 11) (chapter 16) demonstrate that Heo Manwook was already operating within that gray zone where medicine, crime, and financial exploitation overlap. It is therefore not surprising that the disgraced hospital director later appears within this environment. The medical world has long been entangled with the loan shark’s activities and this through Choi Gilseok who has a connection to a pharmaceutical company.

At the same time, however, Heo Manwook himself occupies a precarious position within the hierarchy. Although he runs the office and commands his subordinates, his authority is ultimately dependent on Choi Gilseok. (chapter 46) The phone calls between the two reveal a relationship defined by obedience. When Choi Gilseok reprimands him for the failed scheme, Heo Manwook immediately accepts the criticism and follows his orders. (chapter 46) The “hand” of the organization may execute violence, but it does not decide the strategy.

Visually, the story even reflects his gradual loss of power. Earlier confrontations often depict Heo Manwook towering over his victim (chapter 16), emphasizing the asymmetry between predator and prey. Yet when he threatens the disgraced hospital director, the composition changes subtly. (chapter 93) The two men are positioned almost at eye level, confronting one another on the same plane. The shift is striking. The man who once dominated every encounter now appears lowered, forced into a confrontation with someone who mirrors his own corruption. The hierarchy begins to flatten. This visual transformation acquires an additional meaning when one recalls Joo Jaekyung’s realization in episode 91. (chapter 91) Reflecting on the men who had abused Kim Dan, the champion bitterly admits that he is “no different from the fuckers who took advantage of you.” Although Jaekyung is still unaware that Heo Manwook actually attempted to rape Kim Dan earlier in the story, the scene nevertheless establishes an unsettling parallel between different forms of abuse of power. The disgraced hospital director exploited his authority as a physician, while the loan shark uses violence and intimidation to dominate his victim. Both belong to the same shadow world where institutional positions become instruments of exploitation.

In this sense, Heo Manwook also resembles another figure hinted at by the narrative’s broader thematic references: the “man who knew too much.” As the operator of the supposed detective agency, (chapter 17) he possesses extensive knowledge about the hidden mechanisms of the criminal network — rigging fights, illegal betting, debt collection, organ trafficking, and even the exploitation of vulnerable individuals. Yet this knowledge does not grant him control; instead, it entangles him more deeply in the system’s corruption. The more he knows about its secrets, the less clearly he perceives reality. Years of operating within the criminal network have isolated him from the logic of the legal world. Surrounded by corruption, intimidation, and bribery, he gradually begins to believe that these mechanisms can shield him from any real consequences. The knowledge that once gave him power therefore becomes a distortion: it convinces him that he can act with impunity, imagining that the system protecting him will always remain intact. What once appeared to be power gradually reveals itself as liability. I would even add. This protection could only function as long as the system itself continued to run smoothly. It depended on the uninterrupted flow of money circulating through the laundering network. The moment that flow is endangered—when bets collapse, scandals emerge, and funds begin to disappear—the shield of protection weakens. Figures such as the director of the gym and the loan shark suddenly become far more exposed than before.

Another recurring element reinforces this tension: the knife. Earlier in the story, Heo Manwook is already associated with the sudden appearance of a blade during his confrontation with Joo Jaekyung. (chapter 17) The weapon signals impulsive violence rather than calculated strategy. (chapter 17) The knife belongs to the realm of direct physical force—the crude instrument of someone who acts rather than plans. At the same time, this weapon reveals why Heo Manwook believes that his power and strength are real. The latter stands for ultimate violence, someone can die with such a weapon. However, like exposed in a previous essay, MMA fighters can still die with bare hands. A wrong move or a mistake … (chapter 25)

Striking is that the attack with the knife did not occur in an open fight. (chapter 17) Instead, the weapon appeared abruptly from behind, transforming the encounter into an act of treachery rather than a fair confrontation. The knife therefore becomes a symbol of unfairness, backstabbing and betrayal. Rather than representing courage or open combat, the weapon exposes the opposite: deception, hypocrisy, and cowardice. Heo Manwook and his men do not confront their victims openly. Instead, they rely on tools—blades, bats, and intimidation—to frighten and wound those who cannot defend themselves.

This symbolism becomes even more striking when placed next to Baek Junmin’s later threat toward the disgraced hospital director. (chapter 93) When Junmin swears to “gut him like a fish,” the language itself evokes the imagery of a blade. Even though no weapon appears in the panel, the metaphor unmistakably suggests the act of cutting open a body. The threat therefore carries the same symbolic weight as the earlier knife attack: violence delivered through sudden, treacherous intervention rather than through open confrontation.

At the same time, Baek Junmin’s words unintentionally reveal something about the world he comes from. Earlier conversations among fighters hint that illegal matches often involve hidden weapons and brutal ambushes rather than regulated combat. (chapter 47) The underground arena operates according to entirely different rules, where knives are not anomalies but part of the environment. In this sense, Junmin’s threat does more than intimidate the former hospital director—it exposes the violent logic of the system that produced him.

This background also helps explain the visual markers associated with the fighter himself. (chapter 93) The scar crossing his face suggests past encounters with blades, while the demon tattoo carrying a knife in its mouth reinforces the imagery of violence as an ever-present companion. In the world of illegal fights, the blade is not merely a weapon. It is a sign of survival within a system where betrayal, ambush, and hidden violence are part of the rules.

Seen from this perspective, the knife becomes a recurring motif that links several narrative threads: the cowardly intimidation practiced by the loan shark, the brutal culture of underground fights, and the language of threats used by Baek Junmin. Each instance reveals a world where violence is rarely honorable. Hence it is rather fake, though both men believe that they are “real” and as such “strong”. Instead, it appears as something sudden, concealed, and treacherous—an instrument of systems that operate in the shadows rather than in the open.

Ironically, the greatest vulnerability of the loan shark is not a rival fighter, the police, or even the collapsing betting scheme. His true Achilles’ heel lies in a far more mundane object: the cellphone and as such the digital world. From the beginning, Heo Manwook demonstrates a profound distrust of digital evidence. Even after Kim Dan transfers the expected amount of money for the month, (chapter 11) the loan shark refuses to rely on the transaction itself. Instead of trusting the digital record, he personally visits Kim Dan and continues the physical abuse. In his worldview, confirmation must come through intimidation rather than documentation.

Yet this instinct reveals a crucial blind spot. The system he participates in increasingly operates through precisely the kind of digital traces he refuses to respect. (chapter 17) When Joo Jaekyung later transfers the money directly to him using his own phone (chapter 17), the transaction itself becomes a form of evidence. What Heo Manwook perceives merely as a convenient payment leaves behind a record — one that cannot be erased by violence. The phone quietly transforms the power dynamic: intimidation may silence witnesses, but it cannot erase a transaction history.

This weakness becomes even more visible when the narrative contrasts his behavior with Joo Jaekyung’s. (chapter 91) The champion carefully reads the news article exposing the former hospital director’s crimes. (chapter 91) Through that article, the audience learns that the man’s medical license has already been suspended.

Heo Manwook, however, never appears to read this information. (chapter 93) When confronting the disgraced hospital administrator, he still addresses him as “doctor.” He still thinks, he can treat patients. (chapter 93) The mistake is revealing. It shows that the loan shark operates not through careful verification but through assumptions and second-hand knowledge.

This vulnerability becomes even clearer inside the office itself. (chapter 46) The computer visible on Heo Manwook’s desk quietly contains a record of the entire operation. The illegal betting site displayed on the screen is not merely a tool for profit; it is also a potential archive of evidence—transactions, accounts, and financial flows that could expose the laundering system. In other words, the machine that allows the network to generate money simultaneously preserves the traces of its crimes.

The question, however, is whether Heo Manwook truly understands this danger. The computer is still on his desk, but this time unused, as he has other things to do. (chapter 93) Throughout the scene he appears less like an independent decision-maker than an obedient intermediary who follows the instructions of Choi Gilseok. (chapter 93) Rather than taking initiative himself, he waits for orders from the director of the gym. This dependency raises a crucial uncertainty: if the system begins to collapse, will he even recognize the need to erase these traces? If not, the very tools that enabled the network’s operations—the phone, the betting platform, the office computer—may ultimately become silent witnesses against him.

For this reason, the interaction with the disgraced doctor marks a turning point. As the system begins to destabilize, the “hand” that once enforced obedience now finds itself confronting forces it cannot fully control. The network’s operational executor is gradually being pushed downward, while another figure—Baek Junmin—steps forward with his own plans. The collision between these two trajectories appears increasingly inevitable.

Baek Junmin – The Man Who thinks Who Knows Everything

If the office scene exposes the true nature of Heo Manwook’s organization, the final figure sitting in that room introduces a different kind of mystery: Baek Junmin. (chapter 93) Unlike the other men present, he appears strangely detached from the conversation unfolding around him. While Heo Manwook and Choi Gilseok discuss debts, payments, and police connections, Junmin shows little interest in the financial urgency dominating the room. Instead, he lounges in the armchair typically reserved for the “CEO” or company owner, casually chewing gum while glancing at his phone.

This posture is revealing. In a room where the others are preoccupied with stabilizing a failing operation, Junmin behaves with the careless ease of someone who feels entitled to the space. The seat he occupies subtly reinforces this impression: he places himself in the position of authority without actually participating in the responsibilities that come with it. The attitude he projects is less that of a strategist and more that of a spoiled child, detached from the consequences of the situation unfolding around him. (chapter 93)

Only when he reaches toward the calendar, does the focus of his attention become clearer: the approaching match. (chapter 93) The fight appears to function as a deadline, a moment toward which his thoughts have been quietly moving while the others worry about debts and bribes. At first glance, this might simply indicate that he is counting down to the fight. Yet the gesture suggests something deeper. Unlike the others in the room, Junmin does not seem to experience time as a practical pressure linked to debts, bribery, or police intervention. His notion of time is psychological rather than material. He is not living in the present urgency of the criminal network; he is still trapped in an older temporal logic shaped by humiliation, resentment, and wounded pride.

This is why the televised revelation matters so much. (chapter 87) Joo Jaekyung’s public exposure of the stunt did not merely create financial problems for the organization. It inflicted a fresh narcissistic wound on Junmin himself. The humiliation was public, visible, and impossible to ignore. In that sense, the upcoming match is not only a sporting deadline but also a symbolic countdown: a chance to reverse the humiliation, reclaim his standing, and restore a damaged image. Time, for Junmin, does not move forward in a stable or mature way. It circles obsessively around injury, revenge and shame; he stores it.

(chapter 93) Seen in this light, the gum becomes more than a casual gesture. It reinforces his childishness. Junmin does not cry, does not openly rage, and does not confess weakness. Notice that he is not even training at the gym, though King of MMA is next door. This contrasts so much to Joo Jaekyung who continues to maintain a disciplined routine despite everything. Thanks to his determination, he was able to leave poverty behind and overcome a brutal childhood. As Kim Dan later remarks on the beach, this perseverance is (chapter 94)

The juxtaposition between the Shotgun watching the video (chapter 93) and the quiet conversation on the beach therefore reveals two radically different understandings of strength. For Joo Jaekyung, strength has gradually come to mean endurance: the ability to continue moving forward despite humiliation, hardship, and personal loss. (chapter 94) For Baek Junmin, by contrast, strength remains tied to wounded pride and the desire for retaliation.

Rather than transforming humiliation into growth, he remains trapped within it. This is precisely why his request to the doctor is immediately accompanied by a threat: (chapter 93) The sentence reveals the logic governing his actions. Authority, in his world, is not built on discipline, patience, or competence, but on intimidation. Violence becomes the only language through which he can assert control. In this sense, the panel exposes the profound immaturity behind his performance of indifference. While the champion disciplines his body and confronts his past, Junmin simply reproduces the brutality that once humiliated him.

But let us return to Baek Junmin and the bubble gum. His behavior only makes visible how immature his emotional world remains, exposing a lack of professionalism and inner strength. While the champion disciplines his body and confronts his past, Junmin sits idle, replaying an insult and waiting for an opportunity to restore his pride. The others are trying to save a criminal enterprise under pressure; Junmin is still silently thinking of the insult, fixated on the idea of revenge. Thus I deduce that he is watching Joo Jaekyung’s last match.

This deduction raises another possibility. If Junmin is indeed watching footage of Joo Jaekyung’s last match on his phone, the scene may contain a hidden clue. After that fight, the champion briefly turns toward the outside of the cage and asks someone whether he did well. (chapter 87) The moment appears insignificant to most spectators. Yet for someone who already knew the identity of the person standing there, the gesture could reveal something important.

If Junmin had previously followed Kim Dan and taken photographs of him (chapter 46) —as suggested by the anonymous surveillance images circulating earlier in the story—he would immediately recognize the pattern of Joo Jaekyung’s behavior. The champion’s glance toward the cage-side observer would no longer appear random. It would identify the person occupying that position: the physical therapist Kim Dan.

In this sense, the scene may quietly suggest that Baek Junmin already knows more than the other characters in the room. While Heo Manwook and Choi Gilseok remain unaware of Kim Dan’s real identity, Junmin might have been the one who first connected the champion to the young therapist. Doc Dan is the champion’s vulnerability, he has feelings for him. If this interpretation is correct, the invisible wall separating him from the others takes on a new meaning: Junmin is not merely detached from their conversation—he may already possess information that they do not.

Yet another detail complicates the situation even further. (chapter 93) Throughout the entire scene, Baek Junmin remains silent—but silence does not necessarily mean ignorance. While Heo Manwook and Choi Gilseok are focused on collecting money and resolving immediate problems, Junmin is still present in the room, quietly hearing everything that is being said.

One particular detail may therefore become significant: the repeated references to a “doctor.” The man being pressured by the loan sharks is clearly identifiable as the former hospital director who once fired Kim Dan. (chapter 93) His appearance leaves little doubt—he wears the same clothes and glasses seen in earlier chapters. (chapter 90) The only difference is the loss of his spectacles. They are not only broken, but also lying next to him. The loss of his glasses mirrors his situation: he is forced to face reality and as such he is discovering the true reasons behind doc Dan’s greed: despair and fear in front of the loan shark. (chapter 90) One could say, he is now receiving his karma. Like mentioned above, the behavior and words of the men (chapter 93) confronting him suggests that they are not left in the dark concerning the situation of the perverted hospital director. They are not truly interested in investigating his work place. Choi Gilseok and Heo Manwook appear not only impatient, but they don’t question his social status. Rather than asking questions about the man’s circumstances, he simply pressures him to produce money.

This urgency is revealing. If the loan sharks had taken the time to examine the man’s background carefully, they would almost certainly have discovered the recent scandal surrounding him. (chapter 91) An article had already exposed the accusations of sexual harassment and the suspension of his medical license. If Heo Manwook and Choi Gilseok had read that report, their reaction would likely have been very different. A disgraced doctor without a license represents a debtor with extremely limited means of repayment. Under normal circumstances, they would immediately question how he intended to pay them back.

The fact that they do not ask such questions suggests that they simply do not know. They are rushing the process, focused on immediate cash rather than information. Their attention is consumed by the financial damage caused by Joo Jaekyung’s televised revelation, leaving them little time to investigate the background of the man sitting in front of them.

But Baek Junmin’s position in the room is different. Unlike the others, he is not distracted by money or debts. While pretending to be uninterested—chewing gum and staring at his phone—he may in fact be absorbing every detail of the conversation. If Junmin has already connected Kim Dan to Joo Jaekyung, hearing the word “doctor” in this context could suddenly activate an entirely new chain of associations.

In that sense, the scene may represent a crucial turning point. The loan sharks believe they are merely collecting a debt. Yet the presence of the former hospital director introduces a piece of information that may be far more valuable than money. The moment Junmin realizes who this man is, a doctor, then he can jump to the conclusion that he represents a good tool against Joo Jaekyung and Kim Dan. The question is: did he read the news and does he know what role he once played in Kim Dan’s life (the sexual harassment)?, especially if he was the one following doc Dan. I have my doubt about it, as he could never forget the humiliation on TV. Moreover, let’s not forget that officially, the main lead got “fired” after the incident leaving a stain on his resume. (chapter 1) So what did he hear at the office the whole time? (chapter 93) Doctor, doctor… And why did Joo Jaekyung speak about the prank in the first place? It was for Doc Dan’s sake and to restore his honor. (chapter 87) Joo Jaekyung came to the conclusion that the prank had destroyed Doc Dan. (chapter 91) Thus I deduce that the physical therapist has become the real target of the next plot.

Yet Junmin’s behavior reveals another pattern that runs consistently through the narrative: he rarely confronts his enemies directly. Instead, he repeatedly hides behind authority.

Earlier in the story, he invokes the protection of his mysterious “hyung.” (chapter 74) Later, he relies on Choi Gilseok to approach Joo Jaekyung with an offer (chapter 48) designed to manipulate the outcome of the fight. When the doctor rejects the offer, the scheme unfolds in a different way. The manipulation involves not only gambling but also medical interference — the suspicious spray used during the match and Choi Gilseok brought it himself and gave it to one of his members. (chapter 50)

The same logic appears within the institutional framework of the sport. The CEO of the MFC openly praises (chapter 47) Junmin’s “star quality” and supports his rapid rise within the organization. Such endorsement provides him with a form of institutional legitimacy that shields him from direct scrutiny. His authority does not come from discipline or merit alone but from the structures that elevate and protect him. And observe how the lady in red protected the “champion’s reputation”. (chapter 69)

Even the medical system itself appears to participate in these manipulations. In episode 41, the medics clear Joo Jaekyung to fight (chapter 41), though it was clear that the champion’s shoulder condition had worsened. (chapter 41) The official report contradicts the observations of the physical therapist. Moreover, they had allowed the fight, though the athlete’s foot had been injured. (chapter 50) Later, after the match, the examination of the fighters at the health center takes place in conditions that clearly lack privacy (chapter 52) : there are no curtains separating the athletes during their medical checks and treatment. This unusual setup allows information to circulate freely between competitors. Authority, rather than truth, determines the outcome.

This pattern repeats again in the media narrative that follows the fight. (chapter 54) Experts criticize the champion’s decision to fight despite his condition, and news reports emphasize the financial damage caused by his brawl and declining brand value. (chapter 54) Responsibility is gradually shifted away from the structures that enabled the situation and toward the fighter himself.

Seen together, these elements reveal Junmin’s true modus operandi. Rather than confronting his opponents directly, he operates through a chain of authorities: criminal patrons, gym directors, corporate executives, and medical institutions. Each layer provides protection while simultaneously distancing him from direct responsibility. Violence, manipulation, and reputation damage are carried out by others, while Junmin remains positioned just outside the immediate line of accountability.

Seen in this light, the presence of the disgraced hospital director in the office may represent a new opportunity for the Shotgun. While Heo Manwook and Choi Gilseok focus only on collecting a debt, Junmin may recognize a different potential. The man in front of them is not merely a debtor. He is a doctor — a figure associated with knowledge, prestige, and institutional authority.

If such a figure could be used to shift blame onto Kim Dan, the consequences would be devastating. The young physical therapist already occupies a vulnerable social position: he comes from poverty, lacks institutional protection, and carries the stigma of having been dismissed from the hospital (chapter 1) and even he made a “mistake” at the Light of Hope once. (chapter 59) Finally, because of the perverted hospital warden’s assault, the main lead ended up blacklisted. He could never get hired at another hospital. If the narrative surrounding the injury were manipulated, the responsibility for Joo Jaekyung’s worsening condition and the schedules could easily be redirected toward him.

Several elements would support such a strategy. Though the doctor protested, the champion nevertheless continued to fight and used the report from MFC doctors as justification. In a manipulated narrative, these facts could be rearranged to suggest that the inexperienced therapist had mismanaged the situation.

This possibility becomes even more disturbing when one considers Park Namwook’s role within the system. (chapter 46) Throughout the story, the coach frequently appears wearing glasses—a visual symbol traditionally associated with knowledge and clarity. Yet despite this apparent vision, he repeatedly fails to recognize the dangers surrounding Joo Jaekyung. As the champion’s manager, Park Namwook is responsible for organizing his schedule and protecting his long-term career. In principle, this role should place him in the position of a guardian. But he does not intervene (chapter 41), he just stands by his side.

In practice, however, the opposite often occurs. Earlier in the story, Joo Jaekyung openly questions why he was scheduled for so many events in the first place. (chapter 17) Instead of acting as a protective barrier between the athlete and the pressures of the industry, Park Namwook frequently defers to the logic of the organization. When the CEO of MFC later invites the champion to an important meeting, the coach encourages him to attend, once again placing institutional expectations above caution. (chapter 69) In this sense, Park Namwook’s authority begins to resemble the same pattern visible in Baek Junmin’s behavior: responsibility is repeatedly shifted upward toward the organization MFC or Joo Jaekyung as the owner of Team Black (chapter 88)

The result is a chain of authority in which no single actor fully accepts responsibility. The manager defers to the organization (MFC or the star), the organization relies on medical clearance, and the medical staff produce reports that legitimize risky decisions (chapter 61). Each layer appears authoritative, yet together they create a system in which accountability becomes blurred.

Baek Junmin’s strategy exploits precisely this weakness. By bringing the disgraced hospital director into the situation, he introduces a figure whose authority once belonged to the medical world itself. The newspaper article reveals that the hospital had tolerated the director’s abusive behavior for a considerable time before finally suspending his license under public pressure. (chapter 91) In other words, the institution protected him as long as the scandal remained manageable. Only when external scrutiny became unavoidable did the hospital distance itself from him. Hence his face got almost exposed.

Seen from this perspective, Junmin’s decision to involve the former doctor does not merely introduce a new accomplice. It exposes the deeper corruption already present within the medical system. The “rotten apple” did not emerge from nowhere; he was produced and sheltered by the institution that now claims to reject him.

This development creates a dangerous convergence between two worlds: the criminal network surrounding illegal fights and the institutional structures of sport and medicine. By aligning himself with the disgraced doctor, Junmin believes that he is protecting himself, unaware that he is effectively importing the corruption of the medical sphere into the arena of professional fighting and as such endangering his own position. The boundaries separating criminal manipulation, corporate interests, and medical authority begin to collapse.

In that sense, the situation no longer concerns only a personal rivalry between fighters. It reveals the fragility of the entire system surrounding the champion. The figures who should protect him—the manager, the organization, and the medical staff—are themselves embedded in structures that can be manipulated.

At this point, Baek Junmin’s nickname begins to acquire a deeper symbolic meaning. (chapter 49) A shotgun is not a weapon designed for precision. When fired, it releases multiple pellets that spread across a wide area, striking several targets at once. Junmin’s strategy follows a similar logic. Rather than confronting Joo Jaekyung directly, he destabilizes the structures surrounding him: the media narrative, the medical establishment, the leadership of MFC, and potentially even the champion’s personal relationships. Each move strikes a different layer of the system protecting the fighter. The goal is not a single decisive blow but a gradual weakening of the entire structure around the champion.

Yet this strategy carries an inherent danger. By firing into multiple institutional spheres at once, Junmin risks exposing connections that were previously hidden. The medical world, the fighting organization, and the criminal network surrounding illegal betting are not isolated domains; they intersect. In that sense, Junmin does not merely act like a fighter seeking revenge. At this moment, he becomes “the Shotgun.” The weapon does not only wound a single opponent; it blasts open the structures that conceal corruption. By pulling the trigger, Junmin risks revealing the true nature of MFC, the sport itself and the network of interests surrounding them (the medical world and the pharmaceutical company).

So if this interpretation is correct, the office scene may foreshadow the next stage of the conspiracy. Junmin does not need to attack Joo Jaekyung directly. Instead, he may target the person the champion cares about most.

Kim Dan.

The Disgraced Director – Knowledge as Liability

The appearance of the former hospital director in Heo Manwook’s office introduces another crucial figure into the unfolding conspiracy. (chapter 93) Unlike the other men in the room, this individual already stands at the intersection of several narrative threads. He knows Kim Dan. (chapter 90) He has encountered Joo Jaekyung. And he has personally witnessed the dynamics between them.

Yet this knowledge is fundamentally distorted. Because of the circumstances surrounding their earlier encounters, the disgraced director arrived at a false conclusion: he believed that the physical therapist and the champion were romantically involved. Let’s not forget that he had blacklisted him in his career. From his perspective, the young doctor could only be the athlete’s intimate partner rather than his professional caregiver. (chapter 90) Secondly, he was doing it for the money, hence he called him a slut. (chapter 90) This misunderstanding fundamentally shapes how he interprets the situation. In this sense, the disgraced director resembles Heo Manwook. Both men rely heavily on their past experiences when judging others. The loan shark assumes that Kim Dan must have obtained the money through prostitution or some other illicit activity, while the former hospital director interprets the closeness between the athlete and the therapist as evidence of a romantic relationship. In both cases, what appears to be practical knowledge becomes a source of blindness. Their experience allows them to recognize familiar patterns, but it also prevents them from seeing the complexity of the reality before them. The relationship between Joo Jaekyung and Kim Dan does not fit into a simple category such as business, manipulation, or romance. Their bond evolves gradually and reflects a far more complex emotional dynamic. (chapter 93) Yet characters like the loan shark and the disgraced director attempt to reduce it to a single explanation that matches their own expectations. In doing so, they illustrate another variation of the same paradox: those who believe they know the world best are often the least capable of perceiving its truth.

A Dangerous Instrument

At the same time, his position is extremely precarious. Unlike Baek Junmin or the loan sharks, the disgraced director cannot confront either Joo Jaekyung or Kim Dan directly. Both men already recognize him. His earlier misconduct in the hospital and at the restaurant have exposed his character, and his recent public scandal has destroyed his professional legitimacy. (chapter 91)

This is precisely why indirect strategies are the only solution for him.

If Kim Dan indeed becomes the next target of Baek Junmin’s schemes, the director initially appears to offer a convenient opportunity. As a doctor, he possesses the authority and reputation associated with the medical profession. From Junmin’s perspective, such a figure could provide legitimacy to accusations directed at the young therapist. Yet this calculation overlooks a crucial reality. The man’s reputation has already collapsed. The public scandal surrounding the accusations of sexual harassment has stripped him of his professional credibility and resulted in the suspension of his medical license.

This loss of status drastically changes his position. The disgraced director can no longer act openly within the medical world. Any direct accusation coming from him would immediately be discredited because of his scandal. However, this does not mean that he has become powerless. On the contrary, his former position may still grant him access to personal contacts and informal networks inside the medical system. Instead of acting publicly, he could therefore operate indirectly—reaching out to former colleagues or institutions and encouraging them to question Kim Dan’s competence or responsibility, as this is something he experienced in the past. (chapter 1)

The Vulnerability of an Invisible Doctor

Such a strategy would exploit an existing weakness in Kim Dan’s situation. Earlier in the story, when Joo Jaekyung attempted to locate him after his disappearance (chapter 56), hospitals repeatedly responded that they had never heard of anyone by that name. (chapter 56) This reaction suggests that the young therapist had already been erased from the professional network in Seoul. Far from protecting him, this invisibility places him in an extremely fragile position: without institutional recognition, he has no professional community capable of defending him.

If rumors about Kim Dan suddenly begin circulating within the medical world—or even appear in the media—the contradiction would be striking. Only a few months earlier, no hospital acknowledged his existence. Yet now doctors or the media would suddenly be discussing him as a controversial figure linked to the champion’s injury. Such a sudden shift would inevitably raise questions.

For Joo Jaekyung, this discrepancy could become the first clear sign that something is wrong and lets not forget that in the past, he doubted the doctors. (chapter 5) The athlete might realize that the narrative emerging around Kim Dan does not match the reality he previously encountered while searching for him. What appears at first as professional criticism could therefore reveal the existence of a coordinated attempt to manipulate the story.

Medical Confidentiality as a Weapon

Another possibility makes the situation even more troubling. If Junmin or the disgraced hospital director wished to discredit Kim Dan, they could not necessarily need to rely solely on rumors or professional criticism. A far more effective strategy would involve the selective leaking of medical information.

Kim Dan’s own patient file could become a weapon. (chapter 91)

The young therapist’s history of psychological struggles and emotional distress is part of his medical record. Under normal circumstances, such information would remain strictly protected by medical confidentiality. Yet the story has already demonstrated how easily such boundaries can be violated when institutional interests are at stake. (chapter 36)

Earlier in the narrative, the medical system showed little hesitation in discussing Joo Jaekyung’s injury publicly. Experts speculated on television about the champion’s condition, and reporters openly discussed his worsening shoulder problem despite the obvious ethical implications of revealing medical information without the patient’s consent. (chapter 54) Striking is that no one in the medical world sided with the star because of his law suit against a hospital (chapter 42)

These scenes suggest that medical confidentiality in this world is far from absolute. When money, reputation, or institutional pressure become involved, private information can quickly turn into public material.

If the same logic were applied to Kim Dan, the consequences could be devastating. And don’t forget how the main lead reacted to this situation: he was rather indifferent. A leaked file describing his mental health struggles could easily be used to construct a narrative portraying him as unstable, unreliable, or professionally unfit. Under this light, you comprehend why I placed Choi Heesung in the illustration, as he was the first one bringing up the notion of mental illness. (chapter 89) In such a scenario, the young therapist would not simply be accused of incompetence. His entire credibility could be undermined, before he even had the chance to defend himself.

The strategy would also serve several interests at once. And like mentioned above, the medical institutions involved could shift responsibility for the champion’s worsening injury onto a crazy outsider. MFC could distance itself from the controversy surrounding the fight. And Baek Junmin could exploit the scandal to weaken both Joo Jaekyung and the man closest to him.

What makes this possibility particularly disturbing is that it would rely on a form of violence that leaves no visible wounds. Instead of physical intimidation, the attack would take place through information — through documents, rumors, and carefully constructed narratives.

In other words, the same system that once erased Kim Dan from the medical world could suddenly reintroduce him into public discourse under the worst possible circumstances.

The Man Who Knows Too Much

Yet the plan also contains a dangerous flaw. The disgraced director is far from a reliable ally. His public scandal has already destroyed his credibility, and his own actions in the past reveal a man driven by opportunism and self-preservation. If pressured too far, he may choose to reveal far more than Junmin expects. Instead of stabilizing the situation, his intervention could expose the corruption of the very system Junmin is attempting to manipulate. How so? It is because he was brought to Heo Manwook’s office. (chapter 93) In the past, the loan shark never brought his victims into his own headquarters. Debtors were usually confronted in their homes (chapter 5) or attacked in the street . (chapter 1) His office functioned as a hidden lair, carefully separated from the violence carried out by his subordinates. The presence of the disgraced director inside that office therefore represents a significant rupture in Heo Manwook’s usual methods. (chapter 93) Moreover, this time he is the one beating the victim, while one of his minions is standing. (chapter 16)

The doctor’s presence there represents a source of danger. He is no longer merely a possible instrument; he also becomes a witness. By hearing the conversation about bribes, police pressure, and debt collection, he acquires dangerous knowledge about the criminal network itself. (chapter 93) In that sense, the same man whom Junmin hopes to use as a tool against Kim Dan simultaneously becomes a liability capable of exposing the entire scheme.In other words, the former doctor could end up betraying the schemers, something the Shotgun is not expecting.

The urgency created by recent events has forced the organization to abandon its usual caution. At the same time, the visual composition of the scene creates a revealing illusion. (chapter 93) Seated prominently in the center of the room, Baek Junmin appears almost like the true authority figure — the one silently observing while others handle the negotiations. His posture suggests the role of a mastermind directing the operation from the background. Thus the scared director could misjudge the true position of the “champion”, he is the real mastermind behind this. And this time, he could no longer hide behind his hyungs or organizations.

This creates a striking contrast with Kim Dan himself.

Kim Dan also possesses knowledge about the hidden world surrounding Joo Jaekyung. He has witnessed suspicious medical decisions (chapter 41), manipulations within the fighting organization (chapter 37, the drugged beverage), and the athlete’s deeply personal belief in the so-called “jinx.” Yet despite these insights, Kim Dan remains largely excluded from the decision-making processes that shape the champion’s career. In several crucial moments—such as the incident at the health center—he was deliberately kept in the dark.

The contrast between the two figures could not be sharper. The disgraced director possesses knowledge but uses it as a potential weapon. Kim Dan possesses knowledge but has no idea about his own power. What distinguishes them is that the main couple is starting sharing their thoughts and insight to each other, while at the office, the schemers keep their insight to themselves. Yet, a plot can only work, if intel is exchanged. At the same time, the information has to be accurate as well. But for that, the villains have to expose their “knowledge” and as such “vulnerabilities”.

In the end, the question is no longer simply who knows too much. Baek Junmin believes he understands everything: Kim Dan, Joo Jaekyung, and the system surrounding them—especially the power of money. Yet his confidence rests on misinterpretations and assumptions. Kim Dan, by contrast, never claims such certainty. Still, he has witnessed the hidden mechanisms of that same system—its corruption, its manipulation, and its violence—without fully grasping their meaning. Yet the way he acquires this knowledge is fundamentally different. His insight does not come from intimidation or control, but from the confessions of others. He listens patiently and attentively, without judgment. (chapter 47) (chapter 48) (chapter 74) Joo Jaekyung represents yet another form of knowledge: the knowledge of experiences. Through hardship, defeat, and survival, he has learned to recognize the realities of the world step by step. By living next to doc Dan, he learned to listen and observe so that he is now more aware of the world surrounding him. The true tension of this arc therefore lies not simply between ignorance and knowledge, but between three different ways of understanding reality. One man believes he understands everything, another quietly carries knowledge that could expose it all without realizing it, while the third slowly learns the truth through experience.That is precisely why, in the illustration, they now stand facing each other.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Hidden 🐍 Predators 🐺🦊(part 2)

Why Two Wolves?

In the first part, I mentioned both Perrault and Grimm not because the stories differ superficially, but because their shared surface—the famous bed scene—hides radically different logics of danger. If one remembers only the dialogue (“What big eyes you have!”), the two versions appear nearly identical. A wolf deceives a girl; she is eaten. Yet the decisive differences lie not in the dialogue but in the structure surrounding it.

In Grimm’s version, the moral is embedded in the ending. The girl disobeys her mother by leaving the path.

Because of her disobedience, she is swallowed, but she is rescued. The huntsman cuts open the wolf’s belly; order is restored; the wolf is killed through a trick. The lesson is corrective and communal: authority intervenes, discipline saves, error can be redeemed. Red Riding Hood learns. She does not stray again. The world remains morally structured.

Perrault’s ending, by contrast, is final. There is no huntsman, no rescue, no second chance. The girl is eaten and remains eaten. One might wonder why. The answer lies not only in the conclusion but in the construction of the encounter itself. In Perrault’s original French text, the wolf is introduced as “Compère le loup”. The word compère does not designate a stranger. It implies familiarity — a companion, an acquaintance, even a friendly associate. From the beginning, the wolf is socially positioned, not alien. Hence the forest in this version is not associated with danger or wildness. The woods are seen as a prolongation of the civilization and society. The predator belongs to the same communicative world as the girl. The danger is therefore not external intrusion but internal misrecognition.

This familiarity is reinforced in the bed scene. When the girl arrives, the wolf does not immediately attack. He instructs her to place the cake and butter aside and then tells her to come into bed with him. Perrault explicitly writes that she removes her clothes before getting in. The intimacy is staged. Closeness precedes violence. The scene imitates adult seduction before revealing predation. The girl is not seized; she participates in the proximity. That participation is precisely what makes the ending irreversible in Perrault’s social universe. Thus the old French expression “avoir vu le loup” (to have met the wolf) means to have lost virginity or have gained sexual experience. Under this light, one might understand why the wolf as Joo Jaekyung’s personality fits so well. (chapter 3) The latter became responsible for the hamster’s sexual education.

In Grimm’s version, this dimension disappears. The wolf does not construct a prolonged intimacy. After the dialogue, he simply springs from the bed and devours her. There is no undressing, no extended staging of physical closeness. Violence interrupts; it does not grow from apparent consent. Grimm transforms the libertine into a beast. The danger becomes physical appetite rather than social seduction.

Striking is that at the end of the story, Perrault articulates the moral explicitly:

The ending is the moral. There is no reversal because social damage, in Perrault’s world, is irreversible. The wolf represents not wild nature but libertine society. He does not attack in the forest because woodcutters—witnesses—are nearby. He waits until he can move the girl into a private domestic space. He speaks politely. He proposes a race so that he can reach the grandmother’s house sooner. He performs civility. Once in the house, the girl observes inconsistencies, but she accepts the animal’s explanations. Her failure is not merely disobedience; it is misjudgment.

That distinction is why both versions were necessary. Grimm teaches obedience within a moral universe that restores balance. Perrault teaches discernment within a social universe that does not. He is promoting critical thinking.

And Jinx unfolds more in the latter.

The Director: An Anaconda or a Wolf?

At first glance, the hospital director resembles Perrault’s wolf. (chapter 90) He is not impulsive. He is not openly violent. He operates within institutions, within offices, within controlled environments. He isolates rather than attacks. He frames rather than forces. Like Compère le loup, he is not a stranger; he is part of the social order. He belongs to the system. That belonging is precisely what grants him access.

His resentment (chapter 90) reveals that his true wound is territorial. He can no longer find his targets within the hospital. He lost control. He lost narrative dominance. This explicates why the predator retaliated against Kim Dan by badmouthing him. (chapter 1) He made sure that the protagonist was economically and socially “ruined”. However, at the restaurant, what did he discover? A happy man with a companion! Despite his “revenge” for the loss of his territory, the physical therapist’s life had not been ruined. Thus he tried to slander the physical therapist, he was just a slut. (chapter 90) The problem is that the champion did not react like expected. He got angry at the “client” and not at the “prostitute”. He never thought that the main lead would side with such a person. Thus the hospital director voiced a menace: (chapter 90) His threat is not confession; it is defensive strategy. It reveals what he fears most: exposure. Not moral reckoning, but visibility. The predator who once operated in sealed rooms now imagines himself dragged into the open. And that possibility terrifies him.

In Perrault’s logic, harm succeeds because it occurs without witnesses. The wolf avoids the woodcutters. Thus he relocates the act into a private domestic space. But one might wonder about the identity of the woodcutters in the Korean Manhwa. In the architecture of a scandal, the “Woodcutter” represents the Bystander Effect woven into the fabric of an organization. In the fairy tale, the woodcutters are physically present but functionally absent; their focus on their “job” creates a peripheral noise that masks the wolf’s approach.

(chapter 91)

When an institution like Saero-An Hospital (chapter 90) prioritizes its “output” (reputation, profit, or clinical operations) over the safety of its staff, it adopts the woodcutter’s axe. By focusing only on the work at hand, the institution effectively grants the predator a “sealed room.” The wolf doesn’t need to hide from the woodcutters; he only needs them to keep their heads down. What makes him powerful is not brute force but the absence of eyes. The director functioned the same way. His authority depended on institutional insulation — doors closed, hierarchy unquestioned, narratives controlled. As long as no one looked too closely, he remained Compère — familiar, respectable, legitimate.

However, visibility destroys that structure. It is no coincidence that the name of the institution is not revealed. It is strategic, it is about containment and damage control. (chapter 91) “Director of X General Hospital.” The letter X replaces identity. The institution remains faceless, protected, intact. Only the individual is exposed. He becomes the “black sheep,” the aberration, the singular deviant whose removal restores the illusion of purity. This means the system has not truly fractured. It has absorbed the shock. The management is shielded. The hospital’s reputation survives. The corruption is reframed as personal misconduct rather than structural tolerance. And that explains why the director initially felt safe. It is because he knew the “Mother” (the institution) and the “Woodcutters” (the staff/administration) were more invested in the “Big Hospital” image than in the safety of the “daughters” (the employees). And this is precisely where Perrault’s logic returns — not only through the wolf, but through the adults. In Perrault’s version, one might ask: where are the parents? The mother sends the girl into the forest without any warning. The grandmother only thinks how lovely her grandchild is, hence she is not talking about the dangers. None of them prepare her to recognize manipulation. Neither the mother nor the grandmother teaches her to question charm. She is well-bred, polite, obedient — but not trained to distrust sweetness.

Perrault’s moral seems directed at the girl, but indirectly it exposes society. A culture that values politeness over discernment produces vulnerability. The wolf thrives not only because he is cunning, but because the girl was raised to comply. The blame, therefore, is not purely individual.

The same mechanism appears in the hospital scandal. By omitting the hospital’s name, the article preserves the illusion that corruption was singular. But the panel in which Kim Dan reflects (chapter 1) disrupts the illusion that this was ever an isolated deviation. It reveals that shielding authority at the expense of subordinates was already the hospital’s modus operandi. The management’s instinct was not investigation, but preservation. Not accountability, but hierarchy.

This is crucial. Before the scandal became public, the hospital had already demonstrated where its loyalties lay. The director was protected. The subordinate was expendable. Dan lost his position; the director remained secure. That earlier incident establishes a pattern: institutional cohesion prioritized over justice. Now compare this to the anonymous article. (chapter 91) The article does not expose the forest. It exposes one wolf. Hence the hospital name remains concealed, while the man’s face is “revealed”. The director’s license is suspended. Publicly, the system appears decisive. But structurally, the logic remains the same: protect the institution, isolate the individual. The difference is only in scale. Previously, Dan was sacrificed to shield the director. Now the director is sacrificed to shield the hospital.

The mechanism is identical. This is where Perrault’s tale deepens the analogy. In the fairy tale, the mother sends the girl into danger unprepared. The adults create conditions in which charm is not interrogated. When the wolf succeeds, the girl bears the consequence. Society remains unexamined. Hence in Perrault’s tale, there is no huntsman because society itself is implicated. The wolf is not defeated because the environment that produced him remains untouched.

Likewise, the hospital’s earlier response shows that vulnerability was institutionalized. Victims were isolated. Complaints were contained. Authority was insulated. The forest was never safe; it was simply unacknowledged. The article does not expose the forest. It exposes one wolf.

And that is the most disturbing parallel: predators thrive where institutions prefer appearance over introspection. And now, let me ask you this question: what about MFC as institution then?

Perrault’s warning is therefore double-edged. It cautions young women about gentle wolves, but it also exposes a society that raises daughters to be agreeable rather than analytical. In both cases, the danger is not only the wolf. It is the world that allows him to pass as familiar.

That is why his language is not remorseful but retaliatory. (chapter 90) “If I fall, he’s going down with me” translates into: If I am exposed, I will contaminate the narrative. I will ensure that no one stands clean beside me. The threat is not about truth; it is about mutual ruin. This is Perrault’s mechanism inverted: when privacy collapses, the wolf attempts to drag the girl into public disgrace so that exposure harms both equally. If he cannot remain hidden, he will ensure that the victim appears complicit. What the director fears most is not prison, nor even moral judgment. It is losing control of the story.

And this leads me to the following observation: (chapter 90) The director claimed that doc Dan ruined his life, though the article makes it clear that it happened because of the collaboration of different victims. (chapter 90) The moment he got caught by the nurse in the office, gossips started circulating, and previous victims recognized that they were not the only ones. The man could no longer escape the gaze from the staff. Hence he had to seek his “targets” elsewhere. The restaurant scene clarifies his new method. He is sitting with a man in a curated adult space—low light, alcohol, controlled proximity. (chapter 90) It resembles the wolf’s preferred setting: intimacy that appears voluntary. What caught my attention is that he complained about his partners. (chapter 90) That line exposes the structural wound. “Pandering” implies performance. It implies negotiation. It implies mutuality. It implies that he must now ask rather than take. In the hospital, he did not have to pander. Authority substituted for charm. Hierarchy substituted for consent. Privacy substituted for persuasion.

Outside that territory, he is reduced to the marketplace of mutual agreement, — dating apps, casual meetings, drinks that require conversation rather than compliance. And he resents it. I came to think about dating apps, because the perverted hospital director did not meet the man at the XY club (chapter 33), but at the restaurant. If he had known such a club, he could have met the green haired-guy or the “uke” from episode 55. Thus I deduce that the sexual predator is actually hiding his “homosexuality”, he had been living a double life in the end, like the wolf in Perrault. That’s why he targets “virgins”. Since he used the expression “pandering… get by”, Mingwa implies that this man must have told the men (“all kinds of people”) he met, he was looking for a boyfriend to justify his action. (chapter 90) However, this lie was quickly caught by the unknown companion, as the perverted director paid no attention to him. (chapter 89) This exposes that the sexual predator hadn’t dropped his old mind-set, selfishness and entitlement. When the man abruptly stands and leaves, the director is surprised. (chapter 90) That surprise matters. It suggests expectation of compliance, of silent agreement, of recognition of coded signals. The man likely does not belong to the director’s ecosystem; he does not recognize the invitation as opportunity but as lack of respect. Thus he exits. (chapter 90) The fact that the wolf tried to talk him out of it indicates that their relationship was not only superficial, but also more equal. Humiliation is crucial. Predators who rely on social camouflage depend on territory. When territory collapses, strategy must change.

This is where the transformation begins. Until he meets Doc Dan, the director functions like an anaconda: silent constriction, gradual suffocation, no visible struggle. The anaconda does not bite first; it coils. It removes oxygen slowly. The hospital setting enabled precisely that kind of predation—isolated rooms, professional hierarchy, reputational shields. After the loss of his territory, we could say that he becomes acting like a “wolf” from Perrault’s version. He has many relationships (all kinds of people to get by). Perrault’s wolf survives because he is charming and unmarked. He passes as “Compère.” Yet, the moment the champion crosses his path, the director transforms one more time: (chapter 90) This is where Grimm enters. His true nature got exposed, he is socially identified as predator.

Thus I initially deduced that the perverted hospital director would retaliate against the famous champion. (chapter 90) Jaekyung represents exposure. He is public, visible, media-facing. He has sponsors, contracts, a name that circulates. Reputation is capital in MMA. A scandal can destabilize a career faster than defeat in the ring.

But the new development alters this trajectory. (chapter 91) The director has already been exposed. His license is suspended. His name circulates in headlines. Even if the hospital remains anonymous, he does not. His face may be blurred, but within professional and social circles, recognition is inevitable.

This changes the mechanics of revenge. Previously, he could have weaponized narrative. Now, narrative cannot be weaponized — because he lacks credibility. Any accusation coming from him would be read as retaliation. He is already stigmatized as the wolf.

And stigma has consequences beyond reputation. He complains that he must “pander to all kinds of people just to get by.” (chapter 90) That line once indicated resentment toward consent. Now it reveals something deeper: he may no longer even succeed in pandering. Who would willingly meet a man publicly accused of harassment? (chapter 91) Even if strangers do not immediately recognize him, someone eventually will. His social ecosystem contracts.

He becomes even more isolated than before. This is where the transformation accelerates. And when charm is no longer viable and narrative manipulation is no longer credible, only one option remains: force without pretense.

This is where Grimm’s wolf enters fully. In Grimm’s version, the wolf does not maintain prolonged civility. He springs. (chapter 90) He devours. (chapter 90) There is no sustained camouflage. Violence becomes explicit.

The director’s inner monologue already reveals this potential pivot: (chapter 90) That sentence reframes restraint as error. It converts missed coercion into regret.

Now add stigmatization. If he cannot find partners, if he cannot reclaim status, if he cannot control narrative, if he has nothing left to lose, then the probability of retaliation and desperate reassertion increases. Not because he desires intimacy. But because he desires dominance. And dominance without insulation becomes assault.

The restaurant rejection already wounded his ego. Besides, his behavior at the restaurant could be seen as intrusion. (chapter 90) Hence he ran away. The exposure destroyed his credibility. The public article marked him. His ecosystem collapses. He is no longer hidden wolf. He is identified predator.

Predators who lose camouflage often escalate rather than retreat. Thus the revenge element shifts from narrative contamination to bodily assertion. Not scandal against Jaekyung. Not media manipulation. But an attempt to reclaim asymmetry through direct coercion. This does not guarantee success.

But it increases probability. The fairy-tale logic therefore completes itself:

Perrault shows the wolf who hides behind civility. Grimm shows the wolf who leaps when civility fails.

In Jinx, we may be witnessing the precise moment where camouflage is no longer possible — and where the predator, stripped of territory and credibility, risks becoming the brute he once avoided being. The resentment we see in his thoughts suggests precisely that possibility. When he sees Kim Dan thriving elsewhere, when he frames him as “whoring himself out,” he begins to rewrite the narrative: if Dan is already a “whore,” then coercion becomes transaction. In that logic, force becomes justified. And remember how Heo Manwook reacted, when he imagined that doc Dan was selling himself: (chapter 16)

This is the most dangerous pivot. Perrault’s wolf survives through civility. Grimm’s wolf initially survives through brutality, until he is caught (the huntsman = police). The director initially belonged to the first category. After losing territory, he risks evolving into the second. To conclude, the shift from anaconda to wolf is not a metaphorical flourish; it is psychological escalation. Camouflaged predators who lose control often intensify behavior rather than retreat.

And now, you are probably wondering why I included the actor Choi Heesung in the illustration of “predators”, though he is a second lead.

The False Mirror: Choi Heesung and The Gentle Wolf

At first glance, Choi Heesung stands disturbingly close to Perrault’s wolf. Not only he appears as polite and gentle (chapter 30), but also as selfless. (chapter 30) Yet, he is a libertine, though he claims to be pure by stating that he is looking for his soulmate. (chapter 33) Hence no one is suspecting the darkness in his heart. Even the champion believed in his words, when he claimed that he had some feelings for doc Dan. (chapter 58) The resemblance is deliberate. He is discreet. He avoids public scrutiny. He hides his intimacy with Potato. (chapter 43) Therefore the latter was not present at the champion’s birthday party. The actor operates in private spaces (special episode 2) and prefers silence over visibility. Like Perrault’s Compère le loup, he does not appear monstrous. He appears socially legible — even charming. He navigates controlled environments. He is careful about who sees what.

On the surface, the symmetry is unsettling. Perrault’s wolf does not attack in the forest. He speaks politely and seduces next to the Woodcutters. (chapter 35) He proposes a “race”to the little girl, in Jinx it’s a meal (ramen in Korean, an allusion to sex) (chapter 35) He softens his voice. He invites the girl into bed. (special episode 1) He constructs intimacy before violence. He depends on civility as camouflage.

But what distinguishes a “libertine” is the absence of responsibility in their actions and words. Once the “Little Red Riding Hood” loses their virginity, the culprit is not blamed, but the victim. That’s why Perrault warns young women. The latter have to take the responsibility for the wolf’s behavior. Therefore it is not astonishing that the actor agrees that the chow chow becomes “responsible” for him. (special episode 1)

Because Heesung, too, prefers the private over the public, he exists in the gray zone where discretion and desire intersect.

But resemblance is not structure.

The decisive difference lies in how secrecy is used. Perrault’s wolf hides in order to extract. Civility functions as access. Privacy ensures there are no woodcutters. Sweetness precedes consumption. The wolf’s politeness is not restraint — it is strategy. Heesung’s secrecy functions differently. It is not just defensive, he still wants his partner to have fun. (special episode 1) It is not about power display, but fun. He hides not to isolate his partner, but to shield himself from exposure. His discretion protects his own public image, not his access to another’s body. The imbalance exists — it cannot be denied — but it is not systematically mobilized to erode consent. The latter comes from their initial contract: Potato is at his beck and call.

The wolf uses secrecy to manufacture vulnerability. Heesung uses secrecy to simply avoid visibility and responsibility. This distinction becomes clearer in their relation to inexperience.

For Perrault’s wolf, virginity is not intimacy. It is resistance waiting to be broken. (chapter 90) The girl’s naivety is eroticized precisely because it promises asymmetry. The invitation into bed is staged. Her undressing is narrated. Closeness is prolonged. The violence emerges from intimacy.

Control is primary. Desire is secondary. Heesung’s response to inexperience produces discomfort rather than appetite. (special episode 1) He has been avoiding “virgins” for one reason. He knows how a “virgin” would react to his dream ” to find his soulmate”. They would take his “words” seriously and imagine him as someone serious and reliable. But by selecting partners with sexual experience, he can claim that he made a mistake, they were no soulmate. (special episode 1) But this panel exposes even better why the actor is so different from Perrault’s wolf. Youth symbolizes “vulnerability and innocence” and that’s something he has been avoiding. The reason is simple. That way, he can avoid accountability. That’s why he panics, when he hears the age. He realizes his mistake! This reveals that though Heesung is a libertine, he is different from the hospital warden. He is not seeking pleasure in asymmetry, fear, shame and power. He is not targeting “virgins” to exploit their vulnerability. He has been avoiding “virgins”, as he knew that he would have to take responsibility. In reality, he has always feared attachment. Where the wolf eroticizes vulnerability, Heesung is destabilized by it.

What complicates the contrast with Choi Heesung is not that with his smiles, he resembles (chapter 34) the predator by accident (chapter 90), but that he resembles him convincingly enough to be confused with him.

In the first part, we wrote: “Something walks close, warm and familiar — speaking softly, until trust opens the way.” That description applied to the wolf. But it also applies to the fox. Heesung’s true animal is not the wolf. It is the fox (chapter 89) — clever, adaptable, socially fluid. The fox does not devour. It maneuvers and as such plays tricks.

And yet the fox can be mistaken for a wolf. Heesung repeatedly uses proximity through work to create intimacy. (chapter 32) He first approaches Kim Dan through professional contact. Later, he suggests a gig to Potato (special episode 1) or uses training space to remain near Potato. (chapter 88) Even in the gym, he casually asks Yoo-Gu to hold mitts — reorganizing the work structure in ways that subtly serve his private interest. Work becomes the bridge. The boundary blurs.

And here lies the dangerous resemblance. He reproaches Joo Jaekyung: (chapter 89) The accusation implies that Jaekyung contaminates professional space with sex. Yet Heesung himself collapses that boundary. He initiates intimacy with Potato after drinking. He knows the other is intoxicated. He proceeds anyway.

This is not predatory orchestration. But it is negligence toward asymmetry. This is where the question becomes unavoidable: when is it consent, and when is it coercion?

Is consent present simply because no explicit “no” was spoken? Is coercion present only when force is visible?
Or does the line lie elsewhere — in power, in context, in intention? Mingwa gave us the answer: (chapter 90) It is when one makes a clear decision and accepts the consequences. Yet, Heesung violated this rule, for he knew Potato was drunk. He did not stop. He did not insist on postponement. He allowed desire to override clarity. That choice introduces asymmetry. Alcohol clouds agency. Youth complicates balance. Professional proximity blurs roles. Secondly, he is rejecting accountability. Finally, he never tried to correct Potato’s error and false belief. He took advantage of his ignorance. So his behavior could be perceived as manipulative and coercive.

From the outside, the structure resembles the predator’s method: work proximity, private space, imbalance, intoxication. But coercion is not defined by imbalance alone. It is defined by how imbalance is used. The hospital director manufactures dependence. (chapter 90) He isolates. He rewrites refusal. He eroticizes resistance. He regrets restraint. His desire intensifies when asymmetry is greatest. Heesung does not erode consent systematically. He does not isolate Potato over time. He does not rewrite refusal as invitation. But he does blur boundaries. He does allow alcohol to intervene. He does prioritize desire over clarity.

From the outside, that distinction may not be visible. And that is where misrecognition becomes dangerous.

Heesung does not publicly acknowledge the relationship. (special episode 1) He hides it, though he tried to reveal it to doc Dan (chapter 58). If the truth were exposed — an actor secretly sleeping with a younger, inexperienced partner whom he approached through work — the narrative could easily frame him as exploitative. He could be accused of sexual harassment.

He would appear as a predator. Not because he functions like the hospital director — but because the structure resembles it. Fox mistaken for wolf.

The key distinction lies in aftermath. When Jaekyung reflects (chapter 91) the emotion is internalized. He experiences remorse not because he was exposed, but because he crossed a boundary. He separates work from intimacy afterward. He becomes rigid about consent, alcohol, and clarity. Therefore imagine his reaction, when he discovers the true nature of the relationship between Choi Heesung and Potato. He can only be shocked and angry.

This is why Jinx constructs the resemblance so carefully. Surface similarity forces the reader to confront how easily desire, secrecy, and proximity can resemble coercion. The difference lies not in discretion, nor in imbalance, nor even in sexual contact under imperfect conditions. It lies in how power is processed before and afterward. At the same time, it gives an answer how to read the first night between the main couple. It was no sexual harassment.

The wolf converts vulnerability into entitlement. The fox risks vulnerability through miscalculation.

And yet — in a world quick to judge by appearances — the fox may be labeled as a wolf. That is the uncomfortable tension Mingwa builds. Because the story is not only about identifying predators. It is about learning to distinguish between domination and error, between strategy and immaturity, between systematic coercion and boundary failure.

If Choi Heesung’s relationship with Potato were to become public, how would it be read? Would he be framed as a predator — the older actor who used work proximity and intoxication to seduce an inexperienced partner? Would he become the new “black sheep,” sacrificed to protect the image of the entertainment agency? (chapter 33) Or would attention shift to the structure that allowed blurred boundaries to exist in the first place?

This question is not hypothetical. It repeats a pattern already established. Observe how Joo Jaekyung sued a hospital for leaking information, though the lawyer and the institution put the blame an individual. (chapter 36) When the hospital scandal broke, the institution remained unnamed. (chapter 91) The director was isolated as the deviant. The system survived. Corruption was reframed as personal misconduct. Structural tolerance became invisible.

If Heesung were exposed, would the narrative follow the same logic? Would he be condemned as an individual aberration? Or would the agency be questioned for cultivating environments where professional and private hierarchies overlap, where young trainees depend on seniors, where silence protects image?

The fox can easily be mistaken for the wolf. But the forest still matters. And this brings us to a larger structural mirror: MFC.

When schemes unfolded inside the fighting world — manipulated matches, concealed injuries, silent complicity — who bears responsibility? The CEO? The manager? The doctors who testified selectively? (chapter 41) The security guards who enforced silence? (chapter 40) The sports reporters who repeated the official version? The referees? The moderators? The corrupted director of the gym Choi Gilseok? Or the institution itself?

If one fighter becomes the scapegoat (chapter 52), does the structure remain untouched?
If one CEO falls, does the culture disappear? (chapter 47)
If one predator is exposed, does the ecosystem dissolve? (chapter 48) As you can see, I have the feeling that the pharmaceutical company might become the topic of the next scandal.

Perrault’s tale quietly asks the same question. The wolf is blamed. But who raised the girl to trust sweetness without discernment? Who allowed her to walk alone? Who normalized obedience over critical thought? The fairy tale ends with the wolf devouring the girl — and society intact. Grimm adds a huntsman, but the forest remains.

So when the next scandal erupts — whether in the hospital, in the agency, or in MFC — the real question will not be merely who acted wrongly.

It will be: who benefited?
Who remained silent?
Who enforced the hierarchy?
Who preferred reputation over accountability?

And perhaps the most uncomfortable question of all: Will another wolf be sacrificed — while the forest survives once again?

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Hidden 🕸️ Predators 🕷️🐍⚕️(part 1)

Entering the Forest

A forest. Dense. Green. Familiar and yet uneasy. At its center, a clearing: a fragile figure, the terminally ill grandmother, Shin Okja, surrounded by watchful silence. At its edges, shapes barely visible. Eyes. Teeth. Stillness.

Anyone looking at this image will recognize the echo of a fairy tale. A red hood. A forest. A wolf. Yet something feels wrong. The danger does not come from a single direction. The forest hides more than one animal. That is the key.

In Jinx, predation does not wear a single face. It does not always announce itself through violence. It often arrives disguised as smile, care, opportunity, professionalism, or inevitability. Like the forest, the story teaches its characters and Jinx-lovers that what is most dangerous is rarely what is most visible.

The wolf is there, of course. He always is. But the wolf is not alone.

Something waits above, patient and still.
Something coils, slow and deliberate.
Something laughs from the margins, waiting for weakness.
Something walks close, warm and familiar—speaking softly, until trust opens the way.

This essay does not begin by naming these creatures. It begins by asking a simpler question: What makes a predator in Jinx?

Is it violence or power?
Intent or outcome?
Hunger or indifference?
Necessity or luxury?

Across hospitals, gyms, agencies, and intimate spaces, the same structure repeats itself: asymmetry. Of strength. Of money. Of knowledge. Of age. Of status. Those who stand higher decide the pace, the rules, the price. Those below learn to adapt, to endure, to apologize.

And yet, not all predators look the same. Some act openly. (chapter 14) Others hide behind systems. (chapter 1) Some exploit bodies. (chapter 11) Others exploit labor, fear, loyalty, or belief. The forest contains them all. The tragedy is not that the little red riding hood enters the woods. It is that she is taught to trust what should never have been neutral. This logic is already present at the very beginning of the tale, in both its major versions. In the seventeenth-century version by Charles Perrault, the child is introduced as “the prettiest creature who was ever seen,” excessively loved by her mother and even more so by her grandmother, who expresses affection not through instruction, but through gifts—most notably the red hood that gives the girl her name.

The Grimm brothers repeat the same structure: a sweet child, adored by all, especially by her grandmother, who again responds to love by giving rather than teaching.

In both versions, the child’s defining trait is not curiosity or disobedience, but being loved too much. That excess of affection becomes a curse. Because she is cherished, she does not expect danger; because she is protected in theory, she is never prepared in practice. The forest is not introduced as hostile, but as neutral — until it proves otherwise. Only later does Little Red Riding Hood learn what the forest truly is, and what kind of creatures have always lived there.

This essay argues that Jinx is not about identifying a single villain, but about learning to see: to recognize how predation hides behind smiles, contracts, concern, gifts, medicine, and “opportunity”; to understand why innocence is repeatedly punished for trusting the wrong voice; and to ask why those who survive often do so not by strength alone, but by forming true alliances.

In a forest like this, the most dangerous predators are not the ones we fear — but the ones we excuse or trust blindly.

Learning to See in the Forest

Before naming any creature, it is necessary to understand how predation functions. Not as moral failure, but as structure. Not as exception, but as pattern.

The word predator is deceptively simple. In everyday speech, it evokes an animal: claws, teeth, a chase in the forest. But that image is already an interpretation — and in an essay like this, interpretation must come after criteria. That is why I begin with language.

Most dictionaries (merriam) describe a predator first in biological terms (an organism that preys on others for food), then broaden the meaning toward human behavior: a person or business exploiting others for personal advantage, and, more specifically, a person who seeks sexual contact in a coercive or manipulative manner. It is precisely this lexical structure — the word expanding from nature to economy (cambridge) to sexuality — that makes the three-part distinction not arbitrary but necessary. The story itself demands it: in Jinx, harm is not produced by a single monster, but by a system in which bodies, labor, and vulnerability are consumed in different ways.

The first definition matters because it prevents moralism. If preying exists in biology, then predation is not automatically synonymous with “evil.” It is a function: one being’s survival depends on another’s depletion. From there, the question becomes not “Who is wicked?” but “What structure allows consumption without consequence?”

A predator, in the strict biological sense, is an organism that survives by consuming another organism.

One might wonder why I do not simply say “animal,” since predators are commonly associated with wolves, snakes, eagles or hyenas. Yet biology itself corrects this reflex: predatism is not limited to animals. A plant can be predatory (carnivorous plants that trap and digest insects). Parasites and certain worms can behave like predators, feeding on living hosts over time. Some predators kill quickly; others drain slowly. Some hunt actively; others wait. The key point is not the image of an animal, but the logic of consumption.

The green-haired man offers one of the clearest, and most unsettling, illustrations of predation as a relational process rather than a fixed identity. (chapter 42). When he speaks of Joo Jaekyung, his language is explicit: the champion was a source of milk, a body that could be “milked” for money, favors, and reflected status. In biological terms, this is parasitism rather than hunting — survival not through direct attack, but through prolonged attachment to a stronger host. As long as the host remains productive, the parasite thrives. When the bloodsucker is removed, flow stops, hunger turns first into regret (chapter 42) before resentment. (chapter 42)

What matters is not that the green-haired man misidentifies Kim Dan as a parasite (chapter 42), but why he does so at the precise moment he does. (chapter 42) His hostility does not emerge from poverty alone, nor from moral outrage. It is triggered by a rupture in his expectations.

At first, he assumes the relationship between Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung has ended. The evidence, to him, is visual and economic: Kim Dan’s clothes, his delivery job, his visible precarity. From this perspective, Kim Dan appears to have lost access to the “resource.” The assumption is revealing. For the green-haired man, intimacy is legible primarily through consumption. If there is no visible benefit, then the bond must be broken.

The turning point occurs when Kim Dan defends Joo Jaekyung’s name (chapter 42) In that moment, the green-haired man realizes that closeness still exists without visible profit. This is intolerable to him. It contradicts the logic through which he has justified his own past behavior: the belief that proximity to power must be monetized, that relationships exist to be exploited, that affection without gain is either naive or dishonest.

His response is not to accuse Kim Dan of exploitation, but to collapse Kim Dan into his own worldview. (chapter 42) The insult is precise. He does not say Kim Dan is living well; he says Kim Dan is a toy. A tool. (chapter 42) Something used and discarded. In other words, he reframes Kim Dan’s loyalty as delusion and reasserts predation as the only intelligible model of intimacy.

This is where resentment replaces regret. In the past, the green-haired man convinced himself that he was “dating” Joo Jaekyung (chapter 02) and that the exchange of attention and money implied mutuality. Joo Jaekyung’s refusal shattered that illusion. What Kim Dan represents now is not competition, but refutation: proof that closeness does not require extraction, and that survival does not have to pass through exploitation.

The cruelty of the delivery-job remark lies precisely here. Kim Dan’s visible labor disproves the parasite fantasy — and therefore must be reframed as humiliation. If Kim Dan is still close to Joo Jaekyung and still poor, then the green-haired man’s entire understanding of relationships collapses. Rather than revise that understanding, he weaponizes it.

In this sense, the green-haired man does not simply enact predation; he naturalizes it. He believes relationships are ecosystems of use, where someone must feed and someone must be fed upon. What enrages him is not that Kim Dan is exploiting Joo Jaekyung — but that he is not.

This logic becomes even more ambiguous inside the shared apartment. (chapter 42) The green-haired man refuses to pay for food this, while implying that his roommate is taking advantage of him, as if he would barely contributes. On the surface, the image suggests exploitation: one man living off another’s labor. Yet the scene refuses to clarify who truly benefits. The roommate remains largely invisible, economically opaque, almost spectral. Is he a dependent quietly feeding off the green-haired man’s remaining resources? Or is the green-haired man himself the parasite, overstaying, consuming, and justifying his presence through grievance? The narrative does not resolve this tension — deliberately so. Predation here is not readable at a glance. It hides in everyday arrangements, in domestic negotiations, in the language of fairness and contribution.

This ambiguity is precisely the point. If predation in Jinx were a simple hierarchy, it would be easy to assign fixed roles: predator above, prey below. Yet the story repeatedly undermines this comfort. A predator is often also prey — and predation rarely exists in isolation. It circulates. Thus the wolf in the Grimm’s version gets killed by the hunter. Like an ecosystem under pressure, it adapts, redirects itself, and seeks new hosts when old ones disappear.

This nuance is important for Jinx, because the most dangerous forms of predation in the story are not always fast or visible. Sometimes the harm is incremental: a little more pressure, a little less rest, another shift, another compromise — until collapse looks “natural,” as if the victim simply lacked resilience. In that sense, the wolf is only the beginning of the forest, not its full population.

From this first definition, the second emerges naturally. If predation is a structure of consumption, then it can occur without teeth. In modern life, many forms of consumption happen through money, authority, and contracts rather than through jaws. This is what I call economic predation: a mode of survival or profit that depends on extracting labor, time, reputation, or risk from others while refusing to bear the cost.

A minor but telling example appears in the entertainment industry. In the panel where Heesung’s manager protests,

(Chapter 31), the contract is made visible: the manager’s income depends entirely on the star’s uninterrupted productivity. When work stops, pay stops. Yet neither the star nor the agency appears exposed. Heesung himself, who proposed the risky sparring, shows no empathy for his caring manager. He doesn’t feel concerned for this arrangement and makes no attempt to renegotiate it for his manager’s sake. Financial risk is displaced downward, onto the least protected figure. The manager is not the predator here, but a human buffer, absorbing the instability produced by a structure that benefits the star and the Entertainment agency while refusing to insure those who sustain them.

The same logic governs Heesung’s interpersonal conduct. He requests treatment from Kim Dan not only for free, but also late in the evening (chapter 34) or on Saturdays (chapter 32), treating the physical therapist’s work and time as indefinitely available. This is not an isolated lapse but a recurring pattern, later reproduced with Potato as well. (Chapter 88) In both cases, access replaces consent: labor and care are extracted on polite request, while the cost—fatigue, intrusion, and loss of private time—is borne entirely by the subordinate.

Economic predation often presents itself as normal. It hides behind professional language: discipline, opportunity, schedule adjustments, liability, brand value. (chapter 54) Its hallmark is externalization: the institution benefits while the vulnerable party carries the damage. A hospital extracts unpaid endurance and calls it devotion. A league extracts bodily risk and calls it career ambition. An agency extracts loyalty and calls it partnership. Even when no one screams, the asymmetry remains: those above set the terms; those below absorb the consequences.

In Jinx, this structure repeats across settings. Kim Dan’s exhaustion in institutional spaces is never read as a sign that the environment is predatory; it is reframed as personal weakness or incompetence. The moment he falters, the language shifts: not “We pushed too far,” (chapter 70) but “Take better care of yourself.” Not “We failed to protect you,” but “You caused inconvenience.” This is the core of economic predation: the harm is real, but the blame is displaced downward so the system remains clean.

The third definition is narrower but more intimate: sexual predation. Here, consumption is not primarily of labor or reputation, but of vulnerability and bodily boundaries. And again, the defining feature is not just “lust,” but also asymmetry. (Chapter 90) A sexual predator targets someone whose circumstances make refusal impossible or costly — socially, economically, professionally, physically, psychologically. The predator does not need to use overt violence to be dangerous; often the strategy is precisely to stay close to the border where the victim can later be blamed: You wanted it. You tempted me. You misled me. You didn’t say no clearly enough. This is why victim-blaming belongs structurally to sexual predation: it is a technique of retroactive absolution. This logic does not remain abstract in Jinx. It finds a concrete site where authority, legitimacy, and bodily access converge.

Hyenas at the Edge of the Ring

In the fight ecosystem, not every predator hunts. Some wait. This is where the logic of the hyena enters. Significantly, even the champion himself recognizes this dynamic: he explicitly identifies the other fighters as predators, likening them to hyenas. (chapter 29) Rival fighters do not need to engineer the champion’s collapse; they only need to anticipate it. What defines them is not ambition alone, but timing.

Seonho’s confrontation makes this explicit. He does not challenge Joo Jaekyung as an equal seeking fair competition; he frames the conflict around age and decline. (chapter 46) His words are exposing not restraint, but accusation. The implication is clear: the champion’s body is already failing; respect has become optional. Seonho is not trying to overthrow Jaekyung through skill alone. He is announcing that the moment of vulnerability has arrived, and that patience is no longer required.

This explicates why Arnaud Gabriel felt so sure that he would win after the champion’s surgery and recovery. (chapter 87) He thought, he had found his perfect “meal”. To conclude, Arnaud Gabriel articulates the same logic even more coldly. (chapter 87) There is no personal animosity here, only inevitability. The statement is not a threat; it is a forecast. Power, in this worldview, is temporary by nature, and the role of rivals is not to prevent collapse, but to be present when it happens. Like hyenas, they do not waste energy on the kill. They wait for age, injury, scandal, or exhaustion to do the work.

This is why rival fighters do not need to engineer the champion’s downfall. They rely on time, on wear, on the pressures already imposed by institutions like MFC. Their aggression surfaces only once dominance begins to crack. Vulnerability is the signal. From that moment on, restraint is no longer profitable.

What these scenes expose is not rivalry, but opportunism. The fighters circle the champion not as challengers, but as inheritors. They do not imagine a world without him; they imagine a world after him — and they are already positioning themselves inside it. They circle the edges of the ring and watch for the first sign of weakness—an injury, a scandal, a moment of public vulnerability—because collapse creates opportunity.

But the fighters are not the most powerful hyenas in this system. Above them stands MFC, and behind it, its CEO. (chapter 47) Their role is not to wait for blood, but to manage its visibility. When the switched spray incident and the drug-related harm threaten to surface, the response is not investigation, but orchestration. (chapter 69) A new match is organized. An invitation is extended. Noise is generated. Attention is redirected. The spectacle resumes.

This is not damage control; it is reputational predation. The federation feeds on the champion’s body and public image while ensuring that institutional responsibility never coagulates into blame. By pushing the fight forward, the CEO converts injury into productivity and scandal into momentum. The risk is displaced downward—onto the fighter, onto his body—while the institution remains untouched. This displacement becomes even more visible once Joo Jaekyung is no longer treated as an athlete, but as a celebrity (chapter 81) The distinction matters. An athlete is managed for performance and longevity; a celebrity is managed for visibility. Injury is a problem in the first case. Scandal is profitable in the second.

Thus Joo Jaekyung’s status becomes paradoxically more fragile at the very moment his visibility increases. A victory can no longer secure him; it can only be reframed. Once celebrity logic dominates, even success is vulnerable to contamination. A win can be tainted retroactively by narrative—by rumor, insinuation, or moral scandal.

This is why his public mention of Baek Junmin’s trick is so dangerous. (chapter 87) By naming the manipulation in front of an audience, he breaks the tacit agreement of silence that protects institutions. What should have remained backstage is brought into public discourse. From that moment on, the system has an incentive not to clarify the truth, but to reframe the speaker.

In such a configuration, scandal is not a possibility; it is a tool. The more Joo Jaekyung speaks, the more he represents a threat to MFC and its CEO. His credibility becomes the variable to be managed. And this brings me to the following conclusion: while readers saw in Joo Jaekyung the wolf because of Mingwa’s association, the reality is that he is the little red riding hood too! 😮 It is because he still trusts MFC. And who is the grandmother in his life? Naturally Hwang Byungchul who is himself sick. (chapter 78) The latter has always blamed the “boxer Joo Jaewoong”, but not the boxing world, the institution. (chapter 74) He never saw the ties between boxing and mafia. And this raises the following question: how can the Little Red Riding Hood discover the predator in MFC before getting eaten?

The waiting hyenas do not act alone. Their patience is enabled by authority. Again and again, it is the doctors who authorize the risk. (chapter 61) Joo Jaekyung accepts matches while injured (chapter 41), his shoulder still compromised, because he is “cleared” to fight. The phrase is decisive. Clearance does not mean safety; it means permission. The medics approve, the fight proceeds, and responsibility dissolves upward. When the body holds, profit is generated. When it fails, discipline follows.

The same doctors who allow him to fight while injured (chapter 50) later participate in his suspension. In both cases, the logic is identical: the body is usable until it is not. MFC remains intact; the cost is borne by the fighter. (chapter 52) The hyenas wait, the institution schedules, and the risk is displaced downward—onto the athlete, onto his body—while the structure that benefits from him remains untouched.

And this is why we must return our attention to the hospital—not as a place of healing, but as the space where predation receives its most legitimate language.

Predation with a license

The director from Saero-An hospital (chapter 90) is the first figure in Jinx who embodies all three dimensions of predation at once. He is a biological predator in logic, an economic predator in practice, and a sexual predator in effect — yet none of these appear as transgression. They are exercised under license.

Unlike the green-haired man, he does not operate from the margins. Unlike the entertainment industry, he does not rely on contracts alone. His authority is institutional, routinized, and already legitimized. He does not need to seek access; access is built into his position. This nameless man does not merely benefit from power asymmetries; he exploits them methodically. His behavior aligns with what research repeatedly identifies as sexual predation: manipulation, boundary erosion, grooming, sexualization of vulnerability, and retroactive inversion of blame. [for more read Major signs of a sexual predator]

Kim Dan enters a prestigious hospital without the markers that usually signal legitimacy there. No suit, no tailored coat — only a gray sweater. (chapter 80) In this environment, appearance is not superficial. It is a language of rank. To arrive without fluency in that language is already to be classified as provisional. (chapter 90) He has no network, no prior foothold either. Thus it was difficult for him to get hired in such a large hospital. Compare it with the hiring of the previous physical therapist: (chapter 54)

Episode 1 quietly reinforces this position. Kim Dan is not described as having secured a stable post, but as having found a “good gig.” (chapter 1) The expression matters. It implies opportunity rather than integration: freelance labor, paid by hours or shifts, without institutional protection. In such conditions, negotiation is not expected. The contract is accepted, not discussed.

This form of employment produces a very specific visibility. The freelancer must remain present, available, and accommodating, because income depends on accumulation. We have to imagine that Kim Dan works long hours, accepts double shifts, and does not refuse late schedules. Visually, Kim Dan already bears the marks of exhaustion: pale skin, dark circles, a practiced smile (chapter 90) — the same signs previously associated with the hospice. (chapter 57)

From within precarity, this is survival. Besides, the hospital warden has no idea about the debts. From the director’s position of security, it is read differently. (chapter 90) Constant availability is misrecognized as appetite. Endurance becomes ambition. Constraint is translated into desire. Vulnerability is reclassified as greed. This misreading is not accidental; it is functional. If Kim Dan is greedy, then the director is not coercive. If Kim Dan “wants more,” then nothing is being taken from him.

It is only on this basis that the first stage of predation becomes possible: calculated affability. The director does not begin with aggression. Kim Dan’s memory is explicit: (chapter 90) Trust precedes fear, exactly like in the Perrault’s version:

In French, the author presented him even as “acquaintance or friend” (compère le loup). Thus the girl saw no reason to mistrust him. In Jinx, by acting friendly, he singles him out, walks beside him, lingers in his proximity. This is not intimacy, but selection. Grooming here is spatial and temporal: being present, being familiar, being unremarkable.

Intrusion follows gradually. As shown in the corridor panel, the director’s hand appears on Kim Dan’s body while they walk. (chapter 90) The contact is quiet, progressive, and deniable. It blends into routine movement, into institutional normalcy. “After a while, he started getting really handsy… and it only got worse over time.” Each tolerated touch becomes precedent. Boundary erosion is not sudden; it is cumulative.

Then after a while, money is introduced. (chapter 90) In the doctor’s eyes, the predator knew about Kim Dan’s difficult financial situation, then he asked how much he would have to pay to sleep with him. The timing is crucial. The offer does not initiate desire; it tests whether vulnerability can be converted into consent. Payment reframes coercion as transaction, need as availability, and silence as something that can be bought in advance.

Only after this test fails does physical force appear: (chapter 90) Even then, the violence is controlled and incomplete — withdrawn before it can be named unequivocally. The goal is not consummation at all costs, but domination without consequence. What remains is fear, confusion, and isolation rather than proof.

The director’s later language reveals the logic that governs the entire process. (chapter 90) His regret is not moral but tactical — that he did not take Kim Dan “when he had the chance.” Value resides in the moment of breaking resistance, not in the person afterward. Once the prey yields, interest vanishes.

This is why he can later invert the narrative entirely, calling Kim Dan a prostitute,(chapter 90), despite never having paid him, never having offered gifts, dinners, or compensation. The hospital paid Kim Dan’s salary — and the director used his position as a low employee to see himself entitled. Hierarchy replaces money. Shame replaces consent. This is retroactive absolution perfected by institution.

This is also why the animal that best corresponds to him is not the wolf, but the anaconda. The anaconda does not hunt openly or strike once. It selects a vulnerable body, establishes contact that appears harmless, and tightens gradually. Each movement — a smile, a walk, a touch, a question — is small enough to be defended in isolation. Resistance is tested, then reinterpreted. By the time the prey cannot breathe, the struggle already looks self-inflicted. Collapse appears not as violence, but as consequence.

The whole scene makes one thing unmistakable: Kim Dan was not the first. The director’s later language completes the cycle. He speaks of “virgins” (chapter 90) as bodies that are “tough to crack,” with the confidence of repetition. The metaphor is consumptive: a shell broken to reach what is inside, then discarded. Once resistance is broken, interest disappears. This is practiced predation. The hospital is not merely the setting of abuse; it is his hunting territory — a space where authority guarantees access, exhaustion weakens refusal, and legitimacy ensures silence.

The Hospital as a hunting Ground

Predation in Jinx does not occur in isolation. It requires an environment that normalizes asymmetry, absorbs responsibility, and reframes harm as necessity. This environment is not the forest, but the hospital — or more precisely, a network of hospitals that operate as a single ecosystem, organized around different but complementary logics of extraction.

Saero-An Hospital establishes the baseline. (chapter 90) Its name promises renewal (saero) and safety (An), a place where bodies are meant to recover rather than be endangered. This promise is precisely what enables predation to operate without suspicion. The case of exhausted and sexually harassed doc Dan exposes its illusion.

What makes this system particularly dangerous is that Saero-An does not function in isolation. Visual continuity throughout the manhwa strongly implies institutional linkage with Sallim Sacred Heart Hospital. (chapter 21) The juxtaposition of two buildings, the rooftop park, the sterile façade, and above all the near-identical hallways collapse (chapter 90) distance between the spaces. Kim Dan works in corridors that mirror those where his grandmother is treated. (chapter 5) Professional and personal life are folded into the same architectural body. This is not decorative repetition; it signals circulation — of staff, of protocols, of information.

Sallim University Sacred Heart Hospital presents itself as a place of knowledge, care, and moral dedication. Each component of the name performs reassurance. Sallim evokes the household — maintenance, responsibility, everyday care. This would explicate why Shin Okja felt at home there. Sacred Heart invokes devotion and ethical purpose. But it is University that quietly governs the institution’s true orientation. A university hospital is not primarily a space of healing; it is a space of research. Treatment and experimentation coexist, and when they conflict, knowledge production takes precedence.

This semantic structure matters. Patients enter Sallim under the promise of care, yet are absorbed into a research-driven system where their bodies function as material for progress. The divergence is not accidental; it is institutional. What appears as dedication is, in practice, a hierarchy of priorities: data over comfort, results over well-being, advancement over recovery. Harm does not register as cruelty here because it is reframed as contribution.

Kim Miseon embodies this logic. She does not hunt bodies for pleasure, nor does she seek domination openly. Her motives are money and recognition (chapter 5) — professional legitimacy, research success, advancement within a system that rewards results over outcomes. Progress functions as an absolute good, one that authorizes human cost without requiring personal cruelty. Harm is acceptable so long as it produces data.

Her method follows directly from this orientation. Treatment is experimental, protocols are pushed to their limits, and suffering is instrumentalized rather than inflicted. Patients are not targets of desire; they are test cases. Bodies become variables (chapter 21), age and vulnerability become a risk factor, endurance becomes a resource. When the new drug fails and the grandmother deteriorates, the explanation is procedural: side effects, unpredictability, regulatory timelines. Failure is framed as scientific, not ethical. (chapter 47)

Affect is where this becomes most visible. Kim Miseon is repeatedly depicted as cold and eyeless. This is not incidental design. The absence of eyes signals a refusal of relational seeing. She does not look at patients as people, but as files: age, response, tolerance, decline. Emotional labor is therefore displaced onto the family. (chapter 21) Treatment patients “need family support,” she says — a statement that sounds compassionate, but functions as deflection. Psychological care is outsourced; responsibility for deterioration quietly migrates away from the institution (“we”). The setting of her disclosures reinforces this posture. She does not speak in a protected office, but in the hallway — a transitional, impersonal space governed by efficiency rather than care, as if she had nothing to hide. However, by behaving like that, she violated the confidentiality rights. Unlike the Saero-An director, who relies on enclosure and isolation, Kim Miseon operates through openness and institutional flow.

And let’s not forget that as soon as doc Dan had received the terrible news, (chapter 47), shortly after he was suggested a new drug treatment by director Choi Gilseok. (chapter 48) It is no coincidence.

In this sense, Kim Miseon is best understood not as a hunter, but as a poisonous snake. She does not pursue, corner, or constrict. She administers. Her harm is cumulative rather than spectacular, introduced gradually under the guise of treatment. Like venom, it operates through chemistry, delay, and plausibility. By the time consequences appear, causality has blurred. What remains is a weakened body, a revised file, and a new explanation. Painkillers become the narrative alibi: they allow the hospital to downgrade experimental failure into “management,” conceal the existence of an unaffordable authorized drug, and relocate responsibility onto the patient’s non-response (chapter 56)

This is what distinguishes her from the Saero-An director. He acts through proximity and pressure; she operates through protocol. He leaves visible trauma; she leaves deterioration that can always be explained. Poison does not look like violence. It looks like dosage, side effect, tolerance threshold, statistical risk. And when the body finally fails, the snake is already gone.

What emerges is not a monster, but something more dangerous: a practitioner perfectly adapted to a system that rewards distance. She does not violate boundaries spectacularly; she erodes them procedurally. Patients are not assaulted — they are used. And because the harm is administered under the banners of science, care, and progress, it remains difficult to name as violence at all.

The permeability of this ecosystem is confirmed by the circulation of information. Kim Dan’s CV appears on Choi Gilseok’s desk despite the fact that he never sent it. (chapter 46) This is not a coincidence. It is evidence. Personal and professional data move through institutional networks without consent. The same is true of medical information. Choi Gilseok knows about the grandmother’s illness despite having no clinical mandate. (chapter 48) That knowledge could only have reached him through leakage — informal, normalized, unremarked. Bodies are not the only things consumed here; information is too.

Gilseok’s suggestion of an experimental treatment abroad must be read in this context. (chapter 48) He is not the treating physician, nor the researcher, but a relay point within a performance-oriented system where medical knowledge circulates pragmatically. Illness becomes strategy. Vulnerability becomes a problem to be rerouted. Responsibility dissolves across institutions. What links Kim Miseon’s research discourse and Choi Gilseok’s pragmatic suggestions is not coordination, but dependence on the same pharmaceutical horizon. (chapter 48) The oncologist requires industry to produce the drug; the sports director relies on the existence of that drug to gesture toward hope elsewhere. In both cases, treatment is deferred to a system that exists beyond accountability.

And observe that both “main leads” were victims of “drugs”: (chapter 41) (chapter 49) In both cases, harm is delivered chemically, not physically — quietly, indirectly, and in ways that can later be reframed as accident, misuse, or personal failure. This symmetry matters. The same mechanism governs the grandmother’s fate.

Drugs in Jinx do not heal or harm by nature; they transfer responsibility. They allow institutions, predators, and systems to act on bodies while remaining one step removed from blame. What looks like treatment, sabotage, or accident is in fact the same logic at different scales: control without touch, violence without spectacle, predation without teeth.

Light of Hope Hospice completes the ecosystem by revealing its internal fracture. (chapter 56) Unlike Saero-An or Sallim, this space does not extract profit or prestige; it operates under scarcity. Kim Dan works there as a freelancer, not as protected staff. When he collapses, he is advised to take a day off, not sick leave — a telling detail. (chapter 70) It confirms that, even here, labor is contingent, negotiability absent, protection minimal. The vocabulary of care masks the reality of precarity.

The hospice director’s behavior must be read through this constraint. He does blame Kim Dan — but not to preserve power or reputation. His reaction is defensive, not predatory. The institution lacks resources; margins are thin; failure is expensive. (chapter 59) Thus he is happy to let a film crew use his building for a movie. This is why he sometimes works night shifts himself. (chapter 60) His authority does not shield him from exhaustion; it exposes him to it. He enforces discipline because collapse anywhere threatens survival everywhere.

This is where the structure turns back on itself. The director is neither an anaconda nor a poisonous snake. He does not benefit from harm; he absorbs it. (chapter 59) And yet, harm still occurs. Responsibility is displaced not upward, but sideways — onto the most vulnerable worker present. Kim Dan becomes the buffer once again, not because the director is powerful, but because he is trapped. Predation here is no longer driven by appetite, but by attrition.

The ambiguity intensifies with its name. (chapter 56) Light of Hope promises recovery, yet its function is palliative. Even the director refers to it as a hospital (chapter 61), preserving the impression of treatment rather than end-of-life care. This semantic slippage matters. For Joo Jaekyung, who has been treated there himself, the space remains associated with improvement. (chapter 70) He thinks, Hwang Byungchul is treated properly, as he still looks lively and strong. (chapter 71) The champion does not fully register that it is a place at the threshold of death. Care and closure blur. This confusion is not accidental; it mirrors the broader system’s refusal to name limits. By calling a hospice a hospital, death is softened into treatment. By calling resignation progress, responsibility is deferred.

The Grandmother in the woods

Shin Okja’s presence in Jinx initially recalls the grandmother from Little Red Riding Hood. She offers warmth, protection, and reassurance — most visibly through the gray sweater she gives Kim Dan. (chapter 80) But the main resemblance lies elsewhere: she is too trusting. In the fairy tale, the grandmother is eaten because she opens the door to the wolf. She mistakes familiarity for safety, appearance for intent. The danger does not force its way in; it is invited. This logic is crucial, because Shin Okja’s tragedy follows the same pattern — not through a single gesture, but through a lifetime of belief.

Her defining trait is not passivity, but faith in institutions. She believes in research. She believes in doctors. She trusts hospitals as places of knowledge, protection, and moral authority. (chapter 65) For her, medicine is sacred and progress meaningful. (chapter 65) This belief is not naïve in the childish sense; it is aspirational. It is tied to the idea of success, of legitimacy, of having “made it.” And in her mind, that idea has a name: Seoul.

Seoul represents the best life. (chapter 65) It is where competent doctors work, where advanced hospitals stand, where progress happens, where you can earn a lot of money. This belief structures her entire horizon. Corruption, abuse, and institutional predation do not register there, because acknowledging them would mean admitting that the space she has invested with hope is also capable of harm. Within Seoul, institutions are not suspect; they are self-justifying.

This worldview explains the limits of her concern for Kim Dan. She cares for him deeply, but her care is bounded by trust in authority. When he was bullied at school (chapter 57), she did not confront teachers. Her answer was always the same: he still had her. The implication was clear — institutions were there to protect him. To intervene would have meant questioning the very structures she depended on to make sense of the world.

This belief is not naivety; it is survival logic, shaped by poverty, loneliness and dependence. To question institutions would be to remove the last remaining structure she can rely on. This belief explains her blindness better than indifference ever could.

Kim Dan’s exhaustion did not suddenly appear. His pale face, dark circles, and emotional depletion existed long before she names them. (chapter 90) But when she finally does, she frames his condition as something that has been “a bit off lately”, (chapter 65) as if it was recent, temporary, and situational. The wording matters. What has been chronic is compressed into the present. Duration disappears. Suffering becomes recent, temporary, and therefore manageable. This is temporal minimization — not denial of harm, but deferral of its cause.

Crucially, her concern activates only once guilt enters the picture. She explicitly links his suffering to herself: (chapter 57) Only then does his condition become visible. Not because it is new, but because it now implicates her. Before that moment, his endurance could remain unnamed. After it, it must be explained. This is not cruelty; it is belief colliding with responsibility.

This is where money becomes revealing — not as reality, but as interpretation. The grandmother never speaks of debt. The loan is a taboo. This is her biggest fear, thus she raised her voice, when she imagined that doc Dan would pay the new expensive treatment from a loan shark. (chapter 7) This exposes her lack of trust in him, as she views him as too naive and trusting. This is where the irony crystallizes. Financial precarity is erased from discourse because acknowledging it would expose her responsibility. Money resurfaces, when Kim Dan presents an expensive gift. But she doesn’t mind, she is even aware of his lie: (chapter 41) He spends so much for her that he doesn’t have anything left for himself. (chapter 42)

From this emerges a crucial consequence: Kim Dan becomes legible as someone obsessed with money. Not because he is greedy, but because his suffering is interpreted as choice rather than constraint. This is precisely how the sexual predator reads him (chapter 90). It is also how Joo Jaekyung initially misreads him, triggered by the loan and the expensive gift (chapter 51). Different figures arrive at the same conclusion because they are operating within the same interpretive framework — one shaped first and foremost by Shin Okja’s mindset.

Her ignorance and blind trust do not merely endanger her; they shape how Kim Dan is perceived by others. Anyone who approaches her gently, with politeness and authority, passes as safe. (chapter 22)

As long as doctors speak, as long as contracts exist, as long as salaries are paid, the world remains intelligible. Within this logic, danger is not structural — it is personal. Thus she blames doc Dan for his “illness”. Violence comes from people (chapter 5), not systems. And so, she imagines that as long as Kim Dan is working, earning, and paying back what he owes, nothing truly irreversible can happen to either of them. To conclude, what governs Shin Okja’s thinking is a simple equation: payment equals safety. In her mind, debt is a temporary problem with a finite solution. Once money is paid back, danger ends. Order is restored. Life resumes. This belief explains her silence around the loan. To name it would be to admit uncertainty; to erase it is to preserve control.

What she does not know — and cannot imagine — is that the opposite is true. As soon as she left her grandson’s side, payment does not bring protection. It brings exposure. In chapter 1, the reality is immediate: missed interest is answered with physical violence. (chapter 1) Kim Dan is beaten not because he refuses to pay, but because payment structures domination. He accepts the abuse precisely because he believes it is temporary — a punishment that will end once the balance is cleared. Violence is normalized as consequence, not crime. This logic mirrors hers exactly. The more the main lead paid back, the more he was exposed to violence. (chapter 11) Here, he talked back to Heo Manwook, a sign that he was no longer tolerating the loan shark’s intrusion. The result was that he ended up being beaten more violently than before. (chapter 13) This reached its peak, when after sending his whole salary (chapter 16), Heo Manwook intended to rape him. As you can see, the more they got money, the more abusive they became… and all this time, the grandmother has no idea. But the best evidence is when Joo Jaekyung pays the loan in full, the pattern repeats at a higher level. (chapter 17) The debt is erased — and the danger escalates. Kim Dan might become free, but now the target is the champion. He becomes visible. Settling the debt marks him as someone worth targeting, someone who can be extracted from again. (chapter 46) What Shin Okja imagines as closure functions, in reality, as a signal.

This is the crucial inversion she never sees: payment does not end predation; it confirms vulnerability. Her worldview has no space for this possibility. In her mind, systems respond to fairness. Work is rewarded. Debts conclude. Violence belongs to mistakes, not structures. She believes that as long as Kim Dan works, earns, and pays, the world will correct itself.

But while she trusts institutions, she does not recognize that predators often operate through them. In her mental framework, illegitimate violence exists outside the system, not inside it. Even the loan shark is unconsciously processed as a distorted institution — closer to a bank with harsh rules than to a criminal threat. Debt, for her, is governed by terms, repayment, and closure, not by arbitrary violence.

This is why she never considers the police. Not because she condones what happens, but because, in her worldview, the situation does not yet qualify as disorder. As long as payments are made, as long as rules appear to exist, danger remains conceptually containable.

This is why she does not know that the moment she steps away, he is beaten. This is why she cannot imagine that clearing a debt can make things worse. And this is why I am assuming that her faith won’t bend when confronted with reality — it will shatter.

In the end, Shin Okja does believe in money — but not as wealth, and not as power. She believes in money as resolution. As the mechanism through which problems end, dangers recede, and balance is restored. Money, for her, is not corruption; it is order. Payment is imagined as protection. Salary replaces safety. Clearing a debt becomes synonymous with closing a chapter. This is why the loan remains unspeakable: not because it is trivial, but because it threatens her core belief that effort and payment are enough to secure life. What she trusts is not cash, but the promise attached to it: that the world is transactional rather than predatory.

That promise is false.

First Conclusions

What, then, makes a predator in Jinx?

Is it violence or power?
Intent or outcome?
Hunger or indifference?
Necessity or luxury?

The answer is money — not as greed alone, but as an organizing logic. Predation in Jinx is defined by who can extract value while displacing cost: who profits from risk without carrying it, who converts harm into an externality borne by weaker bodies. Violence may or may not occur. Intent can be denied. Hunger can be claimed. None of these are decisive. What is decisive is whether suffering becomes billable, excusable, and transferable.

This is why the three forms of predation constantly overlap. Bodies are consumed for performance, labor is consumed for stability, and vulnerability is consumed for access — and money is what makes each form look “reasonable.” Money turns coercion into transaction, exploitation into opportunity, and bodily damage into career necessity.

Joo Jaekyung’s body generates cash as long as it performs. (chapter 46) Each appearance sustains sponsors, broadcast value, betting volume, and gym economies. This is why he becomes the “biggest target”: not because he is weak, but because he represents the highest return.

Yet his continued success produces a paradox the system cannot tolerate. (chapter 41) A champion who keeps winning cleanly, visibly, and on his own terms becomes difficult to manage. His victories increase his market value, distribute prestige and income to others, and create expectations of legitimacy. At that point, success stops being profitable in a controllable way. It begins to threaten both institutional authority and informal economies that rely on predictability, influence, and narrative control.

This is where illegal gambling logic quietly aligns with institutional logic. Betting markets do not require excellence; they require steerability. (chapter 46) A dominant, credible champion reduces volatility, resists manipulation, and makes engineered outcomes harder to disguise. In such a configuration, continued victory is destabilizing. The problem is no longer his body failing — it is his body refusing to fail on schedule.

The system responds accordingly. Risk is displaced downward, onto the fighter, while control is exercised elsewhere. Medical clearance becomes permission rather than protection. Discipline replaces care. Scandal replaces investigation. When injury can no longer be exploited, reputation becomes the pressure point. The same structure that demanded endurance now demands silence.

This is the contradiction at the heart of Jinx: health was never the priority. Victory was tolerated only as long as it remained manageable. Once success itself threatens control — once it interferes with profit flows, betting structures, or institutional discretion — the champion must be reframed, restrained, or removed.

Predation here is not reactive. It is preventative. In the Korean Manhwa, the most dangerous moment is not collapse — it is independence.

As long as Kim Dan is indebted, he is controllable. As long as Joo Jaekyung fights injured, he is usable. As long as money flows upward, violence remains “contained.” The moment extraction ends, the system reacts.

When Kim Dan pays back the loan, the violence escalates. When he resists, domination intensifies. When the debt disappears entirely, the target does not vanish — it expands. This is the pattern Shin Okja never sees: payment does not end predation; it announces escape. And escape is intolerable to predators.

Revenge does not arise from wounded victims, but from frustrated systems. From loan sharks whose web has been cut.
From institutions whose silence has been broken. From federations whose profit model is threatened. From predators who mistake survival for disobedience.

This is why scandal follows autonomy. This is why credibility is attacked rather than truth clarified. This is why the risk is displaced downward — onto bodies, reputations, careers — while institutions remain intact.

So the final question is not whether Heo Manwook (chapter 46) is violent. The question is: what kind of predator is he?

He does not chase.
He does not roar.
He waits — and retaliates when the web no longer holds.

If the forest of Jinx teaches anything, it is this: collapse is survivable. Independence is not. And once the prey steps outside the web, the predators do not disappear. They reorganize. Revenge, in this landscape, is not the opposite of predation. It is its shadow.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Silent Friend 🫂 in the Blue Light 🧿👮‍♂️

The Hand That Says Everything and Nothing

There is a gesture in episode 90 that unsettles me more than any act of violence, any argument, any explicit rejection. Joo Jaekyung reaches out (chapter 90) — and then he pulls his hand back. (chapter 90) No words are spoken to stop him. His hand is not even pushed away, like doc Dan did it before. (chapter 21) Everything happens in silence. The interruption comes entirely from within.

As readers, we could be tempted to read this as restraint, perhaps even growth. Yet the text itself resists that interpretation. The thought accompanying the gesture is not “I need you”, but “Who am I to ask you to stay?” The question is not directed at Kim Dan. It is directed at himself.

This hand says everything and nothing at once. It reveals a conviction without explaining it, a decision without justification and dialogue. In this moment, Joo Jaekyung no longer sees himself as a person capable of care, protection, or repair. He sees himself as the origin of harm — not merely someone who committed mistakes, but someone whose presence has become synonymous with violence and sin. It is, as if he has absorbed every accusation, every outcome, every imbalance of power, until he no longer distinguishes between what he did and what was done through him. He does not fear becoming abusive; he believes he already embodies it. To conclude, Joo Jaekyung has reached a point where he positions himself as the origin of Kim Dan’s suffering. (chapter 90) In his mind, everything that followed the hiring — the money, the contract, the protection, the conflicts — converges back onto him. Faced with this conclusion, he rewrites the past. The good moments lose their weight. (chapter 26) (chapter 27) (chapter 88) (chapter 89) The help he provided becomes irrelevant. What remains is a single narrative: meeting him caused harm.

To grasp the logic of this withdrawal, it is not enough to examine this scene in isolation. We must also contrast it with earlier scenes, with figures who shaped his thinking, and with patterns of responsibility and shame that predate Kim Dan. Only then does the withdrawn hand reveal its meaning: not respect, not restraint, but the first visible sign of self-erasure and sacrifice — a silence chosen in the belief that presence itself has become a form of wrongdoing.

The Art of Letting Go

What is striking in this scene is not only what Joo Jaekyung does, but what Mingwa deliberately withholds from view. (chapter 90) We never see his face while listening to his thoughts. The panels deny us access to his facial expression (chapter 90), his eyes, any visible articulation of emotion. Instead, we are positioned behind him, aligned with his back and his outstretched hand, while his inner thoughts unfold in silence. Meaning is displaced from facial expression to bodily interruption. Jinx-philes must infer everything from posture, movement, and absence.

The hand he extends is open, hesitant, and trembling. (chapter 90) In Mingwa’s visual language, this matters. An open hand is not an instrument of control but of appeal. It does not seize; it exposes vulnerability. He needs help and support. The tremor is equally significant. This is not the vibration of contained rage or adrenaline before a fight. It is a body that no longer commits itself fully to action. For the first time, Joo Jaekyung’s physical certainty fractures before a gesture is completed.

At that moment, what collapses is not his strength, but his fighting spirit. It becomes obvious, when you compare this gesture (chapter 90) to his old habit, (chapter 61) the clenched fist, when he expressed determination to achieve his goal (bringing back doc Dan or winning a fight). (chapter 81)

Until now, Joo Jaekyung has always responded to crisis through resistance. Even when cornered, he pushed forward—by clenching his fists, facing confrontation (chapter 74), or converting conflict into challenge. (chapter 73) Fighting was not only his profession; it was his primary mode of being in the world. Here, however, the impulse to fight dissolves. (chapter 90) The hand does not harden into a grip. It falters. The will to confront, insist, or endure gives way to resignation.

It is precisely this loss that recalls another scene—not because the gestures are identical, but because the logic of bodily collapse suddenly aligns. In episode 16, Kim Dan does not begin by pleading in front of Heo Manwook, the loan shark. (chapter 16) His hand is first crushed. The antagonist targets the very instrument of his livelihood, injuring what allows him to work, to treat, to survive. Only after this act of violence does Kim Dan cling to his aggressor. (chapter 16) The grasp that follows is not an invitation, but a reaction to damage already inflicted. Resistance has been broken through the body before appeal becomes possible. It symbolizes submission, exactly like in the penthouse.

Mingwa stages this sequence carefully: injury precedes supplication. Kim Dan’s grip is not a sign of agency, but of desperation. He does not extend his hand freely; he clutches because he has been made vulnerable. Survival no longer depends on strength or refusal, but on mercy extracted after harm.

The echo in episode 90 is therefore not visual symmetry, but structural reversal. Joo Jaekyung’s hand has not been crushed. (chapter 90) No external force has targeted his body, his career, or his means of survival. And yet the gesture falters all the same, as the damage has already occurred.

The violence here is not enacted through force, but through language. Heesung’s words on the rooftop —accusations of brutality (chapter 89), unlovability, moral contamination (chapter 89) — do not introduce a foreign judgment. They articulate what Joo Jaekyung already believes about himself. (chapter 84) Deep down, he thinks that he can not be forgiven and even loved. This is precisely why they take hold. Spoken aloud, they acquire the authority of truth. Once internalized, they no longer need to be repeated.

Mingwa makes this internalization visible not through dialogue, but through a remembered image. (chapter 89) The panel does not show Heesung speaking again; it shows Joo Jaekyung’s clenched fist, isolated, rigid, suspended in recollection. This is not the fist of imminent action. It does not precede a strike. It does not convert pain into confrontation. Instead, it freezes.

In earlier scenes, the clenched fist functioned as a promise—to endure, to retaliate, to win. Here, it marks the opposite. The body remembers the accusation, but no longer translates it into resistance. The fist no longer gathers force; it contains it, uselessly. What we witness is not suppressed violence, but the final struggle and imminent collapse of the impulse to fight at all.

This is the decisive shift. The accusation has done its work. Joo Jaekyung does not respond by proving Heesung wrong; he responds by accepting the premise. If violence defines him, then restraint is no longer ethical struggle—it becomes erasure. The fighting spirit does not turn inward. It simply disappears.

Unlike Kim Dan, whose resistance is broken by injury, Joo Jaekyung arrives at surrender through “self-recognition”, another false belief. His hand retreats not because it has been harmed, but because he has accepted the premise that his presence itself is harmful. The violence has migrated inward. It no longer needs an aggressor.

In this sense, Joo Jaekyung mirrors Kim Dan not at the moment of physical injury, but at the moment after domination has succeeded—when resistance feels illegitimate, and appeal itself begins to seem like an act of transgression.

The contrast, however, is just as important as the resemblance. Unlike Kim Dan in episode 16, Joo Jaekyung is not on his knees. (chapter 90) He is not physically lowered, cornered, or framed from above. His body remains upright, broad, and imposing. From the outside, he still appears strong, yet deep down, he is falling apart. The withdrawal of the hand is not restraint, but surrender. A strong body remains standing while the will to fight quietly disappears.

What deepens the tragedy of this moment is that Kim Dan does not witness the champion’s action. (chapter 90) His gaze drifts elsewhere, toward the teddy bear. He is oblivious to the trembling, the hesitation, or the aborted appeal. Nor does he meet Joo Jaekyung’s eyes—because the eyes are never shown. The scene is structured around a double absence: a plea that is never fully expressed, and a witness who never sees it. To conclude, the physical therapist has no idea about the inner turmoil of his fated lover.

After revealing his past with the perverted hospital director, Kim Dan had tried to calm Joo Jaekyung by touching his arm , (chapter 90) offering reassurance. That attempt failed, not because Kim Dan lacked care, but because reassurance can only reach someone who is still willing to fight for their place. Joo Jaekyung is no longer asking how to endure. He is asking whether he should exist in this space at all.

What blocks Kim Dan’s words from reaching him is not their content, but the position from which they are received. Joo Jaekyung hears them through a familiar filter — one that reduces Kim Dan to someone who must be protected from himself. In doing so, he unconsciously aligns himself with the very figures who shaped Kim Dan’s silence: the grandmother who decided for him (chapter 65), and Heesung who dismissed his agency (chapter 89) under the guise of concern.

Yet Kim Dan’s words are neither naïve nor dependent. He states them clearly: the arrangement was consensual; the price was his to set; what followed was his responsibility. He does not ask to be spared, corrected, or guided. He asserts authorship over his own choices. (chapter 90) But this assertion cannot be heard by someone who has already decided that Kim Dan must be shielded — even from himself.

The rooftop scene before that night exposes the same logic from another angle. Heesung, too, frames Kim Dan as “too nice for his own good,” implying that he does not know what is right for him, and that any involvement with Joo Jaekyung must therefore be exploitation. In both cases, concern becomes a form of erasure. Kim Dan’s agency is acknowledged in words (chapter 65), but denied in structure.

Faced with this, Joo Jaekyung does not challenge Kim Dan’s claim. (chapter 90) He does something more drastic: he removes himself. If Kim Dan cannot be recognized as an equal subject capable of choosing him, then the only ethical position left, in Joo Jaekyung’s mind, is disappearance. By refusing to claim a right, Joo Jaekyung does return choice to Kim Dan. But he does so by removing himself from the field of choice altogether. There is no negotiation. What appears as liberation is inseparable from abandonment, because it is grounded not in trust, but in the belief that his presence is illegitimate.

This is why the scene cannot be read as growth. It marks the moment when the champion loses the impulse that once defined him. The withdrawal of the hand is not restraint, but surrender. A strong body remains standing while the will to fight quietly disappears. At this point, the language of the jinx quietly inverts. Earlier, Joo Jaekyung spoke of it as something he had—a misfortune attached to him (chapter 2), an external curse that followed his steps. Here, that distinction collapses. He no longer experiences the jinx as an event or condition, but as an identity. He does not fear what might happen because of him; he accepts that he himself is what causes harm. The curse is no longer something he carries. It is something he has become. Once internalized in this way, it no longer requires rituals to contain it. (chapter 75) Practices that once functioned as talismans—gestures meant to ward off misfortune or secure victory—lose their meaning. (chapter 75) What collapses is not only belief in luck, but belief in the necessity of striving at all.

A Space Marked by Collapse

This collapse does not occur in a neutral space. (chapter 90) The room in which Joo Jaekyung withdraws his hand is not simply Kim Dan’s bedroom, nor a private refuge removed from the world. It is a place already marked by interruption, illness, and loss. Again and again, this room has functioned as a site where bodies fail, where care becomes urgent, and where stability quietly dissolves. Fainting, sleeplessness, sickness, drinking, and disappearance have all passed through it. Long before episode 90, this space had been associated not with recovery, but with moments when endurance gives way and something must be endured instead. What unfolds here does not begin with the withdrawn hand. The room has been preparing it all along.

The pattern begins early. In episode 10 8episode 10), Kim Dan wakes up there after drinking excessively, confused why he is sleeping in the penthouse. He doesn’t know that the night before in his drunkenness, his thoughts were turning toward his grandmother. He was mistaking the athlete for his relative. (chapter 10) He feared getting abandoned. When the doctor realized his whereabouts, he imagined that he had sex with the champion. As you can see, the bedroom is strongly intertwined with longing and sin, where consciousness returns only after collapse. This association deepens in episode 20, when sexual intimacy is immediately followed by a phone call announcing his grandmother’s critical condition. (chapter 20) Pleasure and threat coexist in the same space, binding the room to the anticipation of loss.

Later, in episode 29, Kim Dan wakes up there after fainting (chapter 29), his body once again giving way under accumulated strain. The room is no longer merely where exhaustion manifests; it is where it becomes undeniable. In episode 61, the association shifts again: Joo Jaekyung comes to the room seeking sex, but Kim Dan is unwell, unable to voice his own thoughts, unable to refuse. (chapter 61) Illness interrupts desire, and the room marks the moment where agency falters.

The most alarming incident occurs when Kim Dan sleepwalks and nearly falls from the railing (chapter 79). Once more, it is this room that frames the danger. (chapter 79) The body moves without consciousness, hovering at the edge between presence and disappearance. The room becomes a liminal space where life is not actively threatened by violence, but quietly endangered by exhaustion and dissociation (suicidal thoughts).

This accumulation reaches a turning point in episode 53, after Kim Dan leaves. Joo Jaekyung enters the now deserted room and finds the jacket left behind. (chapter 53) The object becomes a trace of absence, and the room transforms into a container of loss. Standing by the window, Joo Jaekyung is portrayed without eyes. (chapter 53) The visual choice is crucial: it does not indicate blindness in a literal sense, but an inability to see forward, to orient himself. He is present in the room, but detached from direction and purpose. This scene announces the falling apart of the athlete.

What follows does not mean that Joo Jaekyung begins to deteriorate inside this room. On the contrary. After Kim Dan’s departure, he avoids it. (chapter 55) The space is sealed off, preserved, treated almost as a forbidden zone. The cleaning staff is not allowed to enter. Nothing is moved, corrected, or neutralized. The room becomes a reliquary rather than a dwelling — a place frozen in the moment of loss. Joo Jaekyung does not confront what happened there; he keeps it intact, untouched, and therefore unresolved. At the same time, he imagines that avoiding that place will help him to forget doc Dan’s gaze and face.

Therefore it is logical that his collapse unfolds elsewhere. The displacement is visible. In episode 53, the jacket is thrown in the direction of the couch. (chapter 53) (chapter 53) In episode 54, wine bottles begin to accumulate beside the couch (chapter 54) in his own bedroom leaving a huge red wine stain on the carpet. (chapter 55) And in episode 90, the teddy bear now rests on the couch in Kim Dan’s room (chapter 90) — occupying the very place toward which the jacket once flew. Across these scenes, the hand and couch emerge as a recurring site of impact, exhaustion, and surrender. It is where bodies fall, where frustration lands, where the weight of what cannot be said is deposited. One detail caught my attention: because they are not sitting on the couch, the main leads are discussing together. They are able to face each other and as such to listen to each other. (chapter 90) Their respective position in this room reminded me of their previous arguments. (chapter 45) (chapter 51) (chapter 61) (chapter 64) Only when they would truly face each other, they would be more honest and expose their thoughts and emotions. As soon as there is a table, a bed or a couch, I detected some restrain and silence. In other words, the presence of the teddy bear and the couch in that scene explains why Kim Dan is silent and passive after their conversation. He is definitely remembering the day and conversation at the amusement park. (chapter 90) I am hoping that he finally talks about his past and childhood in the next chapter. But honestly, I am a little skeptical, as doc Dan has no idea how Joo Jaekyung suffered, while he was away (loss of money and contracts, members, reproaches from Potato and Park Namwook, the slap, no one showed a true concern for his well-being). They all expected him to return to his old self and become a champion again. He only learned recently that members had abandoned him. (chapter 88) On the other hand, it is about time that doc Dan becomes proactive so that they finally become a real team.

But let’s return our attention to the room. (chapter 90) The latter itself remains suspended, untrespassed. (chapter 55) But the logic it contains spreads. What cannot be processed there resurfaces around the couch: drinking replaces training; avoidance replaces discipline; headaches replace resolve. Insomnia leads to inertia and passivity. Joo Jaekyung does not resign, and he does not openly collapse. Yet something essential fractures. Here, the fighter remains active in form, but disengaged in spirit. His depression does not announce itself through breakdown, but through relocation — from the preserved space of loss to the furniture that absorbs its aftermath.It is a space where suffering does not explode but accumulates, where the narrative repeatedly returns to show that unwell-being is not an exception, but a condition that has been waiting to be acknowledged.

Within The Silent Friend in the Blue Light, this room becomes one of depression’s many disguises: familiar, enclosed, outwardly calm, yet saturated with vulnerability. It does not announce danger. It hosts it quietly.

The Hidden Mirror of Sacrifice

What emerges after this displacement is not merely grief, but inversion. Without naming it, the narrative stages a quiet exchange of positions. Joo Jaekyung begins to occupy the place Kim Dan once held — not in circumstance, but in moral posture. The champion who once advanced through force, certainty, and entitlement now adopts the logic of self-erasure (chapter 90) that defined the doctor’s earlier life.

For a long time, Kim Dan lived under the conviction that his presence imposed a burden. He apologized (chapter 79) for everything. He was to blame for everything. (chapter 37) He endured before being asked. He accepted harm as a condition of acceptance and staying. His silence was not passivity, but a learned ethics: if I ask for less, if I take up less space, if I disappear when necessary, others, in particular his grandmother, might be spared. (chapter 53) That posture did not originate with Joo Jaekyung. It preceded him. It was shaped by debt, obligation, omission, and by figures who decided on Kim Dan’s behalf what he could endure and what he deserved.

In episode 90, that posture reappears — but it is no longer Kim Dan’s. Joo Jaekyung does not lash out. (chapter 90) He does not argue. He does not demand. Instead, he blames himself for everything, thus he withdraws. He refuses to claim a right. He positions himself as the problem that must be removed so that something better might follow. (chapter 53) This is the same moral calculus Kim Dan once applied to himself: the belief that care becomes ethical only when it is accompanied by sacrifice, and that love, if it exists at all, must be proven through disappearance. The only difference is that he can not apologize as his existence has become the synonym of wrongdoing. Thus Kim Dan can not hear the distress from his “loved one”.

The mirroring is not obvious, because the bodies do not look alike. Kim Dan’s earlier suffering was visible: exhaustion, malnourishment, fainting, tears. Joo Jaekyung’s is not. He stopped crying a long time ago. (chapter 74) He remains upright. His posture holds. Yet, he is now voiceless exactly like the physical therapist in the past. From the outside, he still appears powerful, but the loss of cry or sound indicates loss of agency and choice. But structurally, the positions have reversed. The one who once endured now asserts authorship over his choices. (chapter 90) The one who once claimed authority now doubts his right to remain.

This inversion does not arise in a vacuum. It is prepared by encounters with figures who mistake projection for truth. Both Heesung (chapter 89) and the green-haired man (chapter 42) operate through the same mechanism: they reduce complexity into a single verdict. Like false mirrors, they collapse months into moments, gestures into essence, and relationships into accusations. They speak as if they own the truth — not because they see clearly, but because jealousy and greed demand certainty. Hence they are connected to the color green. Their words are not reflective (chapter 89); they are consumptive.

As I argued in my earlier essay on deceptive mirrors, the green-haired man is not a mirror at all, but a monster revealed by one. He does not reflect; he distorts. Kim Dan, by contrast, functions as the Ungaikyō — the mirror beyond the clouds — which does not invent monstrosity, but exposes it. In his presence, hidden motives surface: envy, entitlement, moral resentment. This is why certain figures cannot bear his gaze, and why others attempt to shatter the reflection by attacking the one who stands beside him.

This reversal also explains why Kim Dan cannot recognize what is happening. (chapter 90) He continues to address Joo Jaekyung as an athlete, a patient, a man who needs reassurance. He speaks clearly, claims responsibility, and insists on consent. He does everything that would have saved him in the past. But those words reach someone who is no longer negotiating endurance. Joo Jaekyung is not asking how to stay. He has already concluded that by keeping him by his side is wrong.

Here lies the fatal misalignment: because Joo Jaekyung possesses such a damaged self-image, he interprets his ability to expose corruption as proof that he belongs to it. He detects the hospital director’s moral rot instantly (chapter 90) — not because he shares it, but because the mirror he has become reveals it. Yet instead of recognizing this capacity as ethical clarity, he mistakes it for contamination. He equates himself with the very figures whose cruelty is laid bare in his presence. However, he is making a huge mistake, he is accepting this projection forgetting that he had it all wrong for one reason: (chapter 90) During their first meeting, the “hamster” had grabbed his “anaconda”. (chapter 1) Such a gesture could be interpreted as a seduction, and don’t forget that the previous physical therapist had rubbed him the wrong way: (chapter 1) Finally, observe that after this incident, Joo Jaekyung was looking at the embarrassed doc Dan (chapter 56) and thinking that they could have fun together in bed. (chapter 56) So doc Dan has his share of responsibility in the champion’s misjudgment.

In this sense, the mirror remains hidden because it reflects an earlier version of Kim Dan that the latter himself has begun to leave behind. That’s why he is looking at the teddy bear. (chapter 90) Earlier, in Paris, Kim Dan took its hand and squeezed it, drawing steadiness from what it represented rather than from struggle. (chapter 84) This gesture symbolized their reconciliation in the end, (chapter 84) the return of trust and faith in the “champion”. What Joo Jaekyung mirrors is not who the doctor is now, but who he once had to be in order to survive. The tragedy lies precisely there: the champion adopts a posture the doctor has already outgrown thanks to him.

And as with all mirrors in this story, the reflection is imperfect. Joo Jaekyung’s withdrawal is framed as ethics, not necessity. He believes he is restoring balance by removing himself. But this belief rests on the same flawed premise that once governed Kim Dan’s silence — that one person can decide alone what harm is, and who must vanish to prevent it. The mirror reveals continuity, not resolution.

What appears as role reversal is therefore also a warning. When responsibility becomes indistinguishable from self-removal, the structure of harm does not disappear; it simply changes hands.

The Inherited Horizon (Living for Others)

Joo Jaekyung’s collapse and resignation in episode 90 are not a new development. (chapter 90) It is the reactivation of an older logic — one learned long before Kim Dan entered his life. What surfaces that night is not a crisis born of romance, but the return of a childhood structure in which existence is justified only through sacrifice, and value is always deferred to someone else’s future.

From the beginning, Joo Jaekyung was never taught how to live for himself. Though he was initially encouraged to fight for himself (earning money) (chapter 72), the reality was that he longed for a home, which he came to associate with his mother. Thus over the phone, he promised to become strong (chapter 72) and earn a lot of money so that his mother could return home. As you can see, fighting was strongly intertwined with his mother and his longing for a family.

His entire horizon is shaped by adults who frame life as endurance in service of others. His father beats him and argues with him by asking for respect. (chapter 72), as if the boy’s role was to validate the father’s existence. Joo Jaewoong does not ask his son what he wants (chapter 73); he mocks his ambition (chapter 73) and reduces his dream to delusion. Yet even in conflict, Joo Jaekyung seeks recognition. (chapter 73) He does not reject his father’s gaze — he argues within it, hoping to prove him wrong through success. (chapter 73) As you can see, his life is always focused on the future, on one goal and as such one person: the mother, then the father.

Later, Hwang Byungchul reinforces the same structure. He offers MMA fighting not as a way to find joy or self-discovery, but as a means to “honor his mother’s sacrifice” (chapter 74) He warns against becoming like the father, to change for the sake of his own mother (chapter 74), not by encouraging freedom, but by replacing one obligation with another: win, endure, don’t disgrace the dead. Many years later, he encourages him to change his mind-set, because he could end up alone. (chapter 75) For the first time, it is no longer about winning or enduring. (chapter 75) However, observe how the main lead reacts to this well-meant advice: (chapter 75) He starts visualizing Doc Dan as his goal. It is once again focused on one person and future-oriented.

Striking is that the grandmother in Kim Dan’s life articulates the same ethic from another angle. Kim Dan stays for her sake. (chapter 65) He grows up too fast for her sake. (chapter 65) He suppresses desire, health, and rest for her sake. The moral lesson is identical: if your presence risks harm, reduce yourself; if your absence protects others, endure it.

This is the philosophy Joo Jaekyung inherits — and internalizes. This observation leads me to the following conclusion: the MMA fighters treats doc Dan the same way than doc Dan took care of Shin Okja. They both prioritize the well-being of a loved one over themselves. And could this happen? One might say that it is because of the grandmother’s request (chapter 65), because she did the same in the past with doc Dan: (chapter 53), but the truth is that this reversal of position started taking place, the moment the athlete paid the loan. It is no coincidence that the new contract is based on the debts. (Chapter 77) This means, the debts bring the terrible mind-set to the surface.

The night of episode 74 crystalizes this structure. Joo Jaekyung wins a title, believing victory might finally justify his sacrifices. Instead, he loses both parents at once: his father through death, his mother through abandonment. (chapter 74) The latter justifies her betrayal by saying that he is too late, as he is already too old. The promise that sustained him collapses. Winning no longer guarantees return. The future he fought for vanishes. And in the penthouse, we have the same thought again: (chapter 90)

Episode 90 repeats this pattern with devastating precision. Once again, Joo Jaekyung believes that his presence is harmful. Once again, he concludes that removal is ethical. Once again, he lives for someone else’s sake — this time Kim Dan’s. He withdraws not out of desire, but out of obligation. He does not ask what doc Dan wants; he questions himself whether he has the right to keep him by his side. But the gesture represents the answer: He has no right to hope that doc Dan will still live by his side.

Crucially, this is not about winning anymore. The logic of victory has already collapsed. Joo Jaekyung no longer believes that success can restore what was lost. He has internalized the jinx not as misfortune, but as identity. In his mind, Kim Dan has every reason to leave — not because Joo Jaekyung failed, but because he is the failure.

This is why episode 90 does not mirror Kim Dan’s past alone. It repeats Joo Jaekyung’s own childhood logic.

  • In episode 73, he claims to fight in order to escape the house.
  • In episode 74, he learns that victory costs him everything.
  • In episode 90, he stops fighting — because fighting no longer promises return.

The core belief remains unchanged: if you cannot guarantee a good outcome, remove yourself. The hand gesture symbolizes the loss of hope in the end. (chapter 90)

That belief once governed Kim Dan’s life. Now, it governs Joo Jaekyung’s. The tragedy is not that he lets go — but that he does so for the same reason he once fought: not for himself, but to justify his existence through sacrifice. He has never been taught another way to live. Heesung’s words poison him precisely because they echo this logic, arriving at the moment when he had just begun to enjoy life with Kim Dan.

The Silent Friend

At first glance, one might search for the silent friend in the room itself — perhaps in the teddy bear, quietly placed on the sofa where the jacket almost once landed. (chapter 90) The object evokes childhood, comfort, and a softened version of intimacy. It almost invites the idea that this silent presence could be something benign: a substitute for words, a witness that does not judge.

However, with silent friend I am referring to something else. It did not appear in episode 90. It has been there all along. Long before Kim Dan entered his life, Joo Jaekyung was already living with an unnamed mental burden — one he never recognized as such.

It is guilt and self-loathing (chapter 54) — longstanding, cumulative, and corrosive. (chapter 90) And these two “friends” return during that night. What inhabits the room in episode 90 is not nostalgia, nor an unprocessed sadness that merely needs to be named. The same shame that has structured his life since childhood resurfaces here, stripped of all justifications. Joo Jaekyung is not suffering because he feels abandoned in the present. He is suffering because he believes himself to be the reason others leave. (chapter 90) This conviction predates Kim Dan. It is rooted in the unresolved grief surrounding his father’s death, the mother’s disappearance, and the belief that he arrived too late — that he failed at the very moment success was supposed to redeem everything. That night taught him a lesson he never unlearned: love is fragile, and your existence may be what destroys it. So the childhood traumas led him to develop depression, the silent friend.

The clearest indication is his own confession in episode 29. (chapter 29) He cannot sleep. He cannot relax. His body remains permanently alert because, in his words, he could “be killed” at any moment. (chapter 29) For him, this is not a symptom. It is simply part of being a fighter. Insomnia is normalized, rationalized, and dismissed as a professional hazard. Yet his listener immediately senses otherwise.

Kim Dan does not react with admiration or resignation. He worries. He asks himself how he could help. (chapter 29) He understands that this state is unsustainable — that it is only a matter of time before something gives way. What Joo Jaekyung treats as discipline, Kim Dan recognizes as danger.

This asymmetry matters. It reveals something essential: the champion cannot perceive his own depression, while the doctor can perceive it in others. That is precisely why Kim Dan becomes its mirror.

When Kim Dan later decides to leave, the gesture reads as abandonment — even betrayal. But the motivation is the opposite. Blinded by his own low self-esteem, he believes he has failed as a physical therapist. He takes Joo Jaekyung’s harsh words literally and imagines that if he removes himself, the athlete will remain strong. The last memory he carries with him is not intimacy, but rejection. (chapter 53) In his mind, he is obeying a command.

And yet, Kim Dan never truly leaves. He remains present through memory. The abandoned jacket in episode 53 is not a simple object. It becomes the first catalyst. Joo Jaekyung interprets it as rejection, as loss of status — no longer a fan, no longer part of his team. He throws it away in anger. (chapter 53) Read superficially, this looks like karmic reversal for his cruelty on his birthday. (chapter 90) But that explanation is insufficient. What actually begins after is grief and recognition.

The memories associated with Kim Dan do not punish Joo Jaekyung — they unsettle him. They force him to confront something he has never allowed himself to name: that he is unhappy, unmoored, and profoundly insecure. He has never been at peace with himself. He has never known how to live outside of obligation and performance. This is why he has never truly lived.

This is where my earlier interpretation deepens rather than changes. After season one, the “hamster” functioned as a personification of the champion’s jinx. (chapter 54) Now the logic sharpens: Kim Dan does not merely embody bad luck. He embodies the champion’s mental state — depression, trauma, and chronic self-devaluation. He becomes the surface onto which Joo Jaekyung’s inner instability is projected.

This insight is inseparable from depressive realism.

What struck me when I first encountered this concept was how closely it resembled the main leads’ thinking. The absence of “pink-tinted glasses,” the accurate — sometimes brutally accurate — assessment of control, responsibility, and limitation. Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung does not exaggerate hope. He minimizes it. And paradoxically, this allows Joo Jaekyung to justify not changing. His arguments in episode 29 are coherent, logical, and devastatingly persuasive. Kim Dan ends up convinced that the champion should not rest, should not slow down, should not alter course. (chapter 29) And now, in episode 90, Jinx-philes can sense that the athlete is wearing the glasses “depressive realism” once again, where everything seems so true. He recalls all his misdeeds and can only perceive himself as the source of unhappiness for doc Dan. And like mentioned above, during that night, he is just only recalling his wrongdoings. He is overlooking that thanks to him, Doc Dan’s mental and physical conditions (chapter 89) improved, that he could make doc Dan smile. Meeting the hospital director made him see everything in a bad light. As you can see, he still has a black and white mentality. However, the truth is that right from the start, the champion had not just been a terrible person. He could be generous, help someone in need. (chapter 17) He saved doc Dan’s life twice. (chapter 59) He is reducing everything to one single moment and emotion: pain. And his reasoning is resembling a lot to the grandmother‘s: (chapter 65) The only difference is that the grandmother doesn’t express guilt or responsibility for doc Dan’s suffering. For her, it is fate, as she is not responsible for the doctor’s childhood. (chapter 65)

Depression thus becomes mutually reinforcing — invisible to the one who carries it, hyper-visible to the one who mirrors it.

This is why the chapter numbers ending in 9 matter.

  • 19 introduces absence and the first rupture linked to family and death. (chapter 19) This image announces the vanishing of the parents.
  • 29 stages bodily collapse and unrecognized danger.
  • 59 flirts with disappearance through dissociation. Back then, the puppy died leading doc Dan to walk into the ocean.
  • 69 , when Joo Jaekyung imagines that doc Dan has once again fallen into the ocean and fears to lose him.
  • 79 when Joo Jaekyung stops him from falling. (chapter 79) gestures toward falling, both physically and psychologically.

None of these chapters announce suicide. But all of them circle it. They trace the gravitational field of depression — the slow erosion of self-preservation, the normalization of exhaustion, the quiet flirtation with vanishing. However, observe that in episode 89, the notion “suicide” is brought up for the first time by Choi Heesung. (chapter 89) Secondly, he is the only one referring to mental illness: (chapter 89): crazy, egomaniac. As you can see, the last arc linked to the number 9 seems to be focusing on depression and mental issues. Joo Jaekyung’s mental state as an athlete was never treated so far by doctors. And now, you understand my interpretation. The celebrity is now placed in the same situation than the physical therapist for another reason: it is to confront both men with their self-loathing and childhood traumas.

Episode 54 ( 54 = 5+4= 9) is the pivotal transfer point. It is the moment when Jinx-philes are confronted with reality, his mental issues and their origins. No wonder, why he started drinking. (chapter 54)

The dream seals this logic. Joo Jaekyung does not dream himself crying. He dreams Kim Dan crying. (chapter 54) The image functions as guilt, interrogation, and reflection all at once. It asks: Is he still suffering because of me? But the champion chose back then to read it differently: I am in pain because of you. Thus he tried to find a new “toy” shortly after. But it also reveals something more disturbing: those tears are the champion’s own. He feels them — but cannot express them.

He cannot cry because vulnerability still reads as danger. This is why episode 90 is so alarming.

The silent friend — depression, guilt, self-loathing — no longer needs a proxy. Joo Jaekyung internalizes it fully. He no longer misrecognizes it as insomnia or discipline. He recognizes himself as the problem. The jinx is no longer something that follows him. It is something he has become. But in order to be freed from this immense weight, he needs the support of a friend and a family.

And this is where the unspoken risk emerges. So far, Joo Jaekyung has never spoken about Kim Dan’s suicidal episodes. He has never named them. (chapter 78) Now, he is blaming himself for everything — and the narrative quietly aligns him with the same numbers, the same silences, the same logic of disappearance.

This does not mean he is suicidal. But it means the silent friend has returned — no longer mirrored, no longer shared, no longer displaced. And now, look at his eyes once again, (chapter 90) you will notice the redness, a sign that until that night, he is still suffering from insomnia. His insomnia and depression were never treated, and he took care of doc Dan all this time. He never rested properly, especially that there is another match around the corner.

And this belief — more than sadness, more than despair — is what makes episode 90 so dangerous. It marks the point where suffering no longer seeks relief, and responsibility turns inward, demanding disappearance as proof of care. But someone needs to notice how fragile Joo Jaekyung is. But why did the author choose to switch the character’s positions? Doc Dan assumes that during his absence, nothing changed in the athlete’s life. But the reality is that Joo Jaekyung lost contracts (chapter 54), while he tells the opposite to his partner. (chapter 80) Secondly, he doesn’t know how the champion was blamed for everything and was treated by the other members of Team Black: (chapter 52) No one listened to his unwell-being, they rather silenced him. They showed no support and didn’t take care of him. Thus later the athlete started drinking. The physical therapist has no idea what Potato heard either: (chapter 52) At the same time, I am suspecting that Mingwa is putting doc Dan in a similar situation than in the past, so that repressed memories about the parents will come to the surface. Keep in mind that the athlete is actually mirroring the parents’ behavior (abandonment and sacrifice as a sign of love and respect). Thus the teddy bear is placed on the couch and the physical therapist is looking at it. (chapter 21) A teddy bear was present in his childhood, until it vanished. (chapter 19) Let’s not forget that in episode 90, money plays a huge role and so far, the champion still thinks, the debts truly belong to the physical therapist. Finally, I believe that both could connect emotionally, when they talk about their respective past. In my eyes, it is now Doc Dan’s turn to assist Joo Jaekyung… by offering his hand as a friend. (chapter 87)

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Beginning 🧶 of the End ⛓️‍💥❄️

Sorry for the delay, but I am getting surged soon, thus I was busy preparing lessons for the time during my absence.

The Beginning of the End

The audience sensed it before it could fully articulate why: Jinx is nearing an irreversible threshold. Not an ending yet, not a climax in the conventional sense, but a point beyond which the story cannot return to its original configuration. (chapter 89) Episode 89 does not rely on spectacle, confrontation, or confession. Instead, it performs something far more unsettling. It turns back toward the beginning (chapter 89) and begins to unravel what was once deliberately sealed.

What makes this episode feel decisive is not merely a rearrangement of power, but the return of elements that were present from the very first chapter —elements whose meanings were never in doubt, yet whose consequences were never allowed to surface. (chapter 1) At the start of Jinx, the readers were not ignorant. We knew that Kim Dan had been sexually harassed. (chapter 1) We knew there was a witness. We knew that what happened was not ambiguous in moral terms.

What was ambiguous was power.

A hospital director fired Kim Dan not because the truth was unclear, but precisely because it was clear—and dangerous. Using institutional authority, he covered the scandal, protected himself, and quietly ensured that Kim Dan would never be able to work as physical therapist and even speak again. (chapter 1) The outcome was not accidental, but Kim Dan didn’t experience it as a calculated purge or a conspiracy that must be fought. He accepted the loss of his job almost as a given, even as he recognized the injustice of it. What unsettled him was not the fear that others would disbelieve him, but the realization that responsibility stopped with him. He lost a prestigious hospital position and the professional future attached to it, while the hospital director faced no consequence at all. Kim Dan did not protest or seek redress; instead, he turned his attention inward, wondering what was said about him afterward, in rooms or institutes he was not allowed to enter. The truth was known, yet it changed nothing, because Kim Dan was silenced. No one listened to him or defended him, while the perpetrator alone was given the authority to determine the truth. The witness stayed silent, the institution spoke elsewhere, and Kim Dan was removed from his own story. And that’s how the asymmetry became something he quietly carried as his own burden.

This is why Episode 89 does not feel like escalation—it feels like unsealing.

The return of the perverted hospital director (chapter 1) is not a revelation of new information. It is the resurfacing of a figure who once proved that truth alone was insufficient. His reappearance signals that what was buried at the beginning of the story—harassment, witness, cover-up, professional erasure—is no longer content to remain inert. The silence that once protected the hospital director is beginning to fray, unwinding slowly, like a gift ribbon pulled loose thread by thread. What was known but unspeakable is approaching exposure not through confession, but through loss of insulation.

This return is mirrored by another, quieter but equally significant absence: the grandmother.

In Episode 89, she is no longer shown directly. (chapter 89) Instead, the narrative offers a bird’s-eye view of the hospice Light of Hope as Joo Jaekyung’s car leaves the parking lot. The implication is unmistakable. Her death is imminent. But just as importantly, she is transitioning from presence to spectral force—no longer intervening, no longer negotiating, but lingering over the narrative as memory and obligation.

This, too, echoes the beginning of Jinx. (chapter 1) Readers did not meet the grandmother until Episode 5. (chapter 5) Before that, her existence was inferred rather than seen: through debt, through responsibility, through the ruined house Kim Dan inhabited. Absence structured the story before presence ever did. The grandmother was a force long before she was a character.

Now the movement reverses. Presence recedes back into absence. But unlike in the beginning, Kim Dan’s life is no longer centered on her care. That responsibility has been entrusted elsewhere, and her absence no longer governs his choices. In Episode 89, the hospice is no longer framed as a home, but as a stop along the way. (chapter 89) When Joo Jaekyung speaks of “the way home,” (chapter 89) and Kim Dan repeats the phrase without hesitation, the shift is unmistakable. Home has been reassigned. It is no longer the place where Kim Dan endures obligation or where his grandmother is (chapter 56), but the place where he lives in the present: the penthouse. The grandmother’s influence has not vanished; yet it has been reduced to a short visit, while he spends time with his fated partner a long time on the road. Her absence no longer anchors him to a life of quiet survival. He is now enjoying life, hence he is seen smiling and talking informal to the athlete. (chapter 89)

This mirroring is not cosmetic. It is structural. The story returns to the conditions of its origin—sexual violence handled institutionally, professional precarity (chapter 1), unseen decisions made about Kim Dan without his consent (chapter 1) — but it does so in a transformed landscape. (chapter 89) Debts have been paid. Contracts are finite. A witness exists, though he doesn’t believe in the “angel”. (chapter 89) Kim Dan is no longer isolated in his knowledge, nor alone in bearing its consequences. Joo Jaekyung detected the presence of a “predator”. (chapter 89)

That is why Episode 89 feels like the beginning of the end. Not because everything is resolved, but because the story has reached the point where truth no longer needs to beg for permission to exist. What was once survivable only through silence can now be named, contested, and reclaimed.

By folding the opening of Jinx back into its present, the author signals that the love story between Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung is approaching its final test. No longer a story of endurance under constraint, it is becoming a story about emancipation under scrutiny—about what happens when love, guilt, responsibility, and institutional memory are finally forced into the same frame, by those who were once excluded from it.

The Beginning of the End is not an announcement of tragedy. It is the moment when the story turns back on itself and says: now the truth can move.

Seeing Is Not Knowing

Episode 89 does not introduce this logic; it exposes it by repetition. From the very first chapter, Joo Jaekyung’s relationship with his former physical therapist already functioned as a negative prefiguration of Kim Dan’s own trajectory. (chapter 1) The readers never saw what caused the unknown therapist’s departure. Instead, the incident is relayed second-hand, through Park Namwook’s narration—an account that reduces the event to temperament, friction, and inevitability. The physical therapist is said to have “rubbed him the wrong way.” An incident occurred and the athlete was exposed as the problem. The job was framed as undesirable. The departure was normalized.

Crucially, Joo Jaekyung accepted this explanation without investigation. He was surprised that the therapist quit (chapter 1), but he did not question the narrative offered to him. He never tried to justify his own action either. Park Namwook, as manager, occupied the position of authority: the one who explained, interpreted, and closed the case. He never checked the facts, like for example “rubbing him the wrong way”. He acted as the prosecutor, judge and lawyer at the same time. What happened before remained unseen, and therefore unexamined. The truth did not need to be falsified; it only needed to be summarized.

Crucially, the manager also treated resignation as resolution. Once the physical therapist left, the problem appeared solved. Replacement substituted for accountability, and the consequences of this closure were never considered. The difficulty in filling the position (chapter 1), the reluctance of applicants, and the need to recruit Kim Dan through informal channels all suggested that something else had already been circulating: a reputation formed in absence, not through evidence.

Like Kim Dan after him, Joo Jaekyung is first not confronted with accusations (chapter 9), explanations, and silence. Only after the “hamster’s arrival”, the athlete is gradually exposed to gossip, badmouthing (chapter 47) and exclusion. This reached its peak with the famous slap at the hospital. (chapter 52) It shows that like doc Dan, the celebrity bears the effects of a narrative he did not author, one that no longer requires verification and questioning because it has already been administratively settled.

Episode 89 reactivates this same structure—but from another angle.

Heesung believes he knows the truth because he has seen something. (chapter 89) He witnessed a kiss between Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung, and from that single image, he constructs a complete narrative: a kiss is turned into something raw and sexual. For him, intimacy replaces training, desire replaces discipline, and the explanation Kim Dan gives becomes, in his eyes, a lie. (chapter 89)

Yet this is where the episode quietly undermines Heesung’s certainty. Kim Dan is not just fabricating an alibi. He is not inventing a cover story. They were indeed training. (chapter 88) The kiss does not erase what preceded it; it merely interrupts it. Kim Dan’s explanation is therefore neither wholly true nor wholly false. It is a partial truth, shaped by shyness, by a desire to protect, and by shame. Hence he is sweating, when he explains his presence to Potato. (chapter 89) To know the “whole truth” would require access not only to events, but to intentions, emotional thresholds, and timing—access no single witness ever has. Only gods have such power.

And that’s how Choi Heesung views himself. He considers himself as the “perfect lover”, thus his dream has always been to find his soulmate, another “perfect lover”. (chapter 33) That’s the reason why he was attracted to Kim Dan in the first place. He is an angel (chapter 30), as the latter is quiet, self-effacing. selfless, attentive, humble and absorbs blame instead of projecting it. Kim Dan initially fits the fantasy of the perfect lover — someone who would not disrupt Heesung’s self-image. Hence he doesn’t need to do anything. (chapter 31) By siding with doc Dan and acting as the angel’s advocate (chapter 89), the comedian can appear as a saint.

But the reality is that the “fox” is overestimating himself. He is just a human like Joo Jaekyung and as such a sinner. The actor’s error is not merely that he lies, but that he lies by omission (chapter 89) and generalization. Because he saw one thing, he believes he knows everything. Because he believes he already knows Joo Jaekyung —his temper, his reputation, his past, his belief (chapter 32)— he believes that he can judge the celebrity. However, he does not consider that something else might have happened before the moment he witnessed. The kiss becomes totalizing. Training is retroactively erased.

This is precisely the same epistemic shortcut Park Namwook took in Season 1.

In both cases:

  • authority or proximity substitutes for inquiry,
  • a partial observation becomes a total explanation,
  • and investigation is deemed unnecessary because the observer believes he already understands the subject.
  • Crucially, judgment in these moments is driven not by facts, but by emotion. Resentment, jealousy, fear, and wounded pride shape perception long before evidence is considered. What presents itself as moral clarity is, in reality, affective certainty.

Yet justice—whether institutional or interpersonal—cannot emerge from emotion. It requires distance. It requires restraint. It requires a form of deliberate indifference: not apathy, but neutrality. The refusal to let feeling stand in for truth. Therefore a judge will always listen both sides (defendant, plaintiff). Neither Park Namwook (chapter 52) nor Heesung exercises this control. Both act from positions of perceived authority, and both mistake emotional coherence for factual accuracy. Their confidence does not only arise from what they know, but also from how strongly they feel. The strength of conviction replaces the labor of verification.

This failure becomes especially visible in Heesung’s interpretation of Kim Dan’s departure. (chapter 58) He imagines a simple narrative: Kim Dan must have left because of Joo Jaekyung’s temper, his rudeness, his violence, probably due to the “defeat”. A quarrel, therefore, naturally leads to separation. From this assumption follows a paternalistic conclusion: the “hamster” must be hidden from the athlete for his own good. Protection becomes justification; concealment becomes virtue.

Heesung delivers this judgment (chapter 89) while smoking—a detail the episode insists on repeating, and one that should not be aestheticized. The cigarette does not merely accompany his words; it alters the air in which they are spoken. (chapter 89) Smoke replaces oxygen. What should be a space for clarification becomes a polluted environment where nothing clean can circulate. His speech is not only corrosive; it is toxic, dispersing blame without responsibility and judgment without accountability.

This is not the violence of a raised fist, but of contamination. Heesung does not attack Joo Jaekyung directly; he saturates the space with inevitability. His words do not argue—they suffocate. By framing Jaekyung as fundamentally unlovable (“after everything you’ve done”), he does not describe a reality; he reinscribes a conviction that already haunts the champion: that love is structurally inaccessible to him, that intimacy is something he can only damage, never deserve.

In this sense, Heesung’s intervention is not corrective but punitive. It does not open a future; it seals one. The smoke signals this closure. There is no fresh air, no possibility of reconfiguration—only the quiet assertion that the past defines the present absolutely. And because Heesung speaks from a posture of apparent control, he mistakes pollution for moral clarity. He leaves believing he has spoken the truth, while what he has done is reinforce the most destructive lie Joo Jaekyung already believes about himself.

What Heesung never questions is whether this narrative is complete—or even accurate. He doesn’t know about the incident with the switched spray, about doc Dan’s mental and emotional suffering, he has no idea about doc Dan’s past as well. It was, as if the young man had no past or no trouble before his interaction with the sportsman. He does not ask why Kim Dan stayed as long as he did, why he returned, or how the relationship itself has transformed. He doesn’t look at the physical therapist at all, thus he can see no change. (chapter 89) The possibility that Kim Dan acted with agency, discernment, or desire is excluded in advance. Kim Dan is reduced to a fragile and innocent object of care rather than a subject capable of choice. He doesn’t know what is good for himself. (chapter 89)

What Jinx exposes here is not dishonesty, but epistemic arrogance: the conviction that seeing grants mastery over meaning.

The irony, of course, is that Joo Jaekyung once occupied this very position. (chapter 1) He accepted Park Namwook’s account of the former physical therapist because it aligned with what he believed he knew about himself and others. Now, in Episode 89, he becomes the object of the same logic—reduced, explained, and judged by someone who believes that proximity equals comprehension. This repetition matters.

It shows that truth in Jinx is never neutral. It is filtered through:

  • authority (Park Namwook),
  • jealousy and wounded pride (Heesung),
  • reputation and past violence (Joo Jaekyung),
  • and self-effacing silence (Kim Dan).

To know the full truth is impossible—not because the truth is unknowable, but because every character approaches it already shaped by prior experience. What changes in Episode 89 is not the existence of bias, but the story’s willingness to expose it as bias.

Heesung believes he knows the truth because he has seen something. A kiss. A single image, isolated from its sequence, elevated into certainty. From that moment on, everything else becomes irrelevant. And because he saw this before (chapter 58), he reinterprets the kiss as “fuck” and not as the expression of love and tenderness. In other words, he is witnessing “true love”, but he rejects it. This exposes that he has no true notion of real love. In his mind, Joo Jaekyung abused his position as “employer”. (chapter 89)

Heesung presents himself as morally superior because he does not resort to physical violence. (chapter 89) But this distinction is hollow. Harm does not require raised fists. It can be inflicted through trick, insinuation, through speaking about someone rather than to them, through occupying the role of moral arbiter while denying the other person a voice. (chapter 89) Kim Dan has always disliked this — being spoken for, spoken over, spoken around. Episode 1 and 57 established this clearly. Episode 89 simply mirrors it back.

What makes Heesung especially dangerous is that he uses Kim Dan as a shield. He claims to defend him, but only in his absence. By positioning himself as Kim Dan’s advocate, he grants himself authority while quietly stripping Kim Dan of agency. His concern is not what Kim Dan wants, but what Heesung believes Kim Dan deserves. In doing so, he protects his own wounded pride — the pride of someone who cannot accept that Kim Dan rejected him.

This refusal is key. Heesung cannot bear the idea that Kim Dan would choose Joo Jaekyung, even date him. (chapter 89) His comment “You’re not ….” implies the expectation of a confirmation. Both are not dating. What Joo Jaekyung is actually doing exceeds the category Heesung understands. This is not casual dating. It is not secrecy. It is not consumption. It is preparation. Continuity. A future. Symbolically, Joo Jaekyung is already a step beyond “dating”: he is moving toward marriage — toward public, accountable union. He is closer to commitment than the cursed “Romeo”. That’s the reason why the author included such a reference at the store: (chapter 89).

And this is where the contrast becomes stark. Heesung, who performs moral responsibility, is not dating Potato openly. He keeps relationships provisional, deniable, suspended in ambiguity. He treats the young fighter more like a puppy or servant than as an equal partner. Joo Jaekyung, who is accused of being reckless and violent, does the opposite. He assumes responsibility. He spends time with doc Dan by teaching him swimming and fighting, he pays debts. He limits contracts. He buys a suit not for himself, but for Kim Dan’s future. He does not erase the past; he integrates it into a shared trajectory.

In this sense, Heesung is not the opposite of institutional power — he is its echo. He speaks confidently, withdraws responsibility, and leaves consequences to others. He does not strike, but he silences. He does not coerce, but he defines reality from a position Kim Dan never consented to.

The tragedy is not that Heesung lies consciously. It is that he is convinced he is telling the truth.

Not Seeing but Knowing

Episode 89 ends not with confrontation, but with a visual verdict. (chapter 89)

At one table sits the former hospital director. His presence is quiet, restrained, and deeply uncomfortable. Nothing about him suggests ease. His coat remains on, his tie loosened but not removed — a body prepared to leave rather than settle. He did not come to linger. He did not come to enjoy himself. His posture signals transience, not belonging.

The drink in front of him reinforces this distance. Whisky on the rocks is not a drink of sharing or unfolding; it is a drink of insulation. Cold, undiluted, contained. It is consumed alone, meant to harden rather than open. Even when accompanied, the director remains isolated. The person across from him seems to be talking to him (chapter 89), yet the antagonist does not engage him. Conversation fails to circulate. Responsibility, like dialogue, stops at the rim of the glass.

This matters because the director is not merely observing Kim Dan — he is being corrected by him.

For a long time, the director believed he knew how Kim Dan’s story had ended. Fired, blacklisted, erased — a life quietly ruined by institutional power. That belief allowed him to move on without consequence. Silence had done its work. The trick had succeeded.

What sustained this belief was secrecy. Not ignorance, but managed invisibility. Power, in Jinx, does not primarily operate through open coercion, but through control of circulation (chapter 48): who is seen, who is spoken about, and who is allowed to speak at all. By removing Kim Dan from institutional spaces and ensuring that the story of his dismissal was settled elsewhere, the director did not merely punish him — he rendered him socially invisible. Thus no one knew about doc Dan, when the athlete looked for him. (chapter 56) As long as Kim Dan remained unseen, power could continue to “know” without ever needing to verify.

The episode makes this collapse of power visible through contrast, not moral correction. In the flashbacks, the hospital director appears with controlled dominance (chapter 89) rather than exposed guilt. His posture is upright, leaning in. His hand rests on Kim Dan’s shoulder without hesitation—uninvited yet unchallenged. His face shows satisfaction, not doubt. He smiles while Kim Dan sweats and is attempting to stop him. (chapter 1)

This is not the memory of a man who feared consequences. It is the memory of someone operating comfortably inside a system designed to protect him. (chapter 89) His confidence is instrumental, not emotional: the calm of someone who knows where authority lies and how silence will function afterward. The grayscale of the flashback does not condemn him; it preserves his former certainty. In memory, he is still the predator—not because he is crueler there, but because the environment still belongs to him: the hospital.

What has changed in Episode 89 is not his nature, but the terrain. (chapter 89)

In the restaurant, his stare freezes (chapter 1) not because he feels guilt, but because his old script no longer applies. He is no longer positioned above Kim Dan—neither institutionally, socially, nor visually. He cannot initiate contact without exposing himself. He is no longer buffered by uniforms, corridors, professional hierarchies, or closed rooms where truth can be settled elsewhere. The architecture that once enabled him—white coats, administrative silence, procedural opacity—is gone. And he can not confide to his colleague either, hence he keeps starring the main couple. (chapter 89)

Predators rely on asymmetry and enclosure. Here, both have dissolved. This is why his reaction is not anger. Anger presumes leverage. What we see instead is hesitation: the moment a predator realizes the habitat that sustained him no longer exists. His disorientation is not ethical; it is strategic. He is recalculating risk. There is no redemption here, no moral awakening. He does not look ashamed. He looks uncertain—stripped of guarantees, not conscience. (chapter 89)

This makes the contrast with Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung even sharper. Their interaction is openly intimate, casual, and socially legible. (chapter 89) They do not require shadows, isolation, or ambiguity to touch. Their closeness does not depend on secrecy or hierarchy. Where the director’s former power depended on institutional opacity, hierarchical distance, and Kim Dan’s vulnerability, Joo Jaekyung’s present intimacy depends on none of these. And no one seems to pay attention to the “main couple” at all. (chapter 89)

That is the true reversal the episode stages. Power has not disappeared; it has migrated. The table of the hamster and wolf is placed higher than the one where the perverted director is seated. (chapter 89) It no longer operates through enclosure and silence, but through visibility and mutual presence. What once required corridors and closed doors now unfolds in the open air of a shared table. And this, finally, is what the director is forced to see. (chapter 89)

What unsettles the director is not confrontation, but visibility: the realization that secrecy can no longer protect the knowledge he once mistook for truth. His wrongdoing can now get exposed, for doc Dan is now standing close to the “spotlight”. Joo Jaekyung is not just a face, but also a voice. Thus the latter could sue a hospital. (chapter 42) This raises the following question: was the wolf suing the hospital where doc Dan got his first “gig”,?

What the nameless director sees now contradicts that certainty. (chapter 89) Kim Dan is not diminished. He is not withdrawn, anxious, or broken. He is smiling. Relaxed. Present. He laughs. He blushes. His body no longer carries the posture of someone living under constant threat. And he is not alone. He is sitting with a famous athlete — not as an accessory or subordinate, but as an equal. But more importantly, he is not pushing away the gentle gesture from the famous MMA fighter, while the “old creep” couldn’t forget doc Dan’s rejection. (chapter 89)

This is the shock. (chapter 89)

The director did not anticipate survival. He did not imagine joy. He certainly did not expect visibility.

Across the restaurant, a different table breathes. (chapter 89)

Kim Dan has removed his jacket. His body is at ease in the space. He is not preparing to leave; he is inhabiting the moment. The drink shared here — red wine — is not incidental. (chapter 89) Wine is relational. It opens, breathes, changes with time. It is meant to be shared, discussed, returned to. It presupposes duration. Where whisky seals, wine circulates.

Where the director’s table is suspended in cold certainty, Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung’s table exists in a shared present. Air moves. Attention moves. When Joo Jaekyung looks at Kim Dan, he does not define him or speak for him. He responds to him. Kim Dan is not summarized. He is addressed. And observe that doc Dan is gradually imposing himself as the senior. He is now the athlete’s hyung. (chapter 89)

The contrast is not moralistic. It is structural.

The director represents a mode of power that knows without seeing. He once decided truth behind closed doors, believing outcomes were sufficient proof. Even now, his presence is shaped by that same logic: observe without engaging, remember without reckoning, drink without sharing. The irony is that he is exactly like Heesung. He thinks, what he sees is the truth. He believes to know. Because he is a hidden homosexual, he can only interpret such a gesture as the expression of love, (chapter 89) but also as commitment. In his eyes, they are dating, they are a couple. The irony is that he is only partially correct. They are not an official couple, but they act like one. Moreover, they are working together. So they are more than just a couple. Finally, this happy moment doesn’t indicate what doc Dan went through in the past, the switched spray, the drugged beverage and a huge depression.

Joo Jaekyung represents something else entirely. Not innocence, not purity, but responsibility. He does not deny the past; he incorporates it. He does not insulate himself from consequence; he assumes it. The space he shares with Kim Dan is not free of history, but it is no longer governed by silence. In fact, now their “history” is full of funny stories. (chapter 89) But more importantly, he doesn’t hide his affection and attraction to doc Dan, while the other did it behind closed doors. Finally, thanks to doc Dan, Joo Jaekyung is learning to pay attention to his surrounding. That’s how he sensed the gaze from the perverted hospital director. (chapter 89)

This is why Episode 89 feels decisive without resolving anything.

The director’s return does not promise immediate punishment or exposure. It signals displacement. The world he once controlled through erasure no longer centers him. The person he believed he had reduced to nothing is not only alive, but visible — and no longer alone. He is even happy.

Power that relied on not seeing has lost its authority. What replaces it is not revenge, but relation.

And this is what marks The Beginning of the End, the final emancipation of Doc Dan. The latter does not arrive through confrontation or declaration, but through legibility. In the fitting room, the suit is not a costume of aspiration or disguise; it is a confirmation that he can now be seen without being reduced. He looks back, not down. He asks, (chapter 89) not as a plea for permission, but as an invitation into a shared future. The pause of the older man watching him echoes a different kind of professionalism: not predatory authority, not performative control, but quiet recognition. Furthermore the doctor’s suit reminded me of the doctor in episode 13, Cheolmin (pattern, colors). (chapter 13) The visual resemblance to Cheolmin is not accidental. It aligns Kim Dan’s future not with power that operates through secrecy, but with practice grounded in fun, care and responsibility. Earlier, suits belonged to those who decided outcomes behind closed doors (chapter 89); here, the suit becomes a sign of re-entry without erasure. (chapter 89) Bought by Joo Jaekyung but chosen by Kim Dan, it marks the return of agency. What was once a symbol of exclusion now signals continuity. Kim Dan is no longer preparing to survive. He is preparing to live. Hence his birthday is approaching.

Not because justice has been delivered, but because those who once “knew” without seeing are finally forced to see—
and discover that their knowledge and power were never secure, only temporarily protected by illusion.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Jinx: The Birth 🎴 of A Flower 🌸 (part 1)

Where is a Flower in Episode 88?

Episode 88 of Jinx immediately drew readers’ attention to two moments in particular: the training session between Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung (chapter 88), and the final panel hinting at an imminent confrontation with Choi Heesung. (chapter 88) Discussions largely revolved around physical proximity, discipline, and anticipation — around bodies in motion and the promise of conflict to come. At first glance, the episode seemed to oscillate between intimacy and tension (chapter 88), between preparation (chapter 88) and interruption (chapter 88).

Only on closer reading does another layer emerge — one that does not oppose these moments, but reframes them. The training session is not merely about discipline or proximity, and the final panel is not only a promise of confrontation. Both scenes (chapter 88) are structured around restraint (chapter 88): what is held back (chapter 88), delayed, or redirected. Words are measured, authority is redistributed, and decisions are deferred (chapter 88) rather than imposed. What initially appears as physical intensity and narrative suspense begins to reveal a deeper reconfiguration of roles, responsibility, and choice.

At first glance, the title may seem paradoxical. The episode takes place a few weeks after October (chapter 70)—most likely in November— in late autumn. (chapter 88) This temporal setting is visually reinforced by the environment itself: in the opening sequence marked “a few weeks later,” the tree is already bare, its leaves gone. Nature offers no spontaneous image of growth or renewal. If a flower were to appear in this chapter, it couldn’t belong to the season. It must be cultivated, protected, and sustained in a green house—something that emerges not from natural abundance, but from deliberate care. So where does this idea of a flower come from?

Closed Circuits and the Logic of the Number Eight

The title emerged from a visual and structural observation. Chapter 88 is built around the number eight: a chapter defined by two closed circuits that finally cross. Remember how I described the relationship of the main couple in the essay : a closed circuit which we could witness once again in the training room: (chapter 88) There are once again sparks between them. The number 8 is not just related to doc Dan [for more read  The Magic Of Numbers ] and his relationship with the athlete, but also to the other couple: Heesung and Yoon-Gu. This means, the latter represent the other closed circuit. Hence the other couple appeared in episode 35 and 58. (chapter 58) Two trajectories —long separated, repeatedly missing one another—intersect at last. When two eights overlap, they form neither a loop nor a knot, but a new shape: a flower-like figure, suggestive of opening rather than closure. This crossing does not resolve everything; instead, it creates the conditions for growth for all the characters. We could say that each closed circuit forms two petals so that their interaction with each other will affect them positively.

Color as Emotional Structure

The flower, however, is not only numerical or temporal. It is also chromatic. A flower is never defined by form alone, but by shading—by gradients, transitions, and the coexistence of multiple tones within a single structure. Thus in French certain flowers serve to define pigments: rose for pink, violet for purple. In this sense, episode 88 does not merely contain colors; it behaves like a flower unfolding through shades. Episode 88 is saturated with color: pink (chapter 88), white (chapter 88) purple (chapter 88), blue, gray, , (chapter 88) red (chapter 88) and black (chapter 88) Pink frames tenderness and mutual awkwardness; purple marks embarrassment and heightened awareness; red signals suppressed anger and looming confrontation; black absorbs fear, silence, and unresolved tension.

White, notably associated with Park Namwook, carries a more ambivalent meaning. (chapter 88) It evokes innocence on the surface, but also ignorance—an unexamined moral comfort that allows him to retreat from responsibility while claiming authority. His lightness contrasts sharply with the weight of the decision he refused to make: visually underlined by the black-lined spiral hovering near his head—an emblem of irritation without accountability.

Blue and gray dominate the scene in which Joo Jaekyung announces his seemingly excessive training demands. (chapter 88) On the surface, the atmosphere feels cold and authoritarian. Yet the exaggeration itself reveals something else: the demand is deliberately absurd, almost teasing. Joo Jaekyung is testing resolve, not imposing punishment. The joke —visible thanks to the chibi and the brief spark within the athlete’s gaze— goes unnoticed. No one laughs. The room’s muted colors reflect this misrecognition—care and fun are present, but not yet legible to those receiving it.

At first glance, the setting itself seems to resist any floral reading. (chapter 88) The scene unfolds not in nature, but in a gym in Seoul—an urban, enclosed space associated with discipline, repetition, and control rather than growth or renewal. This tension may explain the readers’ initial surprise: a flower appears where one would expect only concrete, steel, and hierarchy. Yet in Jinx, the flower does not belong to nature as landscape, but to nature as process—to emergence, care, and relational change.

This process is not introduced through scenery, but through bodies marked by green. And the latter symbolizes nature. In episode 88, two characters (chapter 88) are dressed in green (chapter 88), a choice that appears unobtrusive—almost practical—yet is unmistakable within Mingwa’s chromatic language. Green here does not function as pure nature or renewal, but as transition: a sign of growth that is still constrained, negotiated, and incomplete. It is not a vivid, liberating green, but a muted one—ranging from green sheen to subdued olive—closer to endurance than vitality, to steadiness rather than expansion. Growth is present, but it has not yet broken free; it remains embedded in effort, restraint, and adaptation.

Crucially, this shorts’ shade recalls the photograph of Kim Dan with his grandmother (chapter 19), where green and floral elements once functioned as a silent language of care and containment. The repetition is not accidental. By wearing a similar tone in the present, Kim Dan does not merely revisit the past; he carries it forward. (chapter 88) The color no longer signifies dependency or shelter alone, but continuity of self. It marks a return to an inner disposition that predates trauma—a self capable of care, persistence, and quiet resilience. This means that he is closer to his true self.

Placed within the gym’s dominant blues and grays, this green does not signal leisure or escape. It signals cultivation. Growth here is neither spontaneous nor decorative; it must be trained, maintained, and protected. The flower does not bloom despite the city—it blooms through care, discipline and recognition. What initially appears paradoxical becomes coherent: in Jinx, growth is not opposed to structure. It is shaped by it.

From Flower to Language: Communication Deferred

Crucially, the flower also functions as a metaphor for communication. (chapter 19) Flowers are not passive decorations; they carry meaning, intent, and symbolism. The background is composed of hydrangeas in blue, pink, and pale violet—colors traditionally associated with gratitude, tenderness, apology, and emotional nuance.

Unlike roses (chapter 35), which tend to assert a singular message (love, passion, beauty), hydrangeas communicate multiplicity and emotional ambivalence; they speak in clusters rather than declarations. This visual language mirrors Kim Dan’s inner world at the time (chapter 19): affection entwined with dependency and sorrow, care mixed with silence, love present but unspoken.

This chromatic memory resurfaces later through a different floral gesture: the bouquet Choi Heesung offers Kim Dan —pink roses paired with baby’s breath (chapter 31). Here, the symbolism shifts. Pink roses convey affection and admiration, while baby’s breath suggests innocence and fragility. Yet the arrangement is excessive, overwhelming, and mismatched to its recipient. The bouquet does not listen; it speaks at Kim Dan rather than with him. Significantly, Heesung comes to associate Kim Dan himself with the flower—something delicate, beautiful, and deserving of protection, but also something to be handled, displayed, and possessed.

Episode 88 reframes this logic entirely. The “birth of a flower” no longer refers to being perceived as fragile or decorative, but to a return to growth from within. (chapter 88) Kim Dan’s green training clothes—visually echoing the green shirt he wore in the photograph with his grandmother—signal continuity rather than regression. This is not a retreat into childhood dependency, but the reappearance of an inner child now disentangled from obligation and fear. The flower that reemerges here is not gifted, not arranged, not imposed—it grows. In this sense, episode 88 introduces a missing element in the dynamic between the two protagonists: not desire, not care, but communication. And it is here that Choi Heesung becomes central—not as a rival or antagonist, but as a structural bridge, as in reality he represents the rose, “La vie en rose” . He embodies speech, playfulness, and visibility, yet also reveals their limits when they are severed from responsibility and respect. I will elaborate about this more below.

The illustration accompanying this essay includes a fifth, shadowed petal inspired by the Mugunghwa—the Rose of Sharon, a national symbol of Korea often associated with endurance, justice, and continuity. This fifth petal does not yet fully bloom. It signals something incomplete, something still forming: a question of justice, choice, and mutual recognition that the narrative has only begun to articulate.

Finally, this essay reads episode 88 through the lens of Erich Fromm’s definition of love—care, responsibility, respect, and knowledge. For me, these 4 notions are represented by the 4 petals. In this chapter, Joo Jaekyung visibly embodies care, responsibility, and a growing respect for others’ autonomy. What remains absent is knowledge: a true understanding of Kim Dan’s inner life, just as Kim Dan himself has yet to fully understand Jaekyung beyond his role and past. The flower, then, is not the endpoint. It is the beginning of a process in which these missing elements may finally emerge.

What follows is not an analysis of victory or defeat, but of growth—quiet, fragile, and cultivated under constraint. This is not the celebration of happiness already achieved (chapter 88), but the moment in which the conditions for happiness are finally put into place. And now let me ask you this. What is the symbol of happiness? Smiles and laughs. During the training session, Kim Dan smiles. These moments are brief (chapter 88) and goes unnoticed by him (chapter 88) and his fated partner, yet it directly answers what Joo Jaekyung has repeatedly expressed as his desire: to be the source for Kim Dan’s smile and to smile together. (chapter 83) What is striking is that neither of them recognizes this fulfillment. (chapter 88) Kim Dan does not register his own smile as happiness, and Joo Jaekyung does not realize that he is already producing what he seeks. As elsewhere in Jinx, happiness precedes awareness. It exists before it is acknowledged—by both sides.That’s why I selected the title: the flower embodies happiness, as its life is just as short as happiness. (chapter 31)

A. Joo Jaekyung × Kim Dan: The First two Petals

The training sequence in episode 88 cannot be read as a simple exercise scene, nor as a sudden moment of equality or mutual play. It is, instead, the continuation of a long-standing relational pattern in which care is expressed indirectly (chapter 88), asymmetrically, and through the only language both characters know how to use: work. (chapter 88) What appears at first glance as coercion (chapter 88) or discipline is in fact a negotiation shaped by habit, fear of burdening the other, and an inability—on both sides—to articulate desire outside professional roles.

1. How the training is suggested: care disguised as necessity

Crucially, the idea of training does not emerge in the gym itself. It is first introduced in the car (chapter 88), a space that is never neutral in Jinx. A car has one driver, one direction, one authority. By placing the conversation there, Mingwa signals that the relationship is still structurally asymmetrical at this point: Joo Jaekyung leads, Kim Dan follows.

Joo Jaekyung frames the proposal as a matter of stamina and work. (chapter 88) Training will help him in his career. This framing is not accidental. Joo Jaekyung does not yet know how to say: “I want to spend time with you“, or “I’m afraid you won’t be safe, once you leave my side“. He knows only how to justify closeness through usefulness. Training becomes a rational excuse for proximity, a legitimate reason to demand time without admitting emotional dependence.

At the same time, this proposal is deeply protective. Joo Jaekyung has seen Kim Dan collapse from exhaustion in the past. He knows his physical limits better than Kim Dan himself. (chapter 88) Secondly, such a training suggests that the athlete is gradually remembering this scene of the almost-rape. (chapter 88) In his subconscious, he knows that this was not prostitution. (chapter 17) Therefore it is not surprising that instead of asking permission or explaining concern, he imposes the idea—because that is how he has learned to act as a captain, a fighter, and later a manager. Authority precedes dialogue. (chapter 88)

2. The first refusal: self-neglect disguised as strength

Kim Dan’s first response is immediate: (chapter 88) He refuses. This is not politeness. It is not consideration for Joo Jaekyung’s fatigue. It is a reflex rooted in long-standing self-erasure. Kim Dan genuinely believes he is strong enough. More importantly, he believes that needing care is illegitimate.

This refusal is governed by habit:

  • the habit of minimizing himself,
  • the habit of overestimating endurance,
  • the habit of believing that receiving attention makes him a burden.

At this stage, Kim Dan is not yet protecting Joo Jaekyung; he is protecting the structure that allows him to remain useful and unobtrusive. Accepting training would mean admitting vulnerability—and worse, accepting time, effort, and concern directed at him.

The sportsman ignores this refusal. This moment is important because it reveals both the problem and the intention. Joo Jaekyung acts like a parental figure, not a partner. He overrides consent not out of cruelty, but out of conviction that he knows better. His care still takes the form of command. This explicates why the physical therapist’s agreement is accompanied with a drop of a sweat. “Okay” indicates more discomfort than joy and gratitude. He doesn’t feel indebted toward the athlete, rather embarrassed.

Thus the asymmetry is intact. The training is not born out of his own desire.

3. The pause: time passing, resistance softening

Striking is that this conversation is revealed, after the champion asked doc Dan to get changed. (chapter 88) In other words, the request from Joo Jaekyung appears as a memory from the physical therapist. Why? (chapter 88) Because Mingwa refuses the “clean” sequence in which an order is issued and immediately executed. The narration inserts a gap—an interval of off-panel time that we are forced to reconstruct from Kim Dan’s recall. (chapter 88) The narrative does not jump immediately into physical training, because the temporal gap is supposed to mirror the time jump as well. There were other training sessions. This temporal gap matters. The doctor’s inner thoughts (chapter 88) “I guess we’re doing it today, too…” implies routine without inner desire and daily regularity. This means that the training sessions only took place, when the champion asked doc Dan to change his clothes. Doc Dan was not looking forward for the training sessions or reminded the athlete of his promise or request.

That pause changes the meaning of consent and compliance. If the scene were immediate, Kim Dan’s earlier refusal (“Oh no, thank you, I can manage—”) would read as a clear boundary and Joo Jaekyung’s “Just do as I say” as a straightforward override. (chapter 88) But because the chapter returns to the topic through memory, the refusal is not portrayed as a decisive line—rather, it becomes the first phase of a negotiation Kim Dan does not yet know how to conduct. His resistance softens not because he suddenly “wants” the training, but because habit takes over: he is used to accommodating authority, used to re-framing his own limits as irrelevant, used to translating pressure into “normal.” The break between the command and the actual session is precisely where that old reflex does its quiet work.

By the time they appear in the practice room, Kim Dan is showing no hesitation. He is training eagerly. (chapter 88) Instead Kim Dan no longer insists on his own sufficiency. He no longer says “I can manage., but doc Dan admits not only his own lacking. (chapter 88), but also his own desire. He finally expresses his desire to improve, to learn more.

This admission marks a decisive internal shift. In earlier chapters, “I can manage” functioned as a shield: a way to deny need and avoid dependence. Here, Kim Dan allows himself to recognize that improvement exists precisely because limits existed before. The champion’s explicit comparison with the past (chapter 88) creates a temporal bridge that enables this recognition. Only once change is named from the outside can Kim Dan cautiously acknowledge it from within.

At the same time, this acknowledgment remains fragile. Kim Dan does not fully accept the implications of Joo Jaekyung’s praise. (chapter 88) His response — “I still have a lot to learn” — both accepts growth and reinscribes distance. He recognizes the fighter’s effort and dedication, yet still fears relying on the athlete’s benevolence. (chapter 88) This is why he immediately reframes the future in terms of independence: he will “keep up the training on [his] own.” Gratitude is present, but it remains incomplete, protective rather than connective. He still experiences himself as a potential burden. But why?

It’s because he tried to care for the athlete in his own way by suggesting a rest, but the champion denied it. (chapter 88) The problem is that his form of care was influenced by his own mindset and emotions: his physical limitations.

This attempt at care fails not because it is insincere, but because it is misaligned. Kim Dan does not ask whether Joo Jaekyung wants to rest; he assumes that rest must be what is needed, because that is what he himself would need in the same situation. His concern is genuine, yet it is filtered through his own bodily limits and emotional economy. Fatigue, for him, is something that must be managed cautiously, avoided, negotiated. When he encounters a body that does not obey those rules — a body that still has stamina, that refuses the logic of depletion — his offer of care is quietly rejected.

This rejection is decisive. It reveals a gap Kim Dan cannot yet bridge: the realization that Joo Jaekyung’s needs do not mirror his own. (chapter 88) The athlete does not require rest in the same way, and more importantly, he does not articulate his needs through physical exhaustion at all. What Kim Dan fails to perceive is that the training itself is Joo Jaekyung’s way of staying regulated, present, and emotionally grounded. It is also his source of joy. By denying the necessity of rest, the champion is not dismissing care; he is refusing a form of care that does not correspond to him.

Confronted with this mismatch, Kim Dan retreats. If his attempt to care is ineffective, then the safest response is to minimize his demands. This is where gratitude hardens into distance. He thanks Joo Jaekyung for his help with a smile, acknowledges his progress, and immediately insists on autonomy: he will continue alone. The logic is protective. If he does not rely, he cannot burden. If he does not ask, he cannot be refused again.

What emerges here is not self-confidence, but a familiar defense. Kim Dan is not asserting independence from strength; he is withdrawing from uncertainty. His insistence on training alone does not signal rejection of connection, but fear of asymmetry — fear that he cannot offer something equivalent in return. Because he interprets care primarily through physical effort and endurance, he cannot yet recognize that his presence, attention, and willingness to engage already matter.

In this sense, the moment exposes the limits of projection. Kim Dan’s care is sincere, but it remains anchored in his own survival strategies. Until he can decouple care from exhaustion, and need from weakness, he will continue to misread situations where what is required is not restraint, but accompaniment. The training, then, is not only about building strength. It is the first site where Kim Dan begins to confront the possibility that care does not always flow from managing limits — but sometimes from staying, even when one feels unnecessary.

This is significant. It shows that Kim Dan is beginning to speak, but still cannot speak for himself. His old habit remains: if something feels wrong, it must be because the other person needs rest, not because he is tired, scared, or overwhelmed. In other words, care is emerging—but it is displaced.

This is precisely why the gesture that follows (chapter 88) carries such weight. For the first time in this exchange, care is directed back at Kim Dan without condition. It is not framed as instruction, correction, or evaluation. It is neither command nor test. It is a simple, protective statement that mirrors Kim Dan’s earlier concern — but without projection. Joo Jaekyung does not deny Kim Dan’s limits. He acknowledges them. There is no reproach, only concern. (chapter 88)

Here, the asymmetry softens without disappearing. Joo Jaekyung remains physically dominant, emotionally inarticulate, and structurally in control of the situation. Yet the direction of care shifts. He does not accept Kim Dan’s attempt to exit the dynamic under the guise of independence. Instead, he counters it with responsibility: you matter enough to be protected. The pinky promise that visually accompanies this exchange reinforces the meaning. Promises in Jinx have often functioned as burdens or traps — obligations that freeze people in place. This one is different. It does not demand performance. It does not extract sacrifice. It asks only for self-preservation. (chapter 88)

This is where the flower begins to appear — not as harmony, not as symmetry, but as mutual misrecognition slowly correcting itself. Kim Dan still does not fully grasp that Joo Jaekyung’s desire to train him is also a desire to spend time with him. Joo Jaekyung, in turn, still cannot articulate that desire outside the language of work. (chapter 88) Training becomes the only acceptable medium through which closeness can occur. Pleasure and intimacy surface unintentionally — in teasing, in competition, in shared breath — but remain unnamed.

Crucially, this is not rigidity. It is habit. Both men operate within deeply ingrained routines shaped by survival rather than joy. Rest, breaks, and leisure have only ever been framed in relation to the champion’s career: recovery after injury, distraction after stress, sanctioned release after pressure. They know how to stop working; they do not know how to share fun. There is no vocabulary yet for casual togetherness — no restaurant, no cinema, no idle wandering. Training fills the gap because it is the only space where proximity feels justified.

Thus, the training is neither purely imposed nor fully shared. It begins as Joo Jaekyung’s initiative, shaped by authority and concern, but it gradually becomes a site where Kim Dan starts to renegotiate his self-image. By acknowledging both his limits and his desire to improve, Kim Dan takes a first step away from the logic of endurance alone. He still retreats into self-sufficiency, but the retreat is no longer absolute. He speaks more. He hesitates less. He accepts care, even if he cannot yet rely on it.

The flower here is not bloom, but formation. It is the slow emergence of a relationship that must unlearn the equation between care and burden, strength and isolation, desire and duty. Nothing is resolved. But something has shifted: care is no longer one-directional, even when it remains uneven. And for the first time, both characters participate — imperfectly, awkwardly, but genuinely — in sustaining it.

4. Where pleasure enters—and why it is unspoken

As the training progresses, something shifts subtly. Joo Jaekyung smiles (chapter 88). He teases. (chapter 88) He challenges. He praises: (chapter 88)

These are not neutral compliments. They are moments where discipline slips into enjoyment. Joo Jaekyung is no longer training only to prepare Kim Dan for a future without him; he is enjoying the present interaction. And yet, he cannot name this enjoyment.

Pleasure appears within work, not alongside it. Intimacy emerges through exertion (chapter 88), not rest. Thus the doctor mistakes the embrace for a technique and not the expression of love. (chapter 88) And observe that the athlete still refuses to express the true meaning of his hug. His explanation still remains technical, defensive, and strategically framed: (chapter 88) This sentence is crucial. It reduces contact to function. The closeness of bodies, the pressure of weight, the proximity of breath are translated into instruction. What could be acknowledged as reassurance or care is instead displaced into pedagogy. Joo Jaekyung does not deny intimacy; he relabels it.

What the image reinforces is not distance, but deferral. The focus on bodies — on interlocked legs, grounded feet, balanced weight — emphasizes control and stability rather than vulnerability. Affection is allowed to exist only when it can be defended as functional. The mount is maintained not because Joo Jaekyung wants to keep Kim Dan close, but because losing it would constitute failure.

And yet, the sequence immediately preceding this moment shows both characters acutely aware of their racing hearts,

(chapter 88) of breath held too long, of proximity charged with something unnamed. The technical explanation arrives after that awareness, not before it. This confirms that the instructional language functions as a shield — not against intimacy itself, but against having to speak it.

Yet the narrative immediately undermines this technical framing. (chapter 88) Directly after warning against lowering one’s guard, Joo Jaekyung kisses him.

The kiss is not furtive, accidental, or one-sided. Both characters are fully present. They look at each other. Neither pulls away. The contradiction is deliberate: the body does what the language refuses to acknowledge. Vigilance and intimacy coexist in the same gesture. The warning about control does not prevent closeness; it becomes the pretext through which closeness is allowed.

This is the crucial correction: Joo Jaekyung is not simply disguising intimacy as technique. He is containing it. The kiss does not negate the instructional frame; it slips through it. Pleasure is permitted only insofar as it does not require verbal recognition. Love is enacted, but not named.

For Kim Dan, this ambiguity poses no immediate problem. He has been kissed before. Physical intimacy is not new to him, and he has learned — through prior encounters — not to interrogate its meaning unless forced to do so. He does not question whether the kiss signifies affection, reassurance, desire, or attachment. Instead, he relocates intimacy spatially rather than emotionally. His only objection is not that the kiss happens, but where: (chapter 88) This line is telling. Kim Dan does not resist closeness itself. He resists its placement. Intimacy, in his understanding, belongs elsewhere — to the penthouse, to private space, to moments already coded as sexual or domestic. What unsettles him is not the kiss, but the fact that it occurs inside the domain of work.

In other words, Kim Dan does not yet read intimacy as something that can coexist with discipline. He accepts affection when it appears in designated zones, but not when it disrupts functional categories. The gym is a place of training; therefore, what happens there must remain legible as training. Joo Jaekyung’s technical explanation gives him exactly that permission.

This is why Kim Dan accepts the justification without protest. He does not reinterpret the embrace as love because he does not yet need to. The structure remains intact: work is work, intimacy is intimacy, and when the two overlap, the overlap is attributed to technique rather than feeling.

In this sense, Joo Jaekyung’s restraint protects both of them. It protects Kim Dan from having to reinterpret the gesture emotionally, and it protects Joo Jaekyung from articulating feelings he has no vocabulary for outside the grammar of training. Care is real, but its meaning is postponed. Love is present, but encoded as vigilance.

This postponement explains why the “flower” has not yet opened. It exists, but inwardly folded. Growth is happening, but it is constrained by the only relational language both men currently share: effort, endurance, correction, control.

They know how to train together.
They know how to recover.
They know how to endure crisis.
They know obligation.

They do not yet know how to choose pleasure together — how to eat, rest, shop, watch a movie, or enjoy time without purpose. Even their earlier “break” at the amusement park existed because Joo Jaekyung needed rest, not because they mutually chose leisure. Fun, like intimacy, has always been instrumental.

What episode 88 reveals is not the absence of love, but its confinement. Pleasure appears — undeniably — yet remains untranslated. Sensation does not yet become knowledge. The flower is there, but it has not learned how to open outside the discipline that first allowed it to grow.

5. The slow reversal: from imposed care to accepted challenge

The most important moment comes when Kim Dan manages to reverse positions and pin Joo Jaekyung. (chapter 88) The shock and joy are mutual. Joo Jaekyung is genuinely surprised. Kim Dan is genuinely proud—though he barely allows himself to register it. (chapter 88) This is not equality yet. But it is the first time Kim Dan experiences himself as capable, not merely compliant. The training that began as imposed authority becomes a shared test and experience. Importantly, Kim Dan did not ask for this moment. It emerged because he stayed. This stands in opposition to the sparring in front of the fighters. (chapter 26) Back then, Doc Dan had accepted the challenge due to Potato, though deep down he desired to have the champion as his teacher. (chapter 25) That’s how it dawned on me that doc Dan has gradually taken over Yoon-Gu’s previous place at the gym. He is an “unofficial member” of Team Black. Thus he mops the floor and Yoon-Gu is not there to stop him or reclaim this position. (chapter 88) Yoon-Gu’s position within the gym has improved. He is now considered as a real fighter.

6. Where the flower is

If the previous sections trace a movement, this final observation names its limit. To understand why the flower in episode 88 has only begun to appear, it is necessary to return to Erich Fromm’s definition of love, which rests on four inseparable elements: care, responsibility, respect, and knowledge. [For more read:“The Art Of Loving” (locked)] Love, in this framework, does not exist where only one or two of these are present. It requires all four to be active at once in order to become sustaining, conscious, and mutual.

Episode 88 makes one thing unmistakably clear: in the relationship between Joo Jaekyung and Kim Dan, three of these elements are already in place. One is not.

Care is not what this relationship lacks. (chapter 88) Joo Jaekyung’s care is visible throughout the episode, even when it is expressed awkwardly or through misdirection. His insistence on training, his attention to Kim Dan’s stamina, his refusal to let Kim Dan dismiss his own physical limits (chapter 88), and his final reminder to “take good care of yourself” all belong to the same logic. This care is protective and practical, but it is still delivered under the cover of training—phrased as guidance, risk-management, and performance maintenance rather than as attachment. He is capable of saying “take care,” but he still cannot say what the care ultimately means: I want you close; I worry about losing you; I don’t know how to keep you besides making you stronger. For someone like Jaekyung, whose life has been organized around performance and endurance, this is the only available language of concern. Kim Dan, too, expresses care, though in a displaced form. He worries about Jaekyung’s exhaustion, (chapter 88), minimizes his own needs and tries not to become a burden. Care moves in both directions, even if it rarely reaches its intended target.

Responsibility is equally present, and equally heavy. Jaekyung assumes responsibility for Kim Dan’s safety and future (chapter 88), particularly in light of his own awareness that their time together is limited. The training is not arbitrary; it is oriented toward what comes after him. Kim Dan, meanwhile, takes responsibility in another way: by insisting on self-sufficiency (chapter 88), by promising to continue training on his own, by framing improvement as something he must manage independently. What stands out is that responsibility exists on both sides, but it is carried separately. Each assumes it alone, without yet allowing it to become shared.

Respect, too, is not absent. Jaekyung respects Kim Dan’s capacity to grow. (chapter 88) He challenges him not because he sees him as weak, but because he believes resistance is possible. (chapter 88) His praise, rare and restrained, signals recognition rather than indulgence. Kim Dan, in turn, respects Jaekyung’s discipline and endurance, sometimes to the point of idealization. This respect remains asymmetrical, but it is real. It has begun to shift from hierarchy toward recognition.

What is missing, and what keeps the flower from fully appearing, is knowledge—not information, not memory, but Fromm’s sense of active understanding of the other as a subject with inner needs, fears, and desires. In The Art of Loving, knowledge means seeing the other as they are, which requires two things at once:

  1. Honesty toward oneself (recognizing one’s own needs, fears, and desires), and
  2. Articulation toward the other (making that inner reality available rather than acting it out indirectly).

This is why words matter so much. Without words, care can exist, responsibility can exist, and even respect can exist — but they remain opaque. Joo Jaekyung knows exactly what he wants: time, proximity, continuity. He is acutely aware that his time with Kim Dan is running out. (chapter 88)

What he lacks is not intention, but translation and even courage. He does not know how to express his desire outside the vocabulary of work, discipline, and physical instruction. He can insist, challenge, and protect, but he cannot yet name why he does so. He still thinks, it is not possible to be loved due to his huge flaws and past wrongdoings. Kim Dan, on the other hand, does not yet know how to read care when it is not framed as sacrifice or obligation. He interprets insistence as burden, closeness as technique, affection as something that must be relocated elsewhere—into private space, into the penthouse, into moments that feel safer and more legible.

Their misunderstanding does not stem from a lack of feeling. It stems from a lack of confidence and shared language. Love is enacted rather than understood. Care, responsibility, and respect circulate between them, but knowledge—the capacity to see and articulate the other’s inner reality—has not yet entered the relationship. The reason is that both underestimate themselves. Thus both don’t speak the truth. This is why the flower in episode 88 is real but incomplete. It exists in the slow shift from refusal to engagement, from habit-driven self-denial to cautious participation. It exists in the fact that Kim Dan accepts the training not because he must, but because he begins to recognize the results from Jaekyung’s effort and insistence. He gradually accepts that Joo Jaekyung is genuinely concerned about him. He is gradually enjoying this, thus he voices his desire to learn more. Another problem is that both still think, they know each other. They have not recognized the importance of “words” and “honesty” yet. Nevertheless until knowledge emerges—until what is enacted can also be spoken—the flower remains folded inward. Not absent. Not broken. Simply unfinished.

Heesung × Potato: The Other Two Petals — Knowledge Without Responsibility

If the bond between Joo Jaekyung and Kim Dan exposes a surplus of care constrained by poor articulation, the dynamic between Heesung and Potato reveals the opposite imbalance:: knowledge without responsibility, and therefore without respect. The actor is able to express his thoughts and emotions all the time, yet he is not taking Potato’s feelings and thoughts into consideration. Thus he simply asks Yoon-Gu to hold the mitts and not be his sparring partner. (chapter 88) The way the “gumiho” speaks to the chow-chow is quite telling. He expects an agreement. Striking is that the young fighter doesn’t agree to the actor’s request, he answers with another question: “You don’t need a sparring partner?”. This question reveals that Yoon-Gu had already imagined himself differently. He had pictured a future moment in which he would not merely assist the actor’s training, but share it. In other words, he had already crossed an internal threshold: from helper to potential partner. The question exposes a private projection — a hope — that had not yet been verbalized until this moment.

That is why this exchange marks Yoon-Gu’s transformation. That’s why he is wearing a olive green sweater. (chapter 88) Olive green is not the vivid green of aspiration or idealization, nor the cold institutional green associated with discipline and hierarchy. It is a grounded, muted green — a color of transition. Symbolically, it sits between admiration and autonomy. By wearing it at this moment, Yoon-Gu visually signals a shift away from the champion’s gravitational pull. He is no longer oriented upward, toward an untouchable figure, but sideways, toward a peer relationship he is beginning to imagine. The green does not announce arrival; it marks movement. Growth here is not explosive but cautious, uneven, and still uncertain.

Crucially, this transformation does not stem from insecurity. Yoon-Gu is not suffering from low self-esteem. On the contrary, he speaks easily, moves freely, and voices his expectations without hesitation. What he lacks is not confidence, but self-awareness. He does not yet understand the structure he is entering, nor the asymmetry embedded in it. He mistakes proximity for reciprocity, access for acknowledgment. And the chow chow’s lack of self-awareness is also present, when he imagined that he could have followed to the amusement park. (chapter 87) For him, this trip was related to work, while in reality it was a date in disguise.

This becomes clearer when contrasted with the main couple. Between Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung, communication is constrained, indirect, and often misaligned, as both are suffering from a low self-esteem and their past traumas. Desires are hidden behind habit, duty, or technical language. By contrast, the dialogue between Yoon-Gu and Choi Heesung is strikingly explicit. Both second leads speak readily. They articulate preferences, make requests, and voice dissatisfaction without visible hesitation. The only difference is that Heesung allows misunderstanding to persist. Joo Jaekyung abruptly corrects it. Neither approach is emotionally generous—but only one produces shock rather than slow erosion.

To conclude, this apparent fluency masks a deeper problem. What is missing here is not expression, but reflection.

Earlier, Yoon-Gu’s actions were shaped by obligation, imitation, or conditional promises (cleaning the floor, holding equipment or a bottle, proving usefulness). Here, the initiative is internal. He is no longer reacting to instructions; he is testing the possibility of recognition. (chapter 88) The desire precedes permission.

The tragedy of the moment lies not in the refusal itself, but in how it is answered. Heesung does not respond to the desire embedded in the question. He bypasses it with a technical explanation — size difference — which neutralizes the emotional risk Yoon-Gu has taken. (Chapter 88) The answer restores hierarchy without acknowledging the transformation that has already occurred. Secondly, the answer closes the future by appealing to a supposedly objective limit. Yoon-Gu can never be his sparring partner. The best he can do is hold the mitts and nothing more. The fox is using his seniority and body to have the final say.

This is where Heesung’s pride in knowing turns into arrogance. His explanation contradicts the very logic that governs the gym itself. Joo Jaekyung has just demonstrated explicitly that technique outweighs physical size, that discipline and practice can reverse power relations. (chapter 88) Under that framework, Yoon-Gu is not disqualified; he is qualified. He has trained. He belongs. So technically, Yoon-Gu could indeed beat the actor, as the “puppy” has trained for a long time at Team Black.

Yet Heesung’s knowledge is not grounded in the present conditions of Team Black. It is grounded on his past experience: he received special training from Joo Jaekyung. In other words, he is biased. Heesung prides himself on knowing. (special episode 1) He knows people’s patterns. (special episode 1) He knows how relationships fail. (chapter 33) (chapter 33) He knows what he does not want. His language is saturated with judgment shaped by past experiences: lovers who become “too clingy,” attachments that turn inconvenient, people who should remain “better off” elsewhere (chapter 58). This knowledge is not neutral; it is retrospective and comparative. It is built from what has disappointed him before, and it governs how he evaluates others in the present. He views himself as superior to the champion morally.

This is where the symbolism of the “grass being greener on the other side” becomes essential. (chapter 33) Heesung’s orientation is never toward what is unfolding, but toward what might be better elsewhere—another partner, another configuration, another future. His repeated invocation of a “soulmate” is revealing: it displaces intimacy into a hypothetical horizon. By looking at the grass, he is overlooking the flower. Love, for him, is something to be found later, once the conditions are ideal. What exists now is always provisional, always lacking, always subject to replacement. He needs the “perfect” lover, and in his eyes, Potato doesn’t meet his conditions: too innocent and too young. (special episode 1) This explicates why the young fighter is only considered as “fuck buddy”. (special episode 1)

Potato exists precisely within this gap. Because he wanted to take responsibility. (special episode 1), he is present, available, even emotionally invested—but he is never treated as sufficient. He is smaller (chapter 88), younger and as such less experienced, he is positioned as someone who does not yet qualify as a sparring partner, or even less as a boyfriend. Observe how he presented his relationship to doc Dan. (chapter 58) Heesung’s use of the pronoun “we” is, on the surface, inclusive. Linguistically, it frames his relationship with Potato as mutual, shared, and consensual. But pragmatically, it does the opposite. The “we” is spoken over Potato’s head, not with him. Thus Potato is physically present but discursively absent. He does not confirm, nuance, or reciprocate the statement verbally. The pronoun thus becomes a rhetorical appropriation rather than a sign of partnership.

What makes the remark particularly uncomfortable is the context: Heesung is not speaking to Potato, but to Kim Dan. The sentence is not meant to communicate within the relationship; it is meant to display the relationship to a third party. In that sense, “we” functions as a prop. It allows Heesung to stage intimacy without assuming responsibility for how that staging affects the person he claims to include. He is not saying that he is dating Yoon-Gu either. In other words, he is behaving like Joo Jaekyung in season 1. (chapter 31) He denies the existence of feelings and attachment.

The embarrassment of Potato is not accidental. It is structurally produced by the asymmetry of the situation. Heesung controls the narrative, the tone, and the implication. By adding “in more ways than one,” he sexualizes the bond implicitly, while maintaining plausible deniability. Nothing explicit is said; everything is insinuated. This is knowledge without accountability. Heesung knows exactly how the line will land—on Kim Dan, and on Potato—but he does not take responsibility for either impact.

On the other hand, Heesung feels so comfortable around doc Dan, that he is willing to divulge more. He assumes Kim Dan will “understand” him. He is speaking in a coded register, relying on shared cultural assumptions: that closeness implies sexuality, that sexuality implies connection. In doing so, he treats Kim Dan as a potential ally in interpretation, not as a moral interlocutor. He expects recognition, perhaps even complicity, rather than reprimand or judgment.

This is where the contrast with Joo Jaekyung becomes sharp. Joo Jaekyung struggles to name intimacy and often hides it behind work or discipline—but he does not instrumentalize language to control (special episode 1) or humiliate the other. (chapter 34) Heesung, by contrast, is fluent. He can name, joke, insinuate. What he lacks is restraint and responsibility. His ease with words does not signal emotional intelligence; it signals control.

Heesung does not call Yoon-Gu weak outright, but the hierarchy is unmistakable: Potato is handled (chapter 88), redirected (special episode 2), corrected. (chapter 88) Even when Heesung intervenes on his behalf, it is not through shared responsibility but through dismissal—deciding what is best for him without asking what he truly wants.

This lack of responsibility is crucial. Responsibility, in Fromm’s sense, is not obligation imposed from above; it is the willingness to respond to the other as a subject whose needs and presence matter now. Heesung does not assume this stance. He neither commits nor withdraws cleanly. Instead, he hovers—knowing enough to judge, but refusing the burden of staying.

This explains why Heesung reacts so strongly to the relationship between Kim Dan and Joo Jaekyung. He does not simply misunderstand it; he rejects it (chapter 31) because it violates his model of love. Doc Dan is not introduced or claimed as his boyfriend. For him, it is simply related to the athlete’s jinx. (chapter 32). It has no declared endpoint, no moral clarity (chapter 34), no soulmate label. Rather than engaging with what the relationship is doing —how it functions, how it transforms both participants—Heesung tries to name it away: a jinx, a mistake, a lack of feelings. Naming, here, becomes a defense against involvement.

The scene in the penthouse crystallizes this refusal. (chapter 34) Heesung enters fully aware of what he is likely to witness. He is not naïve, nor totally surprised. Hence he doesn’t flee right away. Yet instead of acknowledging the reality before him, Doc Dan is not someone the fighter fucks, until he passes out, (chapter 33), he reframes the encounter as an accusation. The man is crazy. (chapter 34) Joo Jaekyung becomes the problem, the one who “deserves to suffer.” (chapter 58) This moral displacement allows Heesung to maintain distance: if Jaekyung is guilty, then no self-examination is required. Forgiveness—central to this arc (from 79 to 89)—is rendered impossible, because forgiveness would require recognizing shared vulnerability rather than assigning blame.

Potato, by contrast, is repeatedly asked to adapt. Earlier, he cleans, waits (chapter 25), accepts deferral. Later, he is displaced entirely. Unlike Kim Dan, who gradually moves from imposed participation to earned agency, Potato is never given a space where effort leads to recognition. (chapter 85) However, this panel implies that the young man has already been able to enter competition. Striking is that his promise at the seaside sounds like commitment (chapter 59), but the reality diverges. It only binds doc Dan. If the latter returns to Seoul, he has to promise to train with Potato. The reason is simple. He is already committed to the actor, he is already at his beck and call. Potato’s promise echoes the earlier promise forced upon Kim Dan by his grandmother: a future-oriented vow that justifies present sacrifice while guaranteeing nothing in return. (chapter 11)

This is the structural tragedy of the Heesung–Potato dynamic. There is confidence and knowledge—sharp, observational, even insightful—but it is not paired with responsibility. And without responsibility, respect and care collapse into condescension. Potato is not met as an equal in becoming, but as someone perpetually not-yet-ready. While Yoon-Gu had been deeply affected by doc Dan’s departure. (chapter 78), he didn’t remind doc Dan of his promise. At the same time, observe that none of the fighters apologized or promised something. When they hugged the doctor, they didn’t pay attention to the physical therapist’s reaction: his passivity and silence. The “laugh” lacked genuineness and felt wrong at the time. (chapter 78)

But let’s return our attention to the petals Heesung and Potato. Placed beside Joo Jaekyung and Kim Dan, the contrast is stark. Jaekyung lacks fluency, but not commitment. He does not know how to speak love, yet he stays. Heesung knows how to speak about dating and love, hence he offers a bouquet of roses. But he does not remain when love demands endurance rather than evaluation.

Secondly, Heesung embodies selfishness, which is also perceptible the way he appears at the gym. (Chapter 88) He had planned to use the gym without the champion’s consent and knowledge. And Potato was not expecting the presence of the main couple either. (Chapter 88) This is how it dawned on me why Mingwa recreated such a situation for Heesung. Observe his reaction, when he opened the door. He never answered the question to Potato. In fact, he slammed the door and kept his thoughts to himself. (chapter 88) As you can detect, he remained silent the whole time. It was, as though he was ignoring his lover.

What ultimately exposes the asymmetry in Heesung and Yoon-Gu’s relationship is not overt exploitation, but silence. Episode 88 stages this with remarkable precision. Heesung enters the gym without coordination (chapter 88), without consent from its owner, and without paying any visible cost. He does not announce himself as a guest, does not ask permission, and does not explain his presence. Instead, the intrusion is normalized through omission. Silence becomes the mechanism by which power circulates unnoticed.

Crucially, Yoon-Gu is excluded from the truth of the situation. Readers understand why Heesung is there; Yoon-Gu does not. The actor’s internal reaction (chapter 88) can be read as a moment of comic frustration. In fact, it reveals something far more consequential: this visit was never conceived as a shared activity with Yoon-Gu at all. The training session was not planned for him, nor with him. Yoon-Gu was not included as a subject in Heesung’s intention. He was a means.

This internal monologue exposes the logic of the intrusion. Heesung did not come to train with Yoon-Gu, nor to support him, nor to acknowledge his aspirations. He came to work off his own emotional agitation, to use the gym as a private outlet. Therefore it is not surprising that Yoon-Gu’s presence is reduced to him holding the mitts. His presence is incidental—useful, but not constitutive. When the situation threatens to escalate (chapter 88), Heesung does not think, What will happen to Yoon-Gu? He thinks only of himself: his inconvenience, his exposure, his embarrassment.

That omission is decisive. It confirms that Yoon-Gu is positioned not as a partner in training, but as an accessory to Heesung’s fitness and fun. He provides access, labor, and cover, yet remains excluded from knowledge and from choice. This mirrors an earlier pattern: just as Kim Dan once provided unpaid care under the guise of compensation (chapter 32), Yoon-Gu now provides unpaid labor and institutional access under the guise of familiarity and generosity (chapter 35). In both cases, Heesung benefits from proximity without assuming responsibility for the other person’s risk. Silence, here, is not neutral—it is the mechanism by which that asymmetry is maintained.

At the same time, this regret (chapter 88) confirms that Heesung knows he has crossed a boundary. Yet this awareness produces no corrective action. He does not warn Yoon-Gu, does not acknowledge the risk he is creating for him, and does not assume responsibility for the consequences of being discovered. His concern remains entirely self-directed: embarrassment, inconvenience, exposure. Yoon-Gu’s position is not considered.

The irony is that this silence is beneficial for the chow chow . (chapter 88) It actively conceals Yoon-Gu’s complicity while simultaneously depending on it. Heesung could not have accessed the gym without Yoon-Gu. The most plausible inference is that Yoon-Gu provided entry—either by unlocking the space or by lending legitimacy to Heesung’s presence. Yet when the moment of confrontation approaches, Heesung does not speak. (chapter 88) He does not answer Yoon-Gu’s question—“Is there someone in there?”—because answering would reveal responsibility. Another important detail is that though Yoon-Gu provided the access, he simply followed the actor. The latter is the one opening the door to PT Room and not the member of Team Black. It exposes that the fox is really the one committing the wrongdoing, and he can not blame the chow chow for it.

Silence, here, is not absence of speech but a strategy of avoidance. (special episode 1) Heesung does not negotiate, explain, or repair. He doesn’t give any excuse. He moves through spaces as though access were guaranteed and consequences optional. However, this time, his silence is used against him. (chapter 88) Forgiveness, responsibility, and mutual recognition—central to the arc unfolding elsewhere—are entirely absent from his conduct. Where Joo Jaekyung begins to redistribute choice and accountability, Heesung consolidates control by refusing to speak.

This is why Heesung cannot embody forgiveness in this arc. Forgiveness requires acknowledgment; acknowledgment requires speech; speech requires responsibility. Heesung chooses none of these. Instead, he preserves his self-image by leaving others to absorb the impact of his actions. Yet, in episode 88, it is no longer possible.

In this sense, the flower associated with Heesung and Yoon-Gu never opens. Knowledge is present. While Heesung understands dynamics, motives, and outcomes, the chow chow heard all the information (chapter 52) about the switched spray, but he only reported one thing: Kim Dan is innocent. So while insight is present, responsibility is systematically deferred. Without responsibility, respect cannot follow. And without respect, what appears as connection is merely use, quietly sustained by silence.

In the end, the other two petals do not fail because of ignorance. They fail because knowledge, when severed from responsibility, becomes a tool of avoidance. Love is postponed indefinitely—always imagined, never practiced. On the other hand, since he knows about the champion’s past sexual habits, it signifies that the actor became the witness of TRUE LOVE. Joo Jaekyung is kissing doc Dan. (chapter 88) The irony is that the actor didn’t realize this. He had the impression to be exposed to a similar scene than in the penthouse. (chapter 88) It is important because with this knowledge, he can expose the truth to doc Dan: the athlete loves him. In the past, he could say this without explaining his statement. (chapter 35) And now, pay attention to the logo on the doctor’s t- shirt. (chapter 88) First, it appears on the left side, positioned close to the hamster’s heart. Moreover, it looks like an orange eye. Orange is not only the color of Heesung the fox (chapter 34), but also of friendship and social communication and interaction.

That means, doc Dan is on the verge of having true friends. Joo Jaekyung will stop demanding exclusivity by isolating doc Dan from the others. (chapter 79) Besides, it is the same logo than when Yoon-Gu was spying behind the closed door. (chapter 23) That’s the moment Potato realized the truth about the couple: they were intimate. That’s the reason why I am convinced that Heesung will play the role of the messenger and mediator between the wolf and the hamster.

To conclude, I perceive the actor as the bridge between the two main leads. He embodies language, knowledge, love as feeling, but more importantly he stands for friendship and fun, notions which don’t exist in the main couple’s world yet.

That’s it for the first part. In the second part, I will examine the final panel and the significance of the fighters’ return.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or Manhwa, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Twitter-Tumblr account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Painter Of The Night: Lord Shin’s killer 👿🔪 🩸💀

1. Summary of my previous results

When I wrote the essay the shadow behind the shrine, Lezhin had only released a few panels from season 4. From these few panels, I had come to develop the following theory: Lord Shin had been killed by an elder, an old bearded man. And the latter had disguised himself, though his shoes were betraying him. (chapter 103) The shoes were revealing that he was an official! However, the moment Jung In-Hun resurfaced, I suspected him for a moment, because he had been wearing the boots. (chapter 111) Nonetheless, episode 115 exposed his true role in the conspiracy. He was just an accomplice, for he had entrusted his glasses to the author of the letter. (chapter 115)

2. The new discovery

So who was the shadow in the woods? Then I had a revelation. Thanks to my follower @Chikatta_11, I could distinguish the form of the shadow much better. (chapter 103) The ghost is wearing the hat of an elder, a patriarch. (chapter 67)

This signifies that the person behind the crime must have rushed, for he didn’t remove his jeongjagwan, when he chased lord Shin to the mountain. But this would contradict my idea that the person had disguised himself, for he was wearing the pants of a “low-born” due to his color: grey. (chapter 103) This reinforces my theory that the assassin was not working alone. He needed to have at least one accomplice, for he had to drive him into the woods. (chapter 103) This had been truly a manhunt! Because both people are wearing items belonging to the upper class, I come to the deduction that the perpetrators were elders, both officials.

3. The hat and its owner

And who was wearing a jeongjagwan? So far, we only saw Father Yoon (chapter 82) and Father Lee wearing one. But I am excluding the patriarch Yoon, as the testimony from the masked guard represents the elder’s innocence. (chapter 107) Besides, he doesn’t have any high position and the form of his hat is a little different (3 peaks on the side) (chapter 103) . Thus it could be father Lee or it could have been another yangban, like for example lord Shin’s father himself who was forced to kill his son.😨 And this would explain why lord Shin got so shocked, the moment he recognized the identity of the shadow (chapter 88) Remember what I had written in the essay “The shadow behind the shrine”. This picture exposes betrayal, something lord Shin was not expecting at all. And what is the worst betrayal? The son backstabbed by his own father! And we would have two elders involved! Naturally, this signifies that they were working together during that night.

Under this new perspective, it becomes comprehensible why lord Song mentioned this crime as a normality: (chapter 107) If the king executed his own son, the patriarch Yoon Chang-Hyeon could do the same. It was actually justifying the violation of Confucianism. For me, this topic was brought up, because a father had been put in the very same situation! He had to sacrifice his own son. And note what the gossiping woman criticized on the street: (chapter 106) The young nobles would always be protected by their fathers. Therefore it is not surprising why the schemers desired Yoon Chang-Hyeon to experience the same, the abandonment and the loss of a heir! Hence the second young master got targeted first. Thus lord Song only proposed the main lead’s assassination after making this first suggestion: (chapter 107) He was initially trying to repeat the same action from the past, but he failed. Therefore he targeted Yoon Seungho, and this time, the elder master gave in: (chapter 107) However, the cause for this assassination was blackmail. (chapter 107) It is because he needed a justification for the meddling in the Yoons’ affair. The document in question is the petition Yoon Seungwon stole from his father: (chapter 118) This explicates why the assassination failed, as Yoon Seungho was not the real owner of the paper. (chapter 116) In other words, both brothers were protecting each other in a certain sense. But by entrusting the petition to Baek Na-Kyum, Yoon Seungwon turned the painter into a target! (chapter 116)

So when lord Shin recognized the face in front of him, he got shocked. (chapter 103) He thought that his father as an official would protect him, like he has always done in the past. And this observation brings me to the following panel: (chapter 88) In the bedchamber next to Baek Na-Kyum, Yoon Seungho was recalling a memory, but he couldn’t just identify the face, for his memory had been long repressed. The latter had refused to listen to him exactly like with lord Shin in the woods: (chapter 103) Striking is that the mysterious man refused to help the injured aristocrat too. In fact, he killed him, for he represented a threat for him. Because the main lead imagined to see his father’s shadow who refused to listen to his words (chapter 88), I come to the conclusion that this shadow was Kim’s. (chapter 88) Why? It is because the latter has always refused to side with Yoon Seungho and embodies passivity and silence. Note that the shadow remained silent. But let’s not forget that the murderer was wearing special boots, a clue that he has a position in the administration. Because lord Song in episode 107 (chapter 107) stated that he was no longer an official, we could exclude him as a suspect, unless he is lying. For me, he is not telling the truth. Honestly, he is wearing a purple hanbok which is actually reserved to people close to the royal family. Moreover, the hanbok has a design indicating that he is not poor, living in seclusion. Besides, let’s not forget the comment from the kisaeng welcoming him. He hadn’t come to the gibang for a while. (chapter 107) Why? There exist 2 possibilities. Either he lived in exile or he was living in Hanyang and working as an official. I am more tending more towards the second possibility. Why? It is because he spent a lot of money for that night in episode 107: (chapter 107) Hence the kisaengs were asked to welcome the important guest at the gate. He was definitely a rich influential nobleman.

Furthermore, I would like the manwhaphiles to recall Min’s statements. He was powerful, thus he could have people killed easily (chapter 76) or he could save Yoon Seungho, even when the latter had assassinated lord Jang (chapter 102) Why was he so sure? It is because his father had a high position. He was definitely relying on his father’s influence! And now, observe the evolution of the story. Black Heart is now framed for everything, he has become the scapegoat! (chapter 113) This explicates why Min was accused of lord Shin’s murder. (Chapter 107) The purpose was to hide the intervention of a third party! Note that Yoon Seungho suspected his father immediately after visiting the burned shrine. He is not envisioning the involvement of other elders. Anyway, the blame on Black Heart signifies that the reputation of Min’s family has been tarnished, unless this gossip was created for the learned sir’s ears. If this gossip is circulating around, not only Min’s father lost his heir, but also he failed in his duty to keep the lineage (chapter 82) Another interesting aspect is that Byeonduck revealed the names of the perpetrators in the shrine: “Lee Jihwa”, lord Jang, lord Shin, lord Park and Min. Finally, according to my theory, the Webtoonist created different people who looked like “lord Song” from episode 83 (chapter 83), for the latter had been seen wearing a purple hanbok with a design. However, the hair color, the shape of the beard and the design of the hanbok indicate that we are dealing with different people.

  • chapter 107:
  • Chapter 115:
  • Chapter 116:

Thus I am suspecting that these men could be related to the perpetrators in the shrine. They would have a motive to target the protagonist and the Yoons in general! It is because they lost their sons, but they can not denunciate Yoon Seungho for his crime, because their involvement would be exposed. In my opinion, their crimes and lies from the past are now coming to the surface! That’s the reason why they are not seeking for justice, rather for revenge and a new purge would be the perfect.tool to bury the truth. Under this premise, it explains why Jung In-Hun was approached and was tasked to rekindle with Baek Na-Kyum. (chapter 118) They needed him to betray Yoon Seungho.

But I have another reason to suspect an official, an elder involved in the murder of lord Shin. It is related to the Jeongjagwan and its symbolism:

Is this a coincidence that the perpetrator was wearing such a hat in the mountain? (chapter 103) I doubt it! Actually, it exposes the elders’ hypocrisy! They embodies the opposite notions: cowardice, immaturity and stupidity! As you can imagine, I am more than ever convinced that father Lee is involved in the new plot. My reasoning is the following. Who saw “lord Song” with the purple hanbok? (chapter 83) Yoon Chang-Hyeon and Yoon Seungho… thus he purchased the ghost in town (chapter 106). But the Lees were present either, yet they never talked to the guests directly. (chapter 83) How did Lee Jihwa know his name? (chapter 83) And observe what the learned sir said after burning the letter: (chapter 115) Min has also been investigating Yoon Seungho’s past in order to find his weaknesses. However, he couldn’t find the person lord Song! As you can see, this name oozes mystery and danger. And this reinforces my theory that people have been impersonating “lord Song” and the latter’s name has become a taboo! And that would fit to No-Name’s situation. (chapter 76) He doesn’t possess a name, and as such he has no identity. Moreover, he is wearing a mask indicating that he is playing different roles. Moreover, he often vanishes. He is like a ghost! Exactly like lord Song… Yoon Seungho only knows his name, but he has not been able to identify his face! (chapter 86)

4. The position of his corpse

At the end, the manhwalovers could see his corpse lying on his stomach. It was, as if the culprits didn’t wish to see lord Shin’s gaze. He had been stabbed from behind. (chapter 103) Another important detail was the absence of footprints in the snow. The imprint would have revealed the identity of the perpetrators: the boots, the evidence of the involvement of officials. To conclude, the elders are responsible for the young lords’ death: Min, lord Jang, lord Park and lord Shin! By tricking Yoon Seungho and Min, the result was that they were forced to dirty their own hands.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Tumblr-Twitter account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Painter Of The Night: The reality of nightmare (podcast/video)

Please support the authors by reading the manhwas on the official websites. This is where you can read the manhwa Painter Of The Night. But be aware that this manhwa is a mature Yaoi, which means, it is about homosexuality with explicit scenes. If you want to read more essays, here is the link to the table of contents of Painter Of The Night.

It would be great if you could make some donations/sponsoring: Ko-fi.com/bebebisous33  That way, you can support me with “coffee” so that I have the energy to keep examining manhwas. Besides, I need to cover up the expenses for this blog.

This is my second podcast. I am quite in a hurry, because I would like to share my observations and thoughts concerning chapter 115. However, due to a students exchange, I am still running out of time, as the release of episode 116 is right around the corner. It is still lacking, for I had not the time to write the text. I just took notes, hence I had to speak freely. Nonetheless, contrary to my first podcast, I am now including the pictures. Sorry for the hesitations and my French accent.

Play the video while listening to my podcast.

Like mentioned in the video, one common denominator between episode 83 and 115 is deception. While the guest Lee Jihwa got deceived by his friend with a prank, the learned sir is about to get deceived by lord Song. In my opinion, the latter has already decided to get rid of Jung In-Hun, the moment the learned sir is no longer useful. Why? He needs to eliminate the witness of his intervention. In fact, he just needs to reveal some information in delay. The scholar hated the protagonist Yoon Seungho and he tried to seek revenge on him. He betrayed him on many occasions, thus he looked into his past in order to discover any weakness. In other words, once the Yoons are removed, the schemers plan to frame the learned sir for „Yoon Seungho‘s death“. Hence he abused his position and framed the Yoons in order to cover up his crime!! For me, father Lee and lord Song are following the principle: one hand washes the other. That way, they can keep their hands clean!! And who would expose the learned sir‘s „crime“ to the monarch in delay? Kim… who could appear as a loyal servant to Yoon Seungho, though he couldn‘t stop the tragedy!! Thus the lord had this vision in episode 83. (chapter 83) Besides, don‘t forget that Black Heart got fooled himself and ended up dead. But like I outlined it before, their plan won‘t work because of the butterfly „Baek Na-Kyum“.

So while in episode 111, the learned sir thought, he was getting closer to his dream, he experienced a huge awakening within a few hours. He lost everything and this was done on purpose. The schemers desired him to lose everything so that he would do something reckless out of hatred and envy. The higher he climbs, the harder he falls! The reality is that he is just a greedy, arrogant and selfish man. He was never satisfied with his own life. He thought, he was destined to greatness! Yoon Seungho as the mirror of truth was exposing him to reality which the learned sir rejected in the end. (Chapter 115) The reality was too painful, hence he chose the illusion, thinking that with his new position, he would be able to do anything, especially if he is getting the support from lord Song. In my opinion, he is falling into a trap. He would realize it, if he pondered and didn‘t let his emotions cloud his judgement. Lord Song waited for his suffering and humiliation. By rejecting reality, the learned sir chose the nightmare, a very unpleasant and frightening experience.

The painter‘s dreams always come true!

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Tumblr-Twitter account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Painter Of The Night: The enigmatic and dark face 👹behind the purple hanbok 🟣 (second version)

Please support the authors by reading the manhwas on the official websites. This is where you can read the manhwa. https://www.lezhinus.com/en/comic/painter But be aware that this manhwa is a mature Yaoi, which means, it is about homosexuality with explicit scenes. If you want to read more essays, here is the link to the table of contents:  https://bebebisous33analyses.wordpress.com/2020/07/04/table-of-contents-painter-of-the-night

It would be great if you could make some donations/sponsoring: Ko-fi.com/bebebisous33  That way, you can support me with “coffee” so that I have the energy to keep examining manhwas. Besides, I need to cover up the expenses for this blog.

As you have already noticed, I am writing less about Painter Of The Night, though this manhwa remains my favorite story. The problem is that more and more people are moving away from the Korean webtoon for different reasons, like the absence of eroticism, or Lee Jihwa and No-Name are no longer included in the story. Another reason is that the author is focusing more and more on the mystery and as such on the lord’s past. This means that right now, the manhwaphiles are asked to read the manhwa like detectives looking for evidences and traces. Finally, I believe that the biggest reason for the loss of interest is that the manhwalovers hoped to witness more romance, yet Baek Na-Kyum keeps suffering and this partially because of Yoon Seungho’s “bad decisions”. Some readers couldn’t understand why Yoon Seungho would run after the man in the purple hanbok. (chapter 106) How could he abandon his lover like that? For some readers, he acted like a fool. Nevertheless, his reaction was normal, because the man with the purple hanbok represents the cause for Yoon Seungho’s martyrdom. This means that the ghost with the purple hanbok symbolizes danger for the protagonist. And if he gets targeted, his lover will suffer too. Striking is that during the same day and night, there is another person wearing a purple hanbok: Yoon Seungho! (chapter 107) Therefore it is no coincidence that in chapter 107, he was portrayed as a source of danger for the elder master Yoon and the mysterious “lord Song”. (chapter 107) According to “lord Song”, him and Yoon Chang-Hyeon were forced to renounce their position because of Yoon Seungho. In this image, the villain implies that the main lead is a blackmailer. (chapter 107) In other words, in episode 107, the manhwalovers are witnessing a fight between 2 men wearing a purple hanbok!! In this story, purple is the symbol for violence and peril. This explicates why Byeonduck employed this color, when Yoon Seungho was portrayed as a ruthless lord: (chapter 10) Under this new approach, it becomes comprehensible why the artist was wearing a purple hanbok after the bloodbath. (chapter 102) He was the reason for the “purge”. From my perspective, the artist is cleaning the “place”, hence he is the target of the villains and antagonists. At the same time, this color represents Joseon’s royalty, hence it is no coincidence that the king was mentioned in this very episode. (chapter 107) Therefore my theory that Baek Na-Kyum is related to the ruler gets reinforced. However, in episode 107, only the main lead and the new villain were seen with the purple hanbok, therefore in this essay, I will examine not only the new character “lord Song”, but also Yoon Seungho!

1. Between poker face and face like thunder

In the latest episode, some manhwalovers were upset, when they saw Yoon Seungho turning his back on the painter. (chapter 107) They had the impression that he was abandoning the artist one more time. And that’s how the painter felt the situation either! That’s the reason why Baek Na-Kyum was upset. (chapter 107) It was, as if the main lead was acting like the patriarch Yoon. This perception got reinforced, because the lord had a poker face and didn’t talk to his lover. (chapter 107) However, we could see before that the main lead was far from being detached, when it comes to Baek Na-Kyum. When he entered the study, his visage oozed shock and worries. (chapter 107) This truly divulges that the artist means everything to the lord! But there is more to it. I would like to point out that the noble did listen to Baek Na-Kyum who criticized the doctor’s diagnosis. (chapter 107) Yoon Seungho didn’t side with the old bearded man in front of the painter. He thanked the man and sent away him with respect. (chapter 107) So he gave the impression that he was listening to the painter. However, the reality was that at the end, he still listened to the doctor thinking that it was for the painter’s best interest. Since Baek Na-Kyum was traumatized from the sexual assault, the main lead thought that he was hiding his illness or he was in denial. What caught my attention is that Yoon Seungho followed the doctor leaving the artist in the bedchamber alone. On the one hand, this could be perceived as a prison, yet I judge his gesture as the opposite. It is to protect Baek Na-Kyum! In Yoon Seungho’s mind, behind the closed door, his lover won’t see or hear what is happening in the courtyard. He will be protected from cruel reality.

2. The lord and the physician

Since the main lead was very courteous towards the physician, it shows thatYoon Seungho valued the physician’s effort and talent. He trusted the man like his father did with the other physician. While Yoon Seungho appeared emotionless, the doctor had no poker face during his explanation, he was even caught smiling: (chapter 107) He showed no real empathy for Baek Na-Kyum. It was, as if he was showing Schadenfreude. But this doesn’t end here. Kim brought a different doctor. It is not the same physician who assisted Baek Na-Kyum a month ago!! (chapter 107) First, the clothes diverge. The belt is blue, his sleeves are covered with some white protections. (chapter 107) (chapter 103) Finally, the white hanbok is much longer, and his pants are blue, while the other had white trousers. In my essay “The mysterious doctor”, I had already pointed out the existence of different physicians. But now, I have a definite proof for this interpretation. (chapter 107) How could he say that his health had deteriorated since a month ago? This is how the artist looked like a month ago: (chapter 103) (chapter 103) He was under the influence of the aphrodisiac, and he could have died of an overdose. (chapter 103) His face and his body were covered with bruises. How could the doctor say that his condition had worsened? This means that he had not seen the patient a month ago. To sum up, the doctor was impersonating his fellow. Note that he claimed to have prescribed the drug himself. (chapter 107) Striking is that the doctor is often utilizing the expression “seem” and “imagine”, yet a physician should use facts and as such symptoms. But he never did. The idioms exposed his manipulation, this was not a real examination. The author made sure to confuse the readers. They had seen the painter vomiting before, hence it looked that the physician was right. (chapter 106) However, this image displays the betrayal from the physician, for I believe that this represents his view The latter had seen the artist in the restroom, but he had not intervened!! Besides, just because the artist had disgorged once, this doesn’t signify that he had done it all the time for one month. This is how the artist looked like, while he was walking through the street: (chapter 104) He looked healthy and happy. The reason for his nervousness was the lord’s actions during that day. Moreover, the painter’s hand had been scratched… yet you see no bandage around his hand. (Chapter 107) As you can see, the doctor was exaggerating, as he was generalizing the regurgitation! (chapter 107) This means that the painter was telling the truth! To conclude, the physician was utilizing the butler’s MO: mixing a truth with a lie. And turning an incident into a generality, and as such into a prejudice.

Observe that during the same episode, Yoon Seungho had a sudden revelation, he had discovered that the form of the mouth was betraying the thoughts and emotions of the counterpart: (chapter 107) Yoon Seungho was slowly realizing that his butler has not been telling the truth. He was gritting his teeth exposing his discomfort! This gesture indicates that someone has to endure something unpleasant, has to control himself and persevere. However, he was telling the opposite to his master: he had nothing to worry!! He should do nothing and simply lie low. The authorities had no suspicion about him. That’s the reason why the main lead desired to talk to the valet (chapter 107), and he got angry, for his servant was talking back and not answering him properly. (chapter 107) We could say that the latter was not obeying his lord. Striking is that the domestic was also lying, for he feigned ignorance first, before giving a more precise answer. (chapter 107) It looks like valet Kim and the physician got away with their tricks, for neither the doctor nor the the butler got admonished in the bedchamber. But what caught my attention is that after hearing the words from his lover, he replied that way: (chapter 107) This expression (“I see”) is important, because it could be the indication that the noble could discern the truth with his mind’s eye, like this (chapter 107) or the opposite, though I am still optimistic. We will see in the next chapter.

Nevertheless, after 3 seasons, the lord was taught that he should trust his lover. In season 4, he is hiding the truth from the painter, for he wished to spare his lover’s mind and heart. This has nothing to do with faith, but for Baek Na-Kyum it leaves a different impression. Yoon Seungho might have doubted his words here…. (chapter 106), but we shouldn’t overlook that later the painter had yelled in order to voice his opinion which had caught his companion by surprise. (chapter 107) Therefore I thought that the noble would believe Baek Na-Kyum, but in reality, the opposite happened. He acted exactly like his father, trusting the words from the doctor. Let’s not forget that Yoon Seungho was drugged since his youth because of Kim and the physician!! (chapter 57) The father was convinced that his son had been ill for a long time. And from the mysterious “lord Song”, the manhwalovers discovered that the main lead was fed with an aphrodisiac: (chapter 107) (chapter 57) Therefore the doctor’s statement in episode 57 appears in a different light: he knew what he was prescribing! He knew what Yoon Chang-Hyeon desired thanks to the idiom “the wayward yang energies”. It was to provoke an erection. I would like to expose that the physician deceived the painter, (chapter 57) for at the end, the physician admitted that he had given the “solution” to the father. The father had received the medicine!! [For more read the essay “Yoon Seungho and the puzzled physician”] That’s the reason why I am suspecting that the lord’s cold demeanor is not linked to the artist, rather to the physician who “smiled” 🙄 while accusing the painter of lying. (chapter 107) He was hiding his illness, he was in denial. Nonetheless, the form of his mouth was betraying him. Moreover, don’t forget what the painter had said to his lover before: (chapter 106) He was supposed to get a drink from the physician. So the lord could remember the artist’s words and perceive the doctor as a traitor and liar. He could jump to the conclusion that the man had given his lover a drug. Under this new light, it dawned on me that the artist could have been telling the truth to his lover there: (chapter 106) He could have eaten something at the kisaeng house, and as such been drugged there. This would explain why the couple got interrupted while eating. (chapter 106) That way, the “doctor” would not be suspected of a crime. Besides, according to me, the couple was actually sitting in the courtyard where the medicine store was!!

Finally, let’s not forget that the doctors often got threatened by Kim: (chapter 33) (chapter 65) Furthermore, in season 1, the artist had been forced to drink an aphrodisiac. So far, the main lead has never threatened or suspected a doctor. As you can see, there is a strong connection between the doctor and death! To sum up, we are witnessing the start of the storm… and when the painter was recovering, this represented the calm before the storm!!

3. The lord’s revelation

And now, it is important to explain why the main lead returned to the shaman’s shrine. He seemed to have forgotten his lover. (chapter 107) It is related to the rumors he heard in the street. (chapter 106) The woman announced that the sacred tree had burned to the ground!! That’s the reason why it was gone… However, her words were just lies, for the tree is still standing there. (chapter 107) But note that she connected the incident to misfortune! In other words, she was denying the intervention of humans!! However, the lord had visited the place of his crime before. (chapter 104) This is what he had been told: the intervention of ghosts or spirits!! On the other hand, the unknown speaker had never mentioned the tree! Only the house had burned down. Nonetheless, even this statement was a lie, for the house was still standing too. (chapter 104) The anonymous tattler has been actually deforming the reality which Yoon Seungho had accepted as such back then!! But due to the grapevines, the lord noticed that he had been misinformed. There were differences between the declaration of the anonymous witness and the gossips which forced him to return to the scene of the crime. Because the tree was still standing, the lord recognized that he had been deceived: not only the tree was intact, but also the house despite the traces of a fire. That’s the reason why he looked in the direction of the building. (chapter 107) For the second time, he was using his own senses. This means that he was no longer relying on the informant’s eyes and ears! Nonetheless, this time, it is concerning his perception of his own surroundings, and no longer how to judge the artist. To conclude, he is now slowly using his own eyes and mind’s eye to perceive reality and as such the truth. For the house was not burned down, it implies that bodies were not turned into ashes. (chapter 106) Since the schemers are mixing a lie with the truth, the lord heard that lord Shin had been killed during that night! However, when the lord had assassinated Black Heart and his friends, the young noble had never met lord Shin! Hence the gossips in town made the lord recognize that something huge is about to happen: a manhunt, and he could get into trouble. Besides, the grapevines are revealing the existence of witnesses and the main lead is aware that the noona is an important « witness ». But the problem is that by mixing each time a lie with a fact, the schemers are not realizing that the truth is coming to the surface, as minus and minus make plus.

Striking is that the author never revealed the identity of the speaker (chapter 104) Why? It is to keep the mysterious vibe, to encourage the manhwalovers to ponder on the identity of the informant. One thing was sure, the lord was the listener due to the expression “I shudder to think”! Thus he didn’t use his mind’s eye in that scene. I am suspecting that the valet was the one who had informed his master. I have two reasons for suspecting him. First, this view is quite similar to this picture from chapter 50: (chapter 50) Here, the butler had tattled on the painter so that the noble would distance himself from his sex partner. And in episode 104, we have a similar situation: through suggestions, the main lead was encouraged to send back the painter to the kisaeng house. Secondly, why would the lord think of the butler, when he saw the sacred tree? (chapter 107) It is because the valet is connected to this place. From my point of view, the noble discovered the truth: his father is involved in the plot, though Yoon Chang-Hyeon is just a tool to wound and weaken him. That’s the reason why he remembered his father’s mouth from that night: displeasure and hatred. (chapter 107) At the same time, I couldn’t help myself associating this image to this one: (chapter 88) During that night, he discovered warmth, loyalty and tenderness! In the darkness, the lord could detect the presence of the light: the painter! During that night, they vowed fidelity to each other. And in the garden next to the shrine, Yoon Seungho made the opposite experience: it was dawning on him that people from his own family, Kim and Yoon Chang-Hyeon, (chapter 88) are lying to him and even betraying him, especially if his life is threatened. Let’s not forget that this time, the lord did commit a crime and he is aware of this. In the bedchamber, the lord had criticized his own father, nonetheless he still thought that his father had just made a bad decision. (Chapter 86) His words implied that the elder master Yoon had never intended to wound him. It was just because of his stupid believes: (Chapter 82) Preserving the continuity of the lineage and ensuring that the Yoons remain powerful and wealthy. However, in front of the tree, the lord is slowly recognizing that his father is about to ruin him for his own sake.

That’s the reason why in the same chapter, the author put the elder master Yoon in the same situation, he is not using his own senses and as such his mind’s eye. Hence he is repeating the same mistake. He would still choose to trust lord Song and his black guards (chapter 107), and abandon his own son. This (chapter 107) He listened to the reports of others. This signifies that he chose darkness over the truth. That’s the reason why his face is now covered by a shadow, he is turning his back on the light. (chapter 107) This image is the negative reflection from the night of the revelation in season 2. Despite the betrayal and agony, (chapter 62) the main lead chose not to punish his lover (chapter 63), he even swore that he would never let him go. (chapter 63) As the manhwalovers can detect, the main lead was always able not to get swallowed by the darkness, thanks to the artist, he could still see the light. However, his father is making the opposite decision, unaware that he is “doomed” to fail! Karma is already waiting for him. And because the patriarch is now living in the darkness, he can not recognize the manipulations, as he is forced to use others to guide him.

This is particularly visible in episode 107. Yoon Chang-Hyeon never went to the shrine, thus he is unaware that there are traces to be found!! The house and the tree are not razed! Moreover, (chapter 107) the branch on the ground is the evidence that someone set fire to the shaman’s shrine and the tree! Secondly, the black guard deceived the patriarch: (chapter 107) Lord Shin was murdered afterwards and not before Black Heart and his friend!! The word “later” is relevant, for it implies that the young yangban was killed close to the place where the nobles Min and his friends were sentenced. But his body is lying elsewhere! (chapter 103) This signifies that Yoon Chang-Hyeon is innocent! He never murdered Lord Shin in the woods, for he relied on the assistance of the helping hands. He never visited himself the scene of the crime. (chapter 103) At the same time, we can exclude that the black guard was the one killing the young scholar, for his pants are rather brown than grey. (chapter 107) Nevertheless, the helping hand is far from innocent, because he is deceiving the bearded man. And now take a closer look to the black guards from episode 99: These two men are different, for their mask is white and not black. Besides, their clothes are black and not brown. Finally, the belt diverges as well: a huge purple strip with a different color in the middle, while the other guard is only wearing a simple ribbon. Thus I am inclined to think that the black guard is not only manipulating Yoon Chang-Hyeon, but he is also in truth working for someone else. Moreover, why would the man cover his face in the room, if he is truly working for the patriarch? (chapter 86) And this observation leads me to the following question: when was lord Yoon informed about the protagonist’s crime and lord Shin’s death? (chapter 107) As you can see, timing is essential. And how did the elder master Yoon know about lord Song’s visit at the gibang? Everything is pointing out that during this night, people are plotting against the couple. And the elder master Yoon took Lee Jihwa’s place.

But why would the schemers wait for a month before deciding to attack and frame Yoon Seungho? (chapter 102) From my point of view, it is related to Lee Jihwa. My theory is that the elder Lee can frame the main lead for assassinating his son, because during that night, Black Heart was dressed like Lee Jihwa. They needed the corpses to be decomposed so that father Lee could claim that Yoon Seungho had killed his son!! And the hanbok would serve to identify the corpse. In addition, he would use the incident with the sword as an evidence for his lunacy. (Chapter 67) It is important that the red-haired master is not perceived as traitor, rather as a victim. Moreover, since some time passed on, people have already forgotten the friend’s confession in the inn. However, the elder master Lee will never report Yoon Seungho to the authorities, it has to come from the father himself. That way, his involvement will never be detected. From my point of view, the schemers are trying to turn father and son against each other so that the Yoons get destructed. One might reject my theory about the implication of father Lee, but let me ask you this… What are “Lord Song” (chapter 107) and Lee Jihwa’s colors? (chapter 12) Purple and yellow, right? Observe that the lord is wearing the same colors during that night: a purple hanbok with a yellow scarf! (chapter 107) This is no coincidence.

Purple and yellow are complementary colors, which means they sit on opposite sides of the color wheel. Yellow and purple paint mixed together makes brown. The type of purple and yellow you choose can affect how light or dark the brown appears. The result is usually a lighter brown. ” Quoted from https://www.color-meanings.com/what-color-purple-yellow-make-mixed/

And what is the patriarch Lee’s color? BROWN! (chapter 67) Under this new perspective, it becomes comprehensible why I am suspecting that this guard (Chapter 107) is actually working for father Lee while faking to help Yoon Chang-Hyeon. He is wearing brown pants and his shirt is maintained with a purple ribbon! Besides, we need to question ourselves where the father is staying: And now, it is time to focus on the mysterious “lord Song”.

4. Lord Song, the man with the purple hanbok

Finally, the author revealed the face of “lord Song”. (chapter 107) Furthermore, he could be recognized with the purple hanbok. (chapter 107) However, if you compare the form of the beard and the nose, the manhwaphiles can quickly recognize that Lee Jihwa saw someone else in the past, although the hanbok seems to have the same pattern than in episode 83. (chapter 83) Besides, another divergence is that the faceless lord Song has a rebellious strand in the neck which is not the same with “lord Song” from episode 107. As you can see, I deduce that we are dealing with two different “lord Song”. But this doesn’t end here. Secondly, according to father Lee, the man lost his home! (chapter 82) So how can he be wearing a purple hanbok, if he lost his position and home? This color is reserved for important people. In addition, when he entered the kisaeng house, the artist’s noona called him differently: (chapter 107) She called him “lord Haseon” and not “lord Song”! Interesting is that neither the Korean nor the Spanish version utilizes such a name! I don’t think that the translator took the liberty to create a fictional name. Hence I am deducing that the author is trying to leave different clues in each version!! Naturally, Haseon could be his first name, yet there is no ambiguity that this man has a bad reputation among the kisaeng house. He was called “lecher” and in the Spanish version, he was described as sexual maniac. (chapter 107) Hence I doubt that the noona would feel so close to such a man and address him with his “first name”. On the other hand, the kisaeng has a drop of sweat on her face, which is a sign for a lie and deception. (Chapter 107) Nevertheless, here she was talking to herself. Thus I deduce that she was deceiving herself. But where did she lie? The important guest had announced his arrival, so his visit was never « Out of the blue…? » This explicates why many kisaengs were gathered next to the gate while waiting for the arrival of the « honorable » guest. (Chapter 107) This signifies that « lord Haseon » is true, while « out of the blue » is the lie.

Finally, let’s not forget that during the same day, we saw different “lord Song” strolling through the street!! According to me, 3 different enigmatic men wearing a purple hanbok. And now pay attention to this: (chapter 86) We also have three men in this scene… For me, it becomes clear that the man facing Yoon Chang-Hyeon has been impersonating the real “lord Song”, and the stupid patriarch has never recognized the “prank”. Now, I am even questioning if Yoon Chang-Hyeon is even able to identify lord Song correctly!! I mean, due to the name and the color of the hanbok… he could be thinking that he is meeting lord Song again. Imagine that they have not seen each other for 10 years!! (chapter 107) Besides, Yoon Chang-Hyeon’s vision of the world is based on the words from lord Song and others. Who informed him about the whereabouts of « lord Song » in the gibang? The man had not come to the kisaeng house for a long time. Because of this information, the patriarch is led to think that he is meeting « lord Song ». His perception of the world and his eldest son is embossed by lord Song. Thus he repeats the same expression from his counterpart: “lowly beast”. (Chapter 107) (chapter 107) Finally, like outlined above, the main lead imagined that he was meeting the same doctor, while in truth it was not the case. So « old friend » could be deceiving:. (Chapter 107) He could be one of the three men! The real « lord Song » who brought pain to Yoon Seungho is someone else. Let’s not forget that Kim fears the man, (chapter 56) and his statement implies that Yoon Seungho is usually not allowed to ignore the man’s request: (Chapter 56). « At this time » stands in opposition to « always » which means that he can reject the invitation only because he is sick. To conclude, for me, this is not the lord Song Yoon Seungho hates and fears!

What caught my attention is that the mysterious and evil « lord Song » calls the young main lead « lowly beast » (chapter 107) which actually reflects the mind-set of the speaker. He is projecting his own thoughts and emotions onto the protagonist. In reality, he is the one licentious and we know that for sure, as the kisaengs are the witnesses of his perversion. Thus he is called « a lecher » and they wish to avoid him like the pest! (Chapter 107) Moreover, he didn’t visit the kisaeng house for a long time, (Chapter 107) yet his recent short visits left such a negative impression on the noonas. (Chapter 107) Hence they judge him as a pervert. And since the head-kisaeng received him at the gate, this signifies that this man has been in contact with the kisaeng house and in particular with the kisaeng leading him to the room.

The bearded man claims that he has been punished like the elder master Yoon (chapter 107), but note that his words are contradicting father Lee’s version! The former never mentions the loss of his home, in fact, only the elder master Yoon lost everything! (chapter 107) This statement confirms that the protagonist’s father is so stupid, because he is blinded by his hatred and resent. He is not detecting the contradictions. But we have another source confirming that this “lord Song” is actually fake!! (chapter 37) The fake servant NEVER mentioned the retirement of lord Song. As you already know, for me, No-Name is the real lord Song who took the blame for everything, for he let people use his “name”. The most terrible thing is that “lord Song” puts the blame on Yoon Chang-Hyeon, when he explains his failure about the sexual education. (chapter 107) The main lead was too young back, and this was the father’s decision to let his son receive such a sexual education and even to feed him with some drug. Remember that the patriarch is the one who procured the aphrodisiac, for he followed the suggestion from others. As you can see, lord Song is putting the responsibility onto the elder master Yoon. At the same time, he insinuates that the lord’s fever back then was the result of the abuse of aphrodisiac. But is it true? Why am I doubting his words? First, the painter had become ill due to the sex marathon. (Chapter 33) Secondly, how does the lord know about the master’s illness, when his fever was only discovered after the straw mat beating? (Chapter 77) Besides, no physician had been fetched back then. Finally, how can lord Song remember the lord’s condition so well after 10 years? It is because he is using the diagnosis on the painter from the previous doctor: (chapter 103) Here, the man with the purple hanbok was utilizing the painter’s illness to hide his own crime. Under the pretense to help « Yoon Seungho » to become a man, the man abused him not only physically, but also sexually. There is no doubt that this reconversion was fake!

And since his strategy worked in the past, he makes the same suggestion. He offers his assistance to educate his second son: (chapter 107) However, the trick doesn’t work, exactly like No-Name’s prediction: (chapter 76) But there is another reason why Yoon Chang-Hyeon doesn’t get fooled a second time. (chapter 107) It is because he would be forced to question himself, if he is not the cause for this disposition: (chapter 107) That’s the reason why he puts the whole blame on his eldest son.

Furthermore, the manhwaphiles could detect that the « sexual education » didn’t last one night, but days! Compare the two following pictures: (Chapter 86)(chapter 107) In episode 86, there are two kisaengs and 3 men next to the main lead. I am excluding the father. The young master’s hands were tied with a white ribbon, and he still had his jacket on. However, in the second picture, the ties are now black and he is no longer in possession of his white jacket. How could they remove his shirt, when his hands were attached? This means that we are witnessing a different night. Striking is that it is raining, exactly like during the scene in episode 77. (Chapter 77) Thus I come to the following deduction: Yoon Seungho was sentenced to the straw mat beating, because after 2 nights, he had not been able to « have an erection ». They mixed a truth with a lie: (chapter 107) They never let him have an erection, for he was always tied up!!

But what caught my attention is that the lecher (chapter 107) was sitting exactly like Min. (chapter 52) And what had Black Heart thought during that night? He had wished to taste the artist, while before he had desired his death. This is not random at all. There is a strong connection between death and sex which is also present in the conversation between lord Song and his « old friend ». The former reproached the elder master Yoon to have protected his son for too long. (Chapter 107) Yet, the readers could witness that this was not the case, as the father had refused to send for a doctor, when Yoon Seungho had become ill. But who was protecting whom here? Naturally, Yoon Seungho is the one who has always helped his father. Note that despite being the real owner of the mansion, he never tried to dethrone his father. He still protected his father’s reputation. (Chapter 78)

Observe that the painter was supposed to be in the kisaeng house, if he had not detected his lover’s departure! (chapter 107) Hence I am now assuming that this night is a reflection from chapter 67 and 69!! Min’s plan! (chapter 69) He had gone to the kisaeng house with the hope that the artist would return with his noona, and back then he had impersonated Lee Jihwa for the first time. (chapter 69) As the manhwalovers can detect, the sudden return of lord Haseon is intentional. So who is he targeting here? (Chapter 107) Here, the fake lord Song never named the protagonist specifically, he just employed the idiom « lad ». For me, the real schemers are after the painter, for the latter painted a picture which exposes the real lord Song’s crime: the sexual abuse. For me, the « document » is the erotic publication. Yet, the evil joker is gaslighting the patriarch by implying that he is now blackmailed by his own son. They need to remove the main lead in order to be able to target Baek Na-Kyum. Besides, I have already outlined that the artist is a witness and victim of Lee Jihwa’s crimes… just like he is a witness of the fake lord Song’s abuse. Thus the noona said this: (chapter 107) Her words indicate that these two characters know each other.

Note that the father is incited to kill his own son, for the latter represents a source of threat for his ambition. He could ruin Yoon Seungwon’s career. (Chapter 107) To conclude, the schemers are presenting the main lead as a hindrance to the patriarch’s dream. (chapter 107) Striking is that the man implied that Yoon Seungho would blackmail the father and lord Song because of a document. But this statement is wrong! The main lead never threatened his own father… First, he only reminded him of the past and the accusation for “treason”. (chapter 86) (chapter 86) He was the keeper of his secret!! This explicates why the fake lord Song mentions « lad » and not the main lead. He gaslighted his counterpart, and created a false reality, while for me, it is clear that the real source of threat is Baek Na-Kyum. And who wanted him to be removed from the main lead’s side? Father Lee! (Chapter 82) In fact, both schemers have one goal in common: the couple is the victim and witness of their « crimes ».

To conclude, while Yoon Seungho stands for love, sanity, truth and reality, the other man with the purple hanbok symbolizes abuse, perversion, deception and illusions. Whereas the father is about to get deceived a second time, I believe that the opposite is happening to Yoon Seungho. Since the latter saw the ghost in town during that day, he can only deduce that « lord Song » is assisting his father again, exactly like in the past.

PS: I still have so much to tell, especially about the kisaengs and the abuse in the gibang. However, I can only write a new one, when this analysis reaches at least 100 views.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Tumblr-Twitter account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Painter Of The Night: The shadowy plot(s) 👀 from the past 🙊

This is where you can read the manhwa. https://www.lezhinus.com/en/comic/painter But be aware that this manhwa is a mature Yaoi, which means, it is about homosexuality with explicit scenes. If you want to read more essays, here is the link to the table of contents:  https://bebebisous33analyses.wordpress.com/2020/07/04/table-of-contents-painter-of-the-night

It would be great if you could make some donations/sponsoring: Ko-fi.com/bebebisous33  That way, you can support me with “coffee” so that I have the energy to keep examining manhwas. Besides, I need to cover up the expenses for this blog.

There is a reason why I selected the illustration of season 4 for this essay, though my focus is the past, and more precisely Yoon Seungho’s suffering. It is because the darkness surrounding the protagonist not only refers to his tragic youth, but also it reflects the situation of the manhwalovers. The latter are still in the dark concerning his torment. His terrible secrets have not been totally unveiled. So far, the author allowed the readers to see glimpses of his past, like f. ex. the gangrape or the suicide of his mother. But these were just small pieces of the puzzle, thus it is still impossible to have a complete picture of his martyrdom. There are many reasons for this. The main victim never testified about his suffering, he refused to open up to Baek Na-Kyum. (chapter 84) Then many witnesses vanished (chapter 86) or the ones alive preferred telling lies in order to hide their own wrongdoings or are simply in denial about their own culpability. Finally, the victim, the perpetrators and accomplices had no idea about the whole truth. They only know or knew certain facts, because many of them were deceived as well. What exactly happened to Yoon Seungho? How could this take place, though he belonged to one of the most powerful noble families? Now, you are probably expecting that I will give you answers to all these questions, and recreate the past. But I have to admit that it is not possible, for I don’t know the whole chronology. Consequently, I added “shadowy” in the title. To conclude, my real intention is more to offer new pieces from the riddle than create a whole new “story”. The main source for this new insight is the painter’s fate which is a reflection from the noble’s past and torment. This means that Byeonduck left traces in season 1, 2 and 3! That’s how I discovered that he had been abandoned and betrayed by everyone, kidnapped, treated as a male kisaeng, robbed, abused, raped and even gangraped at least twice, tortured and finally drugged! But like mentioned above, it is difficult to give the proper order and the persons truly involved in the crimes. On the other hand, what I can guarantee is that Yoon Seungho’s nightmare is linked to conspiracies. I came to this conclusion, because if you compare all the seasons, you will detect the presence of plots. There exists at least 3 main plots in each season, though there definitely exist more. The conspiracies are all connected to incidents.

1. The conspiracies

To validate my theory, I will use the first season as an example. The incident with the ruined drawing was actually initiated by Min and his friend with the mole. Black Heart had slapped his friend (chapter 9), so that the latter visited Lee Jihwa to arouse his jealousy. It was to push him to commit a crime so that Baek Na-Kyum would be removed from the main lead’s side. As you can see, there were 3 people involved, though the readers only saw the result. (chapter 12) They had the impression that the red-haired master had acted on his own. However, he had been manipulated, incited to commit a crime. But my point is not to diminish his wrongdoing, rather to expose the involvement of the schemers. Hence at the end of season 1, the author unveiled their true role and as such their identities. (chapter 43) However, observe that when Lee Jihwa went to the pavilion, the noble with the mole had other guests. 2 nobles left the place, as they refused to participate in a murder. (chapter 43) Funny is that they are now witnesses of Min’s crime. This can have repercussions in season 4. Black Heart had been the one who had suggested the assassination to Lee Jihwa. And the aristocrats were still there, when he had made this proposition. (chapter 43) But the two empty seats also serve as a metaphor for the existence of other helping hands: Kim and No-Name! The latter was about to get hired by the young master. Hence I deduce that this scene was to display the existence of accomplices who had always been acting in the shadow. Or we could say that the number of conspirators increased! However, I would like to point out the existence of a second conspiracy: the stolen wine. (chapter 19) And this is related to Kim and the gibang. Yet, the butler ruined Black Heart’s plan. To conclude, we have two main plotters in season 1, but the butler’s bad intentions were not detected, for Yoon Seungho’s bad actions were more eye-catching. People had the impression that the valet was defending the artist’s best interest. From my point of view, the number of persons involved in the plot kept increasing, as they needed more and more accomplices. The reason is that their plans didn’t work out like expected. At the end of season 3, Min involved the kisaengs in the gibang, while Kim asked the assistance of the staff, the maids (chapter 91) and the servants (chapter 97). Thus I deduce that in the past, the same must have happened. Many people were involved in the downfall of Yoon Seungho and his family. But who was the real target in the end? It is difficult to say with 100% certainty.

While Min serves as a reflection from the main mastermind in the past, his actions are not entirely clear. Note that he kept changing his mind and heart. On the one hand, he wished to have the painter killed, then later to have the young artist by his side as a source of entertainment. Yet, there is no doubt that he wished to have sex with Baek Na-Kyum right from the start. (chapter 8) Thus in season 2, he came to this resolution: (chapter 56) He had planned to rape him before having him eliminated. This shows his inner conflict. From my point of view, the painter’s death is connected to the incident in the gibang. (chapter 1) Baek Na-Kyum was a witness of Min’s wrongdoing, just like the painter was a witness and victim of his crimes in the shrine. (chapter 99) One thing is sure: Min was full of greed and jealousy. He was determined to harm and ruin Yoon Seungho. Hence I come to the deduction that the real target of the conspiracy in the past was Yoon Chang-Hyeon. And his son was used against him.

Interesting is that in the first season, the plots were not obvious, except one: the painter’s murder! The conspiracies only came to light, when the readers paid attention to details. The best example is the incident with the open door: (chapter 16) This doesn’t look like a crime. However, it is one! It was done on purpose, to separate the couple. Someone had intervened in order to interrupt this session, and as such someone had been spying on them. Deok-Jae only revealed his spying activity from chapter 16 in season 2: (chapter 53) Yet, the one opening the door had been Kim. This gesture can be considered as trespassing and invasion of privacy, the new version of this scene. (chapter 16) But instead of revealing the truth, the butler sided with Lee Jihwa, and allowed him to trespass the propriety again. In my eyes, the butler thought (chapter 17) that Yoon Seungho would come to perceive the painter as a man consumed by lust. He imagined that he would caught them fooling around. As you can see, this ruckus was also a plot, though it doesn’t look like one. Why would the maids gossip in the courtyard? (chapter 18) From my point of view, the valet expected that the lord would fear people’s gaze and a scandal. Thus he would send away the painter to protect his “reputation”, but the opposite happened. Under this perspective, the manhwalovers can grasp why it is difficult to calculate accurately the number of plots and accomplices. Besides, some were naïve pawns, others not. And since I examined the first season more closely, it is necessary to analyze the vanishing of Jung In-Hun. His disappearance is strongly intertwined with Yoon Seungho’s secret. How so? The learned sir was determined to find the lord’s vulnerability and as such secret.

2. The scholar’s disappearance

Many readers have the impression that the learned sir is still alive, for they never saw his corpse or his execution. Since they had somehow witnessed Jung In-Hun’s departure, they knew that the learned sir could not have been killed in his humble home. I had already detected very early on, like other manhwaphiles, that the murder scene had been staged. (chapter 88) Thus many readers jumped to the conclusion that the learned sir had already switched sides and was plotting against the main lead. They had his following words in their mind: (chapter 29) Thus many concluded that he had participated in the prank, faking his death. On the other hand, the manhwalovers believed to have seen Heena’s death! (chapter 99) However, observe that we never saw her corpse. She was still alive in this panel. I had already pointed out that her murder was actually faked. Her mouth was not covered, hence she could have screamed, but she remained silent (blank speech bubble). Secondly, she never moved her legs… contrary to Yoon Seungho’s behavior in the gibang. (chapter 68) That’s the reason why I came to the conclusion that Heena’s curtains didn’t take place. Hence I deduced that in the past, someone’s death must have been “faked” too and this vanishing must have affected the main lead’s fate. The other deduction is that the learned sir must be “dead”, as the author is working with positive and negative reflections. I had already presented this theory in two different compositions (“That day” and “The secret behind the library“) However, for each murder, the culprit must have a strong motive. For me, the mastermind behind his death is the pedophile himself. This man, (chapter 37) who is the king in my eyes. [For more read the essay “The face of lord Song“]

3. The reasons for the assassination

Why would he eliminate the learned sir? In the past, I had said that he had ordered it out of jealousy. He believed that Jung In-Hun had become Yoon Seungho’s lover, for his brother had mistaken his identity. (chapter 37) Since Baek Na-Kyum was wearing a hanbok, Yoon Seung-Won thought that the person hidden under the hanbok was no commoner! Thus he called him a fellow. However, this motive is quite thin! Yet, two new details caught my attention. His visit to the “fake shaman” and his request. Notice what he told the man:(chapter 29) He was announcing to the dark haired man his true intention. He desired to abandon and betray Yoon Seungho the moment he reached the first place in the civil service examination. He saw him as a burden. This is important, because his words represent a confession of his “sin”!! The scholar was admitting to the commoner that once he reached the first place, he would cut off his ties with the protagonist. But actually, the latter is connected to the pedophile. It was, as if he was saying that he would betray the king, for the young main lead is close to the king. On the other hand, he needed to reach the first place for this. And now, you have the explanation why he got killed. He needed to vanish, before he participated in the next round! The mysterious lord Song needed to remove him, before Jung reached the first place and betrayed his “lover”. In a certain way, the man could justify his action that he has been protecting Yoon Seungho from a future betrayal. However, there is no ambiguity that the true motive was jealousy. But he had naturally another motivation. It was important that the lord’s past never came to light either, as his secret was strongly intertwined with the ruler’s past actions. To conclude, the pedophile had every reason to order his assassination. But he was not the only one behind his death. Other people had an interest in this crime as well.

Jung In-Hun’s ”dream” stands in opposition to Yoon Seungwon‘s statement who somehow promised his father that he would reach first place. That’s the reason why the father boasted in the bedchamber. (chapter 86) However, in reality, he was relying on the king’s help and intervention. And this confession to the “fake shaman” represents the learned sir’s karma. He had asked the painter to act like a spy (chapter 24), not realizing that he could be spied himself! He didn’t grasp that he exposed his weakness to the commoner: the civil service examination. Thus the man had constantly drops of sweat on his face and interrogated Jung In-Hun. (chapter 29) The girl was there to create a certain closeness. He was acting like Kim, asking why! But the stupid and arrogant learned sir thought that because the man was a commoner, he was ignorant and could be manipulated like the painter! (chapter 29) He thought that the low-born would buy his lie here… but in my eyes, it was the opposite. He had already perceived the learned sir’s true nature. But he acted, as if he was agreeing. In other words, the scholar fell into his own trap. He envisioned that the man was “powerless”, but he overlooked his connections. The manhwalovers can see the contradiction, for he had approached the man due to his connections! .As you can see, I am more than ever convinced that the scholar has long been murdered. He was betrayed, exactly like he had planned to abandon Yoon Seungho! The pedophile must have heard from the servant about Jung’s plan, as he had confided it to the worker!!

Thus the man decided to meet Jung In-Hun himself, and give him a warning. He described the Yoons as powerless due to the purge. (chapter 37) But this doesn’t end here. (chapter 37) Yoon Chang-Hyeon was portrayed as a traitor! The “fake servant” implied with his statement that there was a conspiracy, and the patriarch was involved. But in exchange to save his own skin, he had tattled on the others! He was trying to insinuate that if Jung In-Hun interacted more with the Yoons, his reputation could get tainted. He could get suspected of “treason” too, or he could get betrayed too. While the man met the learned sir during the day, the brother went to the villa in a hurry during the night. (chapter 37) So it looked like the “scholar” had not grasped the warning. And if Yoon Seungwon had been informed about the content of the conversation between the learned sir and the “fake shaman”, it is not surprising that he rushed to his brother’s side. He could use this opportunity to warn him about a betrayal. However, he couldn’t do it so, because he imagined that the learned sir was present. This would explain this image: (chapter 36) Hence he chose a different approach: filial duty. And the brother’s observation could only corroborate the pedophile’s perception. The scholar was Yoon Seungho’s lover, but he was also a backstabber. But let’s return our attention to the “mysterious lord Song”‘s statement: Yoon Chang-Hyeon is a denunciator, not a man of honor. (chapter 37) Due to his denunciation and crime, he had to leave the mansion so suddenly leaving the protagonist behind. That’s what the old bearded man implied here. However, I believe that this declaration is a mixture of truth and lie! That’s how I could make the sudden connection: (Chapter 67) Lee Jihwa had not only been denunciated, but he had been confronted by his friend! And the traitor was right by his side. As you can see, chapter 67 was a reflection from episode 37!! These two episodes have another common denominator: the betrayer had made the following suggestion. (chapter 67) In exchange for his “survival”, he should help Black Heart and allow him to act on his behalf. This was the new plan. That’s how he started impersonating Lee Jihwa. That’s the reason why I come to the conclusion that in the past, the impersonation must have happened, but it took place in the beginning. Secondly, I am assuming that a traitor must have suggested to Yoon Chang-Hyeon to leave the mansion and abandon his son behind! (chapter 27) And who is it? For me, it is Kim acting on the pedophile’s behalf. Striking is that in episode 27, the learned sir escaped death thanks to the intervention of the old bearded domestic and Baek Na-Kyum. Thus it came to my mind that the pedophile could even claim that he had eliminated the learned sir, because Yoon Seungho had attempted himself to kill him in the past. He had acted on his behalf. And what do have all these chapters have in common? SPYING and tattling! In episode 27, the servant unveiled a part of the past, (chapter 27) Someone had tattled on the Yoons in the past, but the patriarch was turned into the traitor himself which the young main lead came to believe. Thus Yoon Seungho could say this to his father: (chapter 86) However, I am suspecting that this is not true, someone else tattled on the powerful family and made a false accusation! As you can imagine, I am inclined to think that father Lee must have been behind this! Why? It is because he can no longer do it! Thus in season 3, he approached the patriarch Yoon. (chapter 82) If the lord Seungho had truly committed a crime, he should have reported it to the authorities. The stupid Yoon Chang-Hyeon never wondered why the elder Lee visited him during the night and asked for his assistance. Furthermore, the elder Lee had been allowed to enter the bedchamber and see the huge drawing which could have been perceived as a sign of treason. He was eyeing at the throne. (chapter 82) Note that the aristocrat mentioned “punishment” in this context. So maybe, he denunciated the patriarch so that the whole family would get punished. Father Lee was definitely played in this scene, hence I believe that someone had already anticipated his reactions. He would seek revenge. But this doesn’t end here. I had connected “rash departure” to “treason and spying”. And now, observe what Yoon Seungho said to his butler (chapter 50) He had sent Jung In-Hun away in order to get rid of him! However, because of the expression “I thought”, I am quite certain that this idea had been suggested to him by the valet! I would like to underline that in this episode, the valet was acting as a tattler! (chapter 50) But in order to hide his own crime, he portrayed it as a rumor (It may not be accurate”). This truly underlines the butler’s MO. He used information and turned it as gossips to hide his spying activities. The shadow… Simultaneously, he turned gossips into a verity!! This is no coincidence that in season 3, the same method was employed. Yoon Seungho was supposed to have murdered the scholar and Deok-Jae! My avid readers can sense the leitmotiv in all these episodes. RUMORS are turned into a reality, and as such a CRIME! Even here… (chapter 37) (chapter 37) But Kim is not the only spy and traitor! The younger brother Seungwon is also one! Thus he was introduced in the same chapter. And I have an irrefutable evidence that the old bearded man was in contact with the younger master. Only recently, I realized that the man never mentioned the protagonist’s name, he just said “this one”. This idiom implies that there is another one!!! This is the evidence that he was in contact with Yoon Seungwon. Finally, why would the man talk about the elder master Yoon the entire time? It is, because technically Yoon Seungho is just the elder son. This means that the pedophile never officially gave the title to the protagonist. These were empty words. (chapter 86) But since our beloved man started living in the bedchamber, this became a reality. That’s the other reason why Yoon Seungho was encouraged to live in debauchery and not to take the civil service examination. But this only occurred, the moment the lord returned living in the mansion and not before!! Secondly, I realized that this statement about Yoon Chang-Hyeon will become a reality for the “fake servant” himself. (chapter 37) Not only he justified his return to the familial domain with the main lead’s lunacy (“under the pretense of some problem with this one”), but also he accused his own son of a crime. (chapter 94) This means that he acted as a traitor, tattling on his own relative. Finally, observe that once confronted with brutal reality, the father did run away. (chapter 87) The white bearded man’s words became a reality. However, since the fake servant, the mysterious lord Song, judges the elder master Yoon as a troublemaker and hypocrite, there is no ambiguity that the elder master Yoon will get into trouble. Since he did it in the past, he can only get suspected in the present.

Besides, because the scholar is now dead, the pedophile can only put the whole blame on someone else refusing to become responsible for this. He has always acted in the shadow. We have three possibilities: he puts the blame on Yoon Seungwon, and say that he had done it out of jealousy. Or Yoon Chang-Hyeon had intervened, because Jung represented an hindrance to the Yoons’ dream. Besides, he was supposed to stay in the mansion in Hanyang, and that’s where the rest of the family is living. (chapter 86) But the worst would be that the painter is blamed for his assassination. He did it out of resent! But this would expose the true thoughts of the schemers, the pedophile and Kim. That’s how they act, when they feel offended and bothered.

Striking is that the protagonist has no idea, that the banishment was staged, for he was told the same lie. In his mind, the father lives in exile.: (chapter 37) One thing is sure: the father’s dream will turn out to be an illusion. For me, the younger brother’s biggest wrongdoings are spying, tattling and badmouthing. And the best evidence for this interpretation is this situation: (chapter 44) He had given the ruined painting to his father, putting the blame on his brother, well aware that the latter would get angry. He was observing his father’s reaction. (chapter 44) Yet, there is a difference to the past. Here, he had been fooled! He truly believed that this was his brother’s doing, whereas in truth the butler had been the one who had fooled him. (chapter 38) And this is important, because when the letter was given to the brother, Jung In-Hun witnessed the wrongdoing from the butler!! (chapter 38) And now, you know why the learned sir had to die!! He had caught the valet in the act. He had betrayed Yoon Seungho, though he didn’t realize it. The learned sir tried to discover the content of the letter, and as such was prying on his sponsor’s weakness.(chapter 38) Hence I come to the conclusion that KIM played a huge role in the learned sir’s death as well. I would even say that he was the one who pushed the others to have the scholar and the painter killed. Both knew about the butler’s tricks without realizing his significance. (chapter 37) Hence I deduce that as the story progressed, the role of the butler started changing. Now, I see him as a the main plotter, while all the others are now his pawns. We could say that the valet has gradually followed the pedophile’s path. However, there is no ambiguity that it was not the same in the past!

4. A new plot

I am quite certain that many manhwalovers are doubting my theory that the fake servant is the king and the main culprit in Yoon Seungho’s nightmare. Why? It is because in chapter 83, we saw a dark haired man, and according to Lee Jihwa, this was the mysterious lord Song. (chapter 83) How can he be the same than the one from episode 37? The change of his hair color could be explained by a huge shock. But this is rather thin as a justification. Besides, now I am more inclined to think that these are two different persons, and that the main culprit is the one from episode 37. Why? It is because he smoked and utilized the same expression: “strange”. (chapter 37) An idiom that Yoon Seungho constantly utilized: chapter 16, chapter 21, chapter 50, chapter 71 (chapter 71). This means that he couldn’t understand, for he has a different way of thinking. This outlines his narrow-mindedness and his tendency to plan everything. He doesn’t like surprises.

Since the readers saw the hanbok and the beard, they imagine that he is the main culprit. But I would like the readers to keep in mind that Baek Na-Kyum’s fate is the clue about the main lead’s suffering. And how many people desired to have him by their side? TWO! Yoon Seungho and Min…. and we could say that both kidnapped the artist! The main lead did it in episode 1, and the other in episode 99! This means that Yoon Seungho should have two main sexual abusers in the past! However, in difference to the young lord, the painter only had sex with the main lead. Min always failed to taste him! That’s the reason why I am suspecting that the man from chapter 83 could represent the “first sexual abuser”. Besides, observe that he is not smoking! (chapter 83)

Because we saw the purple hanbok, we all imagined that he was representing the king or was connected to the palace. But is it true? Notice that one of the guests only has a moustache beard (chapter 83) which is actually connected to commoners. [For more read the essay “Painful departures“] Remember that Min tried to deceive people by wearing a similar hanbok which Lee Jihwa would often wear. (chapter 69) Hence I started wondering if the mysterious man with the beard was not impersonating someone, for example “lord Song” and in reality he was just a merchant. Why merchant? It is related to the shungas and the hanboks. The king can not be involved in trading directly. However, this is what Yoon Seungho told to the learned sir: (chapter 22) Nevertheless, the main lead could have never been involved in commerce, for he lived as a prisoner for many years. And this is what was said about the ruler: (chapter 76) He is not so wealthy. How come? Yoon Seungho’s fortune must have a different origin.

Besides, I would like to outline that when Min was facing the ghost Yoon Seungho, he denied his responsibility by putting the blame on the childhood friend: (chapter 102) Min had never predicted that the young master would run to his friend and denunciate him to Yoon Seungho. However, since Black Heart had employed the assistance of servants (chapter 101) , the kisaengs (chapter 95) (chapter 96), the officer (chapter 98), No-Name, the doctor with the drugs and butler Kim, this signifies that behind the name Lee Jihwa stand many people! As you can see, the name “lord Song” doesn’t refer to one person, but many… My theory is that No-Name is the true owner of the title, but that’s how he ended up losing his home and his name! That’s the reason why I believe that in this image (chapter 83), we only see one of many persons hiding behind the name “lord Song”. To conclude, I came to the theory that the men from chapter 37 and 83 are both “lord Song”, though the one from episode 37 can only be the king. But if the man in episode 83 was impersonating lord Song, and as such was dressed up as a royal, he was actually violating laws.

I would like to point out that Min had three goals, not only to ruin Yoon Seungho, but also to get rid of Baek Na-Kyum and Lee Jihwa. Why? It is because he had framed them for the incident in the gibang. (chapter 1) Furthermore, Lee Jihwa could testify that Black Heart was the mastermind of the murder. Thus I deduce that in the past, the mastermind must have had three intentions as well:

  • remove Yoon Chang-Hyeon from his son’s side. That way, he could outlive his sexual fantasies. (chapter 50)
  • ruin the Yoons which represented a thorn to his power, hence the young man was incited to hate and blame his father.
  • get rid of all the potential witnesses and accomplices.

We shouldn’t overlook that Min used to be the main lead’s sexual partner too. Hence we could say that he was trying to get rid of a former lover and potential rival! That’s why I can’t help myself thinking that the man in purple could have been fooled himself. (chapter 83) Here, he was smiling… but don’t forget that in this story, karma always retaliates immediately! The best example is the scholar who wished to discover the noble’s secret, but didn’t realize that his vulnerability and intentions were revealed. In episode 83, this smiling man tried to drive an edge between the two childhood friends, and he could definitely witness how the two sons entered the room before the arrival of the elders! Therefore his punishment should have been separation as well. (chapter 83) The main lead was slapped and called animal, hence there is no ambiguity that at some point, the man must have suffered as well, unless he let others take the fall for him. We know for sure that the main lead was tortured, and as such arrested for a crime he didn’t commit! Besides, I would like the manhwaworms to keep in mind the importance of cosplay and “coup de théâtre”. We had the perfect illustration in chapter 37, (chapter 71) chapter 87) and episode 92. The schemers in the past had definitely played with illusions and tricks. Thus I am expecting that it is now the pedophile’s turn to get fooled.

One possibility is that father Lee denunciated the Yoons saying that they were planning a coup d’Etat, and had already selected a new king. And don’t forget that he was wearing clothes that was indicating that he belonged to the royal family!! Thus his identity could have been mistaken. To conclude, for me, the man with the purple hanbok represents the reason why Yoon Seungho suffered. This led to the purge of the noble families close to the Yoons. But since the real “lord Song” had allowed people to use his name, he became the culprit for all the wrongdoings committed by others. Hence he lost everything. (chapter 82)

5. The poisoning

Another possibility is that the man with the purple hanbok got poisoned, and Yoon Seungho was framed for the man’s death or injury. I am suspecting a poisoning incident in the past. If it didn’t take place during that fateful night/day (chapter 83), then it definitely must have taken place before. But how did I come to this conclusion? According to my observations, karma always retaliates right away, though the “wrongdoer” has no idea, as the person doesn’t see the connection between the “punishment” and the sin. But I would like to point out that in each season, we had poisoning. (chapter 36) Here, the painter was forced to take an aphrodisiac under the pretense of his health. This action was repeated in season 2 (chapter 54) and 3. (chapter 100) The nobles made him smoke opium or drink the aphrodisiac. The purpose of such drugs is to obtain the painter’s submission and control his mind and reactions. Striking is that each time, the perpetrators were “punished”. Kim was insulted and his plan didn’t work out. (chapter 37) As for the young lords, they were evicted like commoners and later the others were even killed. As you can see, each time the poison was employed, there was a retaliation.

But note that in season 2, Deok-Jae had put stones in the painter’s rice. (chapter 47) (chapter 47) If the painter had not eaten with the lord, the latter would have never noticed the incident. However, he believed the maids’ words. (chapter 47) Hence he never investigated the matter. But this prank represented a serious issue. This could have been judged as an attempt against the owner of the mansion. (chapter 47) And now look at this panel: (chapter 83) Yoon Seungho had refused to take the drug! The bowl reminded me of the one from chapter 47! Finally, the butler had tried to give his master the drug in season 3 (chapter 77), but the latter had again rejected it and this twice. (chapter 77) Kim calls the drug “medicinal tea”, truly an euphemism. It is also possible that the real target of the poisoning was Yoon Seungho, but since he was protected by the gods, someone ended up taking the “drug”. Because he was wearing a purple hanbok, the investigator mistook his identity, a royal member. Hence the Yoons were suspected of treason. Don’t forget that during this party, there was a kisaeng by their side. (chapter 83) And the latter are trained to cook dishes for the clients. My avid readers are certainly recalling that since season 2, I have been waiting for a poisoning incident which became a reality at the end of season 3. Thus I come to the conclusion, that such an incident should be shown in season 4, one in the past and the other in the present.

To conclusion, since many people were hiding behind the name “lord Song”, it became a taboo. However, as the king had achieved all his goals thanks to this name, (chapter 56), he came to adopt this title in order to hide his identity and actions. Byeonduck explained in her notes that Baek Na-Kyum had no idea about Min’s name. And this is the same for Yoon Seungho. The pedophile could continue hiding behind “lord Song”, as the latter was blamed for everything. The pedophile could divert attention from his own tricks. That’s the reason why he would never write any letter to Yoon Seungho under this name. This means that at the end, the main culprit, the king, will be perceived as the main responsible for Yoon Seungho’s torment, similar to Min’s situation, just before got killed. Though many other people were involved, Yoon Seungho was able to judge the joker’s actions correctly, he was the main mastermind behind the plots. This explicates why the gods made Yoon Seungho forget the old bearded men’s face. (chapter 44) This was a blessing in disguise. The moment the main lead faces the king, Yoon Seungho will be able perceive the truth. The king was behind his torment, and the butler had been his helping hand all along, the professional spy planted in his family. However, I don’t think that the monarch will admit his crimes and apologize for his wrongdoings. He will need a scapegoat, and this can only be the butler, the only one who knows the truth!

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Tumblr-Twitter account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Painter Of The Night: “Promise me 👄 you’ll never forget me because … 🥺”

This is where you can read the manhwa. https://www.lezhinus.com/en/comic/painter But be aware that this manhwa is a mature Yaoi, which means, it is about homosexuality with explicit scenes. If you want to read more essays, here is the link to the table of contents:  https://bebebisous33analyses.wordpress.com/2020/07/04/table-of-contents-painter-of-the-night

It would be great if you could make some donations/sponsoring: Ko-fi.com/bebebisous33  That way, you can support me with “coffee” so that I have the energy to keep examining manhwas. Besides, I need to cover up the expenses for this blog.

Notice: Each new follower or new subscriber with an email address is contacted by me so that they can get the password.

As the readers can see, the title consists of an unfinished sentence. I did it on purpose for two reasons. First, it would have been too long. Secondly, it would have revealed the central topic of this essay. The name of this composition is in truth a quote from A. A. Milne. The manhwaphiles can see that I would like to analyze the new pictures released from Lezhin inciting me to present new interpretations, theories and predictions.

1. Yoon Seungho and Sleeping beauty

Interesting is that on February 1st the Korean company tweeted this image. The manhwalovers could barely see Yoon Seungho’s face, for he was surrounded by darkness. When I saw it, my first thought was to associate the protagonist to “Sleeping beauty”. He had the same expression than in the bedchamber, when he was sleeping totally relaxed. (chapter 87) He was not tormented by a nightmare, like the painter discovered it in chapter 38: And the darkness reminded me of the forest of thorns and as such of the curse put on the princess. The darkness, the metaphor for the forest of thorns, is the reason why the lord felt trapped and suffocating in his torment. (chapter 86) This contrasts to the princess’ situation, for the latter had no idea about the existence of the prison. It only appeared, when she fell asleep. Moreover, in this picture the obscurity is slowly disappearing announcing that the main lead is about to wake up, he is on the verge of being released from his curse. This signifies that the protagonist is slowly returning to life, allowing him to be able to fight back, the moment he is confronted with reality. He will be able to voice his thoughts and emotions contrary to his past lethargy.

In the fairy tale from Charles Perrault and the brothers Grimm, the princess was put to sleep for 100 years in order to avoid the terrible curse that the wicked witch had placed on her. Originally, she should have died, but thanks to the intervention of one fairy, the curse could be modified and attenuated. Instead of death, it was just “sleep”. My avid readers can already detect the similarities, as the young master’s martyrdom lasted 10 years. Not only the numbers are similar, but the idiom the lord employs to describe his past life is related to sleep: “nightmare”. (chapter 86) This shows that he had problems to distinguish illusion from reality. Why? He had long internalized that nightmare is real world. Hence any pleasant event could only be judged as dream and illusion. This explicates why the lord still feared that the painter’s love confession was a chimera. Besides, I had already pointed out that till the lord’s final suicidal attempt linked to the painter’s love and death, the lord was not truly living. I had compared him either to a dormant volcano or to a zombie. It is relevant, because thanks to the artist, the noble is learning that realism is not just made of betrayal, agony and torment. Happiness can still exist in real world, but in order to achieve happiness, the person has to work! That’s the reason why the American dream combines happiness with zeal and commitment. Therefore the main lead could only end up suffering, for he remained passive till the end of season 3. Therefore, till the end of season 3, he was not able to detect his true enemies and anticipate their moves.

Consequently, both characters, the lord and Sleeping beauty, have another common denominator. They couldn’t determine their own fate due to the intervention of others: the fathers, the “fairies”, the prince/king and the fortunetellers. Yes, sleeping beauty is connected to horoscopists. Actually, the fairy tale “Sleeping beauty” has its origins in the story “Sun, Moon, and Talia” from the Italian author Giambattista Basile. In this narration from the 17th Century, the so-called talented astrologers, tasked by Talia’s father, had predicted her future.

“at length they came to the conclusion that she would incur great danger from a splinter of flax. Her father therefore forbade that any flax, hemp, or any other material of that sort be brought into his house, so that she should escape the predestined danger.” Quoted from https://sites.pitt.edu/~dash/type0410.html

However, the lord’s attempts were a failure. The young woman couldn’t escape her terrible destiny, for she was left in the dark. Moreover, Talia was raped 😨 during her sleep by a king who was already married. Due to this encounter, the cursed protagonist got pregnant, and gave birth to twins, Sun and Moon. Under this new perspective, the readers realize that this panel is actually announcing the content of season 4. The lord’s rape will come to the surface! Furthermore, my avid readers can notice another parallel with the manhwa. I had already compared the main characters from Painter Of The Night to the moon and the sun. For Yoon Seungho, the painter symbolizes the sun and as such life, for he was slowly bringing him light, warmth (chapter 63), love and happiness in his nightmare. In his darkest moment, he voiced a wish, which exposed the return of hope. This corresponds to the spark of faith, the gradual return of trust in his life. On the other side, Baek Na-Kyum came to view his lover as the moon giving him light and hope during the night again. (chapter 94) I would like to point out that the artist has always associated this satellite to a source of joy and love, like we can detect it here. (chapter 94) Finally, Talia could get liberated from her curse thanks to her children. The splinter of flax got removed from her finger, the moment the babies were sucking on them. This signifies that she got revived thanks to love and life. Moreover, she woke up, the moment the source of her pain was removed. This observation leads me to the following conclusion: the noble can only be completely freed from this darkness, the moment his suffering is removed and as such revealed!! This means that Yoon Seungho will be able to voice his misery and denunciate the crimes he was exposed to. He will be able to identify the persons responsible for his suffering. He might know a name, lord Song, but he has no idea about his true identity. That’s how his burden will be erased. Like mentioned above, the noble’s physical and sexual assault will be brought up to light. That’s the reason why the new image announcing season 4 is so dark. They represent a reflection from Yoon Seungho’s past and torment.

Nonetheless, we should focus on the positive aspects, the gradual vanishing of the blackness. Hence I see this dark picture in a good light. It actually symbolizes peace, hope and faith. This explicates why once I detected the painter’s hair in this image, I imagined that the lord was sleeping with Baek Na-Kyum while holding him in his arms. At the same time, he was smelling his hair, a new version of this scene: (chapter 38) I thought that the couple would share the bed, thus the lord could relax. He felt protected by his lover. In other words, I was already envisioning that this scene is a reflection from chapter 97/98, for the couple had not been able to sleep together. (chapter 97) However, the moment Lezhin published the second panel, I realized that this illustration was referring to a different element in the same scene: separation. Thus I deduce that the embrace during the sleep must have happened before, for the noble’s eye has no dark circle. He looks rested and relaxed.

But let’s return our attention to the comparison between sleeping beauty and our beloved seme. The king was actually cheating on his wife, hence he only stayed in Talia’s home for a certain time. He not only hid the truth from her, but also made an empty promise, he would bring her back to his kingdom!

In the meanwhile the king remembered Talia, and saying that he wanted to go hunting, he returned to the palace, and found her awake, and with two cupids of beauty. He was overjoyed, and he told Talia who he was, and how he had seen her, and what had taken place. When she heard this, their friendship was knitted with tighter bonds, and he remained with her for a few days. After that time he bade her farewell, and promised to return soon, and take her with him to his kingdom. And he went to his realm, but he could not find any rest, and at all hours he had in his mouth the names of Talia, and of Sun and Moon (those were the two children’s names), and when he took his rest, he called either one or other of them.” Quoted from https://sites.pitt.edu/~dash/type0410.html

And that’s how she became the victim of another plot, the queen got jealous and chose to get rid of Sun and Moon before targeting Talia herself. And this shows that deceptions and conspiracies stand in the center of this fairy tale! At no moment, the main lead heard the truth from her father or her future husband. Thus she couldn’t protect herself correctly, just like she could never anticipate her enemy’s moves. And that’s exactly what happened to Yoon Seungho. He was left in the dark the whole time, while people made empty promises to him. When Kim revealed Yoon Chang-Hyeon’s promise, the butler was implying (chapter 77) that he was doing it for the noble’s best interest. He insinuated that he was protecting him and he should trust him and his father. But this was not true, for he had not revealed the truth to Yoon Seungho, the stolen kiss. (chapter 88) This image was mirroring the past, someone had made the promise to the young master that he would “stay by his side”, implying that he would protect him, but he had failed to keep his words, for he had trusted more in others’ comments. (chapter 88) Because of the tragedies, the main figure got blamed, and as such he got cursed. He was a bird of misfortune, while in reality he was the main victim. In “Sun, Moon and Talia”, the perpetrator and the accomplices, the king and the astrologers, they all got scot-free. I am certain that it was the same in Yoon Seungho’s past. And because there are astrologers in this fairy tale, I am more than ever convinced that a shaman played a huge role in the young master’s downfall.

Yet there exists a huge difference between Painter Of The Night and the Italian story. Contrary to Yoon Seungho, Talia was not conscious, when she got sexually assaulted. She was left in the dark about the true origins of her motherhood. That’s the reason why she didn’t suffer from PTSD or better said from nightmares while asleep. She could never make the connection between the rape and the birth of Sun and Moon. She just saw them, and fell in love with them, as they marked the end of her solitude. The king never described the intimacy as a crime, it was portrayed as a normality. Thus her sleep is not connected to pain and nightmare, rather to a blessing and peace.

2. Memories and farewells

What caught my attention is that the king from “Sun, Moon and Talia” never saw the sex as a crime. Why? From my point of view, it is related to his position. As the ruler, he can do whatever he wants. Yet, the reality is that he is bound by traditions and religion. Yet, he chose to disregard them. Moreover, the most surprising is that he actually forgot his encounter with Talia for a while.

In the meanwhile the king remembered Talia, and saying that he wanted to go hunting, he returned to the palace, and found her awake, and with two cupids of beauty. Quoted from https://sites.pitt.edu/~dash/type0410.html

It exposes his selfishness and superficiality in the end. He was not truly motivated by love, rather by lust. It took him more than a year before returning to her side. And that’s how he discovered that he had now heirs! This explicates why he made such a promise to the young mother (bringing her to his realm with her kids), though he still remained passive afterwards. He had been able to continue his lineage, thus everything was fine. The fairy tale is actually exposing the king’s flaws and sins. In my eyes, his behavior is reflecting the pedophile’s from Painter Of The Night. Moreover, the ruler vowed faithfulness to Talia, when he announced that he would bring back her and their children to his realm. But he knew that it was not possible, for he still had a wife. This means that the king couldn’t live with Talia together. His time with her was limited, hence he justified his vanishing with “hunting”. Yes… another parallel with the lord’s attitude. (chapter 83) In Painter Of The Night, the hunts were always used to provoke a quarrel and as such a separation, but it never worked. This is important, because this shows that the couple from the Italian story had to separate. It is now time to reveal the whole quote from Milner:

“Promise me you’ll never forget me because if I thought you would, I’d never leave.”

His words indicate the difficulty of departure. In order to overcome the distance, one needs absolute trust in the partner’s love and loyalty. And this situation is actually reflected in the second picture released from Lezhin. Byeonduck is now announcing the separation arc. Since Yoon Seungho is closing his eyes while kissing Baek Na-Kyum’s eye, I come to the interpretation that the lord is trusting blindly his lover. He is not doubting the artist’s affection. There is no ambiguity that he is also embracing his lover. He is actually making here a promise to the painter. This is what Lezhin wrote on Twitter:

시샘달 하루부터 닷새까지. 매일 정오 찾아 오겠노라, 약조하마. From the first day to fifth day, I’ll come to you every day at noon, in the morning (translated by papago).

He will not only return to him, but also he is telling the time of his return!! This means that the lord has now regained the notion of time! Kim, whom I consider as a new version of Chronos, is no longer controlling the main lead, because he is no longer owner of his time. The panel with the text is already displaying the butler’s loss of power. To conclude, this panel represents the positive reflection from this scene: (chapter 97) Back then, the lord was scared, for he still doubted the artist’s love confession. It was too beautiful to be true! However, back then, the artist never doubted his own resolution, thus he gave comfort to his lover by giving him his hand. (chapter 97) (chapter 97) At the end, the lord expressed the following wishes: (chapter 97) In other words, he desired that the painter would follow his requests and as such he should vow him loyalty and trust one more time. The irony is that the lord was actually the one breaking his vow, for he left his lover without saying goodbye. Thus I conclude that in this scene, the characters have switched their position: Yoon Seungho is no longer doubting the artist’s sincerity and loyalty, for he could witness with his own eyes the abduction and the sexual assault. Yet, the painter is in tears, because he is already missing his lover. The tears doesn’t just represent agony, but also longing. What caught my attention is that the drawing is very similar to this image: (chapter 78) This means that the lord is smelling his partner’s hair helping him to remain strong and calm. He is now trying to memorize his lover’s odor so that he can forget this stench, a remain from the past: (chapter 86) This can only help him to defeat his “opponents”. Finally, in different analyses, I had already interpreted that Baek Na-Kyum was embodying memory, whereas the lord stands for truth. The image is actually a reference to recollection and as such honesty. There is no ambiguity that both men are trusting each other, but the painter is crying, for he fears for his lover’s life either. Yoon Seungho is leaving him in order to protect him in my eyes. And this leads me to the following deduction. When the lord is about to leave, Baek Na-Kyum is not left in the dark contrary to episode 97. He knows the whole truth, for the lord must have confessed to him. We could say that he is not leaving without a word (chapter 97). Furthermore, this signifies that the artist doesn’t need any longer to rely on the explanations from others. Thus the artist will keep his promise (chapter 88), though he won’t be by his side physically! They are no longer relying on the butler and his “information”. The trick played at the end of season 3 won’t work on Baek Na-Kyum any longer. He will no longer be swayed. And the promise made by the lord is the reason why the painter will remain loyal. He will stay at the place he is living and wait for his lover’s return. He has no question either.

Many manhwalovers might be unhappy about this evolution, for they love watching the couple living together. But keep in mind that this is totally necessary, because this will push Baek Na-Kyum and Yoon Seungho to create paintings and even poems. This can only incite them to recall their past moments together. A new version of this scene: (chapter 23) (chapter 24) In other words, this announces the return of Yoon Seungho’s passion for painting! And it is the same for the painter. The erotic picture should reflect their love for each other, created based on memories. At the same time, this can only push the noble to demonstrate his talents to others refuting all the negative rumors about him: he is intelligent and possessing his whole mind. Furthermore, this can help him to reminisce his tragic past, what led him to his downfall and suffering. This signifies that he will be able to confront his past and his memories. He will be able to identify the rape, and Kim already exposed the truth to Yoon Seungho, when the former suggested him to ensure the painter’s consent. This shows that Kim was well aware of the sexual abuse, but he chose to never divulge the verity. On the other hand, the pedophile thought in the past that the young master would never forget him due to his position, thus he had no problem to leave Yoon Seungho behind and make no real promise. Departure was never painful for him… hence this quote (“Promise me you’ll never forget me because if I thought you would, I’d never leave.”) will become a reality for the mysterious lord Song, but it is already too late. In fact, the gods punished him by making Yoon Seungho suffering from amnesia. He is not attached by loyalty to the pervert.

Yoon Seungho’s vow with Baek Na-Kyum diverges so much to the monarch’s behavior from “Sun, Moon and Talia”. The latter broke his promise on so many levels. First, he hid the queen’s existence to the protagonist. But this doesn’t end here. He left her behind without making sure that her family was protected. He thought that this secret would guarantee her safety. However, in the story, the king couldn’t help himself revealing the secret and that’s how the queen discovered his betrayal and infidelity. I would like the readers to keep in mind that back then, polygamy was considered as a huge sin in Europe. Note that at the end, the legal wife was the one who brought the “princess” to the kingdom and this for a trial. So where was the king? He was often busy eating! We could say that he didn’t keep his promise out of laziness and even naivety. He allowed that Talia was accused of infidelity and witchcraft, for she had seduced him. He only appeared at the end of the fairy tale. He only voiced regret and put the blame on the queen, while in reality he was the main culprit for this situation.

“The king suddenly appeared, and finding this spectacle, demanded to know what was happening. He asked for his children, and his wife — reproaching him for his treachery — told him that she had had them slaughtered and served to him as meat. When the wretched king heard this, he gave himself up to despair, saying, “Alas! Then I, myself, am the wolf of my own sweet lambs. Alas! And why did these my veins know not the fountains of their own blood? You renegade bitch, what evil deed is this which you have done? Quoted from https://sites.pitt.edu/~dash/type0410.html

The manhwalovers can detect many similarities with Painter Of The Night. The ruler will never recognize his crimes and even wrong decisions. He neglected Yoon Seungho, but chose to put the blame on others. First, the young master, then the patriarch Yoon Chang-HYeon, the kisaeng, “No-Name” and finally Lee Jihwa. At some point, it will be the butler’s turn. On the other hand, since no one of them was willing to recognize their own fault and involvement, they preferred blaming the victim, for the latter was the only one without a voice. Thus Yoon Seungho is accused of being consumed by lust, he was neither faithful, while in truth, he had no saying from the start. (chapter 57) That’s the reason why I believe that when an incident occurred during that night (chapter 83), the main lead was framed. He got accused of a crime, whereas he had been the true target in reality. There is no ambiguity that the abusers doubted the protagonist’s loyalty and integrity, for they were themselves untrustworthy. They all knew that they had lied and deceived the young master at some point.

And this leads me to the following conclusion. The separation is necessary, since the story is going in circle. Back then, the “pedophile” couldn’t stay by the young master’s side due to his duties. Thus he could only appear, when he was “hunting”. This means, the painter is put in the same situation than his lover in the past. However, the huge difference is that Yoon Seungho came to hate the mysterious lord Song! He never wished his return… However, since he had lost the notion of time, he could only live in fear. That’s how he came to develop insomnia. This explicates why the man trained the protagonist to have a sex marathon, for his time in Jemulpo was limited. Thus I deduce that the pedophile never bid farewell to Yoon Seungho and barely talked to him as well, unless he gave orders. In my eyes, he relied on others: Yoon Chang-Hyeon the kisaeng, Yoon Seungwon and Kim. Yet, deep down, the perpetrator was well aware that he was abusing the young master. But he chose to close an eye, until an incident occurred. That’s the reason why he could never trust the male kisaeng in the end. As a conclusion, season 4 symbolizes the opposite to the past: acceptance, love, faith, closeness, verity and transparence despite the return of darkness. This explicates why the illustration is quite “easy” to interpret despite the blackness.

3. Interpretation of the second panel

It is possible, if you compare the image to others. This picture contrasts so much to this one:

  • prank – seriousness
  • light – dark
  • smile – tears
  • Yoon Seungho made sure that the painter stayed by his side, he even stopped him to retrieve the music box, while now the lord has the opposite intention. He is now the one leaving the painter.
  • The small gap between the main leads indicating that despite their closeness, there still existed a wall between them. This displays that in the new illustration, the distance is no longer existing. Both are fully trusting each other. The lord must have confessed what happened to the painter at the end of season 3, and the painter must have also explained how he came to leave the mansion. In other words, both revealed many secrets concerning the last incident,

That’s the reason why I come to the following deductions. They are biding farewell outside. The painter followed him to the door. However, here the lord is not suicidal at all. In fact, the promise represents the source of strength for Yoon Seungho. The latter has to remain alive in order to protect Baek Na-Kyum, definitely a new version of this scene: (chapter 11) However, there is no ambiguity that the painter can only fear for his lover’s life. The closed eye contradicts the haunted gaze in the shaman’s house. (chapter 102) Despite his closed eyes, he is now able to discern the truth, and it is the same for the painter. Their Third eye is now fully awakened.

But the most important detail is the lord’s kiss on the artist’s eye. The lord had already done it in the past. When he kissed the artist there for the first time, the latter was unconscious. (chapter 21) This gesture symbolizes the epitome of the noble’s affection and the desire to give “happiness”. Then in the bedchamber, he did it in order to console his partner. (chapter 82) With his kiss, he was asking for his forgiveness. This means that the kiss on the eye serves as reassurance and comfort either. Thus we had this scene in the study: (chapter 84) The lord had kissed his lover there, because he was voicing his attachment and desire to redeem himself and to comfort the artist. As you can see, it was a combination of all the previous significations. Yet, the lord had not grasped the “gravity” of his “wrongdoing”. Thus the kiss was associated a certain playfulness in the study. As a conclusion, this image symbolizes the reality. Both are aware of the truth, willing to face it together. The lord is attempting to console his lover, to reassure him that everything will be alright. He is sorry, for he is making him cry again, but this separation is necessary. It was, as if he was seeking Baek Na-Kyum’s forgiveness. He is honest and serious. He is now capable to face reality. But there is more to it. The new image contrasts to this one too:

  • light -dark
  • happiness – sadness
  • sun – moon
  • the hand with a foot – the couple’s faces

This contrast confirms my previous signification: this happy moment in the painter’s childhood had been short-lived, because he had been left in the dark. While he was with the scholar and was happy, something terrible must have happened to someone close to the painter. It reinforced his guilt and abandonment issues. Besides, I had already outlined that this scene must be connected to a departure, a “farewell”. [For more read the essay “Baek Na-Kyum’s foot“] In the past, I had assumed that it was related to Heena, but it could be linked to the gibang in general. Another kisaeng could have vanished suddenly. That’s how I realized why the painter came to love the moon and night! I recognized that many wounds in the painter’s life had occurred during the day: (chapter 94) (chapter 94) (chapter 34) (chapter 11) (chapter 19) He came to feel more safe during the night, until he met Yoon Seungho in season 1. From that moment on, his night life got slowly affected. That’s how he discovered that night could be associated to pain and agony too. Yet, deep down, he still felt safe by the noble’s side. As you can see, the new illustration is reinforcing my theory that this image is not just mirroring a happy moment in the painter’s youth. The latter actually symbolizes illusion and deception, whereas the dark panel oozes reality and honesty.

And all this leads to the final conclusion: the last common denominators between Sleeping beauty and Yoon Seungho are vengeance, greed and jealousy. That’s the reason why Talia came to be arrested and falsely accused. Nonetheless, none of the characters realized this. The cursed princess in the Perrault’s or the Grimms’ version had no idea about the intervention of the witch/fairy who had felt insulted either. This is the reason why the Yoons’ reputation got ruined. The couple can only discover these elements, when someone witnesses such a scene and reports it to the “schemers”, and as such to the “mysterious lord”. The latter can only be upset, for the young man has never acted this way with him.

“Promise me you’ll never forget me because if I thought you would, I’d never leave.”

Yoon Seungho can leave his lover’s side without fearing his sudden vanishing. He is exactly thinking like Milner. However, these words stand in opposition to the butler’s philosophy: (chapter 51). Hence the butler could perceive this promise as a betrayal from Yoon Seungho. The latter is slowly forgetting the valet, he is no longer seeking his assistance and his side.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Tumblr-Twitter account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Painter Of The Night: Summary of a love story 💖😍🌹

This is where you can read the manhwa. https://www.lezhinus.com/en/comic/painter But be aware that this manhwa is a mature Yaoi, which means, it is about homosexuality with explicit scenes. If you want to read more essays, here is the link to the table of contents:  https://bebebisous33analyses.wordpress.com/2020/07/04/table-of-contents-painter-of-the-night/ 

It would be great if you could make some donations/sponsoring: Ko-fi.com/bebebisous33  That way, you can support me with “coffee” so that I have the energy to keep examining manhwas. Besides, I need to cover up the expenses for this blog.

Though the talk of marriage started in season 2, the author revealed that Yoon Seungho was not thinking about marriage in season 3 yet. It was too early, as Baek Na-Kyum was still viewed as a boy. Moreover, according to social norms, it was impossible, for his lover is a man. Then in front of Yoon Chang-Hyeon, he made fun of his father. (chapter 87) That’s the reason why I consider the love session in chapter 88 more like a relationship between a sponsor and an artist.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Tumblr-Twitter account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Painter Of The Night / A Sip Of Poison: A Question Of Perspective: The loss of the topknot 💇🏻‍♂️ (second version)

This is where you can read the manhwas. https://www.lezhinus.com/en/comic/sip_poison This manhwa is mature. https://www.lezhinus.com/en/comic/painter But be aware that this manhwa is a mature Yaoi, which means, it is about homosexuality with explicit scenes. If you want to read more essays, here is the link to the table of contents:  https://bebebisous33analyses.wordpress.com/2020/07/04/table-of-contents-painter-of-the-night/  I also used briefly Doctor Frost again which I highly recommend to my readers. https://www.webtoons.com/en/mystery/dr-frost/list?title_no=371 If you want to read more essays about other manhwas, here is the link to the table of contents: https://bebebisous33analyses.com/2021/06/06/table-of-contents-of-analyzed-mentioned-manhwas/

It would be great if you could make some donations/sponsoring: Ko-fi.com/bebebisous33  That way, you can support me with “coffee” so that I have the energy to keep examining manhwas. Besides, I need to cover up the expenses for this blog.

1. Castration or abandonment?

Anyone reading my previous analyses about Painter Of The Night will certainly recall that I had perceived the loss of the topknot as a castration. Why? In Joseon, the topknot was given to men the moment they became adults and this Coming-Of-Age ceremony took place just before a marriage. [For more read the essay “Coming Of Age”] In other words, no topknot meant no marriage and as such no responsibility and maturity. However, this is important to recall that the loss of the topknot was brought up in a different context. It was mentioned for the first time in the painter’s statement. (Chapter 1) When Baek Na-Kyum remembered his noona’s words about Yoon Seungho, he connected it to the loss of his future lover’s topknot. Here, the gesture had a different meaning. By cutting off his hair, the father was acting, as if he was abandoning his son. According to social norms, the hair was considered as a heritage from the parents. So if Yoon Chang-Hyeon had truly done it, the latter was showing that he was no longer considering the main lead as his son. While the rumor about the haircut gave the impression that the elder master Yoon was a honest and honorable noble, anyone can perceive the elder master’s action differently: the father is a coward, a selfish, ruthless and disloyal lord, especially the moment it is revealed that Yoon Seungho was abused sexually, physically and mentally. Let’s not forget that the protagonist used to live in the shed, for he was viewed as an animal. His situation reflected the father’s betrayal and abandonment. It doesn’t matter if he had been manipulated, because in the end, he made the decision to treat his son as a slave. He refused to send for a physician. To sum up, the loss of the topknot in this rumor would be judged as the epitome for cruelty and intolerance!! This shows that the loss of the hair in Painter Of The Night has actually many significations: castration, mercilessness and abandonment.

Then it occurred to me that the painter has been cutting off his hair all this time because of his noona. (Chapter 94) In this scene, the painter was rejected by the children, for he had no braid. Due to his hair dress, he was recognized as orphan immediately. The justification was that that way, the artist would appear more boyish. But by mentioning the loss of Yoon Seungho’s topknot, Heena was actually revealing that she knew the true signification of the haircut: abandonment and intolerance. Her words to her brother exposed her hypocrisy, though she attempted to portray the elder master as respectable. One might argue that when Na-Kyum was just a child, she had suggested the short hair, for she had good intentions. But after this experience with the children, the noona should have grasped the wrongness of her decision. She should have admitted her bad decision and stopped the painter from cutting his hair. Moreover, don’t forget that Na-Kyum was just a young boy, so the haircut must have been done by Heena herself. This shows that her gesture actually divulged her future behavior: she would betray and abandon the painter constantly (season 1, 2 and 3). At the same time, since the painter was seen with short hair in chapter 68 , this indicates that Heena kept cutting Baek Na-Kyum’s hair. So even in the past, she was betraying her brother, though the latter never realized it. The loss of hair could never be viewed as a sign of love or empathy, for it contributed to the painter’s abandonment issues and his self-loathing. He was suffering as an outcast and due to his girly features. The men in the gibang could mistreat him, for he had no long hair or topknot. Why? (Chapter 94) He had no parents or guardians protecting him which is true, for here he was exposed to violence. Heena, as the head-kisaeng, had not protected him at all, she must definitely have portrayed herself as powerless. Yet as a slave of the state, she was belonging to the king. So she had connections to officers and the court. In my eyes, the head-kisaeng made sure that the artist could never get a topknot, and as such he would never be able to become a “noble” or even a man. Hence Baek Na-Kyum was constantly called boy (Chapter 56) (Chapter 59) (chapter 66) and treated as one too. This observation made me realize that Heena’s belief could be used as an explanation for her action (cutting off his hair): she hates nobles so much that she didn’t allow her brother to have a topknot. But why would she do that? My idea is that deep down, she resented him, for he was a free man, while she was a slave. It went so far that he was encouraged to wear a white headband, the symbol for servitude, though he is no slave! To conclude, the loss of hair in Joseon should be perceived as a brutal and harsh punishment. Without a topknot, one is left unprotected, is not viewed as an adult. But this stands in opposition to Yoon Seungho’s action in front of Jung In-Hun’s home. (Chapter 101) Here, the lord had spared his friend’s life.

2. The loss of the topknot: Symbol for forgiveness?

As you may have noticed, I often use other manhwas as a source of inspiration for my interpretations concerning Painter Of The Night. In the story “A Sip of Poison”, the main lead, the prince Nan-Woo (Chapter 23) cuts off the hair of the general Woo Jong Han, because he had committed crimes. First, he hid the fact that his sister had had a child before getting married to the emperor, which was actually a huge sin. The future Empress should have been a virgin. To sum up, he had committed treason, for he had allowed his sister to become Empress unrightfully. Then the field marshal had treated his niece as a slave violating social norms. (chapter 34) That way, he assisted his sister to become powerful by covering up for her crimes (silence and passivity). She had killed many people to hide her previous relationship and to increase her power. Striking is that the prince still spared Baek-Ha’s uncle, and this for many reasons. First, the latter had not only saved both protagonists, the empress’ illegitimate daughter Baek-Ha and the prince Nan-Woo, but also had admitted his sins. Secondly, he was thinking of his wife Baek-Ha who is kind-hearted. He knew that his death could upset his bride. (chapter 26) But there is more to it. Nan-Woo didn’t spare the man out of benevolence. (chapter 26) He had a role to play. By cutting off his topknot, the general lost his “power”, he became the prince’s pawn! Nan-Woo wished to use the uncle in order to get rid of the Empress. (chapter 23) That way, the protagonist wouldn’t even have to dirty his own hands. On the other hand, we could also say that Nan-Woo was forcing the Empress’ brother to undo his bad decision. (chapter 23) Since he had protected his sister Seo-Ha out of affection, it was normal that now he had to show no mercy towards her. By presenting Baek -Ha to Nan-Woo, the general was well aware that the future ruler would recognize the female lead’s origins due to her resemblance to her mother. Therefore, we could interpret that Nan-Woo had spared the general, for the latter had switched sides and expressed the wish to undo his wrongdoings.

As you can see, Woo Jong Han shows many similarities with the second lead from Painter Of The Night: he was an accomplice of the real culprit, as he never intervened. He is connected to the notion: pity, knowledge, silence and passivity. Because Seo-Ha was his sister, as a dutiful older brother, he felt obligated to protect her. He was not blinded by greed like his donsaeng. This explicates why on the one hand, he saved Baek Ha’s life, on the other hand he still treated her as a slave in order to hide his sister’s wrongdoing. He felt torn between his obligation towards his younger sister and his empathy for his niece, Baek-Ha. Consequently, it is no coincidence that he once warmed her feet with his hands after the young girl had complained about her cold feet. Moreover, she received an education contrary to all the other slaves. He was caught in the middle, exactly like Lee Jihwa who had an attachment towards the main lead, yet he was still bound by social norms to his father. He needed to protect the family’s reputation. So when I saw this scene, (chapter 23) I couldn’t help myself thinking of Lee Jihwa and Yoon Seungho. How could the latter view the loss of a topknot as a gesture of leniency? (Chapter 101) It is because he must have witnessed it himself in the past. I have already pointed out that Yoon Seungho would imitate people, especially his tormentors. So where did he learn from? I believe, Yoon Seungho copied it from someone… and this can only be “lord Song”. And now, the first loss of Lee Jihwa’s topknot can be perceived in a different perspective. The red-haired master was well aware that he had been spared, when he had lost his hair for the first time. (Chapter 101) He knew deep down that thanks to his friend, he had been able to escape the worst. Since he had been spared once, he was well aware that this time, the ruler would show no leniency and would ask for his head, as the main lead was no longer protecting him. Remember what the lord had whispered to Baek Na-Kyum: (chapter 88) (chapter 88) By cutting off the friend’s hair, he was showing that he was abandoning his friend. He was leaving him behind, and Lee Jihwa was forced to face lord Song alone. (Chapter 83) This time, he had not his father by his side either. The latter could not protect him too. I had already voiced this theory before, as it would explain why Lee Jihwa is masking the man’s face. And note that Nan-Woo from A Sip Of Poison cut off the topknot, as he is already acting as the future ruler. Another important detail caught my attention. Just before receiving his sentence, Woo Jong-Han made an oath, (chapter 23), he swore loyalty to the future emperor. This signifies that the topknot also symbolizes faithfulness, especially because it is connected to marriage. Thus I deduce that when Lee Jihwa lost his topknot for the first time, he was already judged as disloyal. Hence it is no coincidence when the antagonist screams that he would become the target of lord Song’s fury.

But the red-haired noble could never reveal the king’s meddling, as his relationship with Yoon Seungho was a secret. Hence he needed to blame someone: The Yoons! I had already exposed that the words from the noble with the mole were ambiguous and as such deceiving. (Chapter 59) First, lord Yoon could be a reference to the father and not only the son. Secondly, he implied that he had witnessed the scene, yet in reality he could have been referring to the outcome: the friend’s hair cut, just like the noona had only seen the hickeys on her brother’s neck. She had never witnessed the sex session. The noble with the mole assumed the perpetrator’s behavior, rage, based on the hair loss. Moreover, he could have been telling the truth: he had never seen Yoon Seungho so angry before, as the latter used to be weak in the past due to his social status: he was a male kisaeng due to his braid. This explicates why the noble with the purple robe would give an order to the host (chapter 8) He felt himself superior to Yoon Seungho, and never expected “disobedience” or “rage” from the protagonist. Striking is that the lord didn’t vent his anger onto him, he first smiled before grabbing him by the topknot. (Chapter 8) A simple change of hair dress had transformed the main lead. This exposes the gods’ intervention in this story. They let the man with the mole see the wrongness of his manipulations. Since he had stated that he had never seen the man so angry, his words became a reality in 3 occasions: chapter 8 like mentioned above, chapter 53 , for he was not present, chapter 57 in the inn. Here, he chose to run away, yet despite everything he still helped his friend Black Heart, for he was present in the gibang. (Chapter 69) Under this new light, this panel from Twitter get a total new meaning: The aristocrat knew about the true identity of “lord Song”, and he had indeed never seen the man so angry that he would cut off the topknot of a noble!! This means that the fate of the noble with the mole should be to end up as the lord’s new plaything. In other words, he takes over the main lead’s previous status. He becomes the male kisaeng and ends up living in the shed like the protagonist in the past where the pedophile vents his rage and resent him for his tricks. But we will see.

Another important detail caught my attention: the noble with the mole judged the loss of the topknot as a harsh punishment (chapter 59) Furthermore, he associated it to abandonment too. (Chapter 59) Yet, observe the drop of sweat. This exposes that neither Min nor the noble with the mole were expecting that Lee Jihwa would be spared!! They acted, as if the loss of the topknot couldn’t be a sign of mercy. But observe what Lee Jihwa was recalling, when the “friend” was talking about abandonment. (Chapter 59) He was by the protagonist’s side! This means that lord Song had spared Lee Jihwa’s life, for he had been present, when Yoon Seungho was suffering. Till the middle of season 2, no one was aware of the fallout between Lee Jihwa and the protagonist. None of the incidents in season 1 was leaked to the outside, hence the “pedophile” was not officially aware of the red-haired master’s wrongdoings. But the loss of hair in front of the learned sir’s house becomes the proof that the main lead has now left his friend’s side. He will be blamed for his suicide. Therefore it is not surprising that the young master chose to run away. (Chapter 101) He knew that the ruler would show no leniency or understanding. Thus the noble with the mole’s karma should be to keep his topknot. That way, he will realize that if he had lost his topknot like Jihwa, his torment would be short-lived and as such it was a sign of mercy. But in this image, it doesn’t look like it. He will suffer for hours and even days before even losing his life. Now, he will be able to see and experienced how enraged or lenient the culprit for the loss of Lee Jihwa’s topknot was towards the antagonist.

The manhwaphiles should keep in their mind the following two rules: the painter’s fate mirrors the lord’s, since the story is constructed like a kaleidoscope. And now, look at this: (chapter 27) The painter had saved his teacher’s life, and later the lord had restrained himself from hurting the scholar in the courtyard despite Jung In-Hun’s lies and lack of respect (he had touched the man’s shoulder). (Chapter 30) Here again, the scholar had been spared. Then in episode 53, the painter had embraced the lord to stop him from killing Deok-Jae. This means that Yoon Seungho must have also saved people in the past by using his body, and this twice, for I had detected the presence of two circles: Yoon Chang-Hyeon and Lee Jihwa. That’s the reason why the father could survive the purge, and why Lee Jihwa only lost his topknot. And the heroine from A Sip Of Poison can serve as an example. (chapter 26) The red-haired noble was able to escape death thanks to Yoon Seungho. But Lee Jihwa had to hide from others that he had been punished by the king, hence Father Yoon and Yoon Seungho got blamed (chapter 1 and 59). And now, you have the explanation why father Lee accepted to receive the main lead in his mansion. (Chapter 1) As long as the latter was living there, the Lees had nothing to worry. The main lead was protecting them from the king. However, the manhwalovers should keep in their mind that Nan-Woo had showed mercy to the general for his own interests. He should become his helping hand in order to obtain the throne. Hence I come to the following deduction: neither Nan-Woo nor the “perpetrator” had cut off the topknot out of real leniency. This shows that for these characters, the loss of the topknot is not the symbol for forgiveness which is not true for the last incident with Lee Jihwa. (chapter 101) Why? It is because the main lead had no intention to use his friend as a pawn. There was no pledge of loyalty… in truth, in this scene, Yoon Seungho was truly cutting ties with the second lead.

But if the pedophile chose to employ the young master after the loss of the topknot, what was his role? In my opinion, it was to keep Yoon Seungho by his side. The pedophile had slowly recognized that he could never separate these two boys, and without him by his side, Yoon Seungho would still reject him. In my eyes, the main lead had followed his friend. Under this new light, the manhwaworms can comprehend why father Lee accepted to let the main lead stay in his mansion. He could secure his position, yet pay attention that despite the topknot, he was still dressed so poorly. (chapter 1) Even the headband was different. This was no coincidence. He should never develop confidence and act as a lord. That’s how I recognized the following pattern. In front of the painter who looked like a minor, the main lead was forced to act like an adult. Thanks to the painter, he was encouraged to mature. Simultaneously this meant that at some point, while living with the Lees, the elder master Lee had to be confronted with the truth: his son’s sodomy.

Under this new light, it becomes understandable why Heena and Kim called the main lead a bird of misfortune. (Chapter 86) The reality was that the pedophile was the bad omen, but they couldn’t insult the king. Hence the young main lead became the scapegoat, people couldn’t separate the pedophile from Yoon Seungho. The “mysterious lord Song” would never give up on the protagonist. No matter what he would keep him by his side.

But like pointed out in an earlier analysis, Black Heart and his friend were definitely the reason why the red-haired master had to lose his topknot. From my point of view, this is related to this night, (chapter 1) and Lee Jihwa had no idea about it. Hence the painter got framed. On the other hand, Black Heart and his friend had to spy on Lee Jihwa in order to know about his ignorance concerning their “prank”. At the same time, they could only get intrigued, why the mysterious lord Song would behave that way, though he had been treating the main lead as a male kisaeng. Towards Yoon Seungho, he was quite selfish and cruel. The discrepancy in the treatment (mercy versus ruthlessness) could only surprise the young nobles. And this observation led me to the following question. Why would Heena mention the topknot to her brother in order to manipulate him? The kisaeng was well aware that he had witnessed the sex party in the kisaeng house, for this image represents a memory from the artist. It is to divert his attention: he should never connect Yoon Seungho to the braided man!! If he had a topknot, then he could never be the one doing the fellatio to the man with the purple hanbok!! But if the painter had pondered a little more, he should have realized his noona’s lies. She mentioned the loss of a topknot, but yet the smiling hell-raiser still had a topknot: (chapter 1) Moreover, we shouldn’t overlook the publications with the braided man: (Chapter 1) Baek Na-Kyum was not supposed to recognize the identity of the man having sex with the bearded man. From my point of view, Heena made sure to confuse her brother. Lee Jihwa’s humiliation became Yoon Seungho’s stigma. He became the culprit. Since in the past, the main lead had been blamed for everything, the perpetrators and accomplices chose to follow this “tradition”, because so far, they had been able to cover up their crimes. But thanks to the painter, it is no longer possible. Why? It is because the painter’s hair dress will serve as a mirror of truth: the absence of a topknot due to the braid and the hair cut will be perceived as an evidence for abandonment, cruelty and huge wrongdoing. This won’t be seen as a gesture of mercy or leniency by the two protagonists, for they suffered because of it!! That’s the reason why I am thinking that the pedophile’s karma should be the loss of the topknot which he viewed as a gesture of mercy and tolerance. But without the topknot, he is actually “castrated”, and as such humiliated for he can not wear his golden sangtu. Yet, contrary to Lee Jihwa’s haircut, the loss of the topknot should not be judged as the symbol of mercy and forgiveness, in fact, the lord would officially cut ties with him. That’s how the mysterious Lord Song would be taught an important lesson: he was a huge hypocrite and a violent and ruthless pervert.

3. The tool for the loss of the topknot

Once again, A Sip Of Poison inspired me. The prince Nan-Woo asked his assistant Yoon (chapter 23) to give him a knife: (chapter 23) before grabbing Woo Jang-Hon by his topknot (chapter 23). Hence the hair fell between the men. (chapter 23) And now, let’s return our attention to Painter Of The Night. Compare the position of the aristocrat’s topknot after Yoon Seungho had punished his friend. (chapter 101) It was behind him!! Thus I deduce that he had used the sword, when Lee Jihwa had approached his friend. But wait… in season 1 and 2, Byeonduck drew scenes with a knife:

  • Chapter 18: And what had happened before? Yoon Seungho had dragged his friend by the topknot before stabbing the amateur spy. This is no coincidence.
  • Chapter 57: When this chapter had been released, I had assumed that this must have happened, when Yoon Seungho had lost his topknot! As you can see, I had already connected the knife to the loss of the topknot incident.
  • However, note that the weapon was used to threaten the painter (chapter 66)

That’s the reason why I am assuming that when Lee Jihwa lost his topknot for the first time, the mysterious lord Song must have used a knife and cut off the young master’s hair. Hence Byeonduck created such a picture where Lee Jihwa was put in a similar situation: (chapter 18) It was to trigger his memory. I am even assuming that the butler must have given lord Song the knife before while remaining in the shadow. But I also think that after the incident with the loss of the topknot, the pedophile must have also threatened him. If he were to reveal anything about this incident and his identity, then he would lose his head. So imagine Lee Jihwa’s reactions in chapter 101. (chapter 101) He had now faced a sword and not a knife contrary to the past. Therefore it is not surprising that the young master got so scared and chose to flee. Lee Jihwa had betrayed lord Song by telling an anecdote from the past. He had more or less leaked the name “lord Song”. (chapter 83) (chapter 101) For the first time, he had been confronted alone with the sword directly. There was no one and nothing to protect him. When Yoon Seungho had barged in his bedroom, Lee Jihwa had fled behind the folding shield. Furthermore, his father and the domestic were also present. (chapter 67) This shows that till season 3, Lee Jihwa had never been exposed to real justice. There was always someone ready to intervene for him. And now, you comprehend why the red-haired master felt no remorse to blame his friend for his humiliation in the past. He must have thought that if he had not been in his bedchamber during that night (chapter 59), he wouldn’t have lost his topknot. Moreover, he could also use the other incident in the bedchamber as a justification. If Yoon Seungho had not dragged him there… (chapter 83) This explicates why Lee Jihwa said this to Black Heart and his friend: (chapter 59) The antagonist had witnessed his friend’s humiliation and suffering in the past, just like Yoon Seungho had been present, when the first topknot incident occurred. From my point of view, the lord must have even protected Lee Jihwa. But the problem is that Lee Jihwa was just receiving his punishment in delay for the stolen kiss and his lies (chapter 77) He had kissed him without his consent, thus he got “castrated”. Let’s not forget that the main lead was forced to become a male prostitute, an uke, for he had not been able to perform, to have an erected phallus. On the other hand, Lee Jihwa had done nothing wrong in the bedchamber (chapter 59), for he was consoling his friend, so the loss of the topknot appears as a harsh punishment. Moreover, it looks unfair, for the real perpetrators and accomplices got scot-free. Yet, this is just an illusion. Min and his friend were punished too. They got “castrated” too!! How so? It is because from that moment on, they were not allowed to treat Yoon Seungho as a uke, a male kisaeng. (Chapter 1) This means that the painter’s vision was turned into a reality. That’s the moment Yoon Seungho got turned into a seme. Now, Black Heart and the noble with the mole should become his “playthings”, which signifies that they had switched positions. In my opinion, the pedophile had decided to no longer share his “companion” to others. As you can see, they got punished too, but since this was not painful, they never realized that they were receiving their karma. This was a symbolic “castration”. Under this new approach, it becomes understandable why Min was so obsessed with Yoon Seungho, why he wished to “fuck” Yoon Seungho in a figurative way. This is what he had desired in the past, in the gibang, but he had failed. Thus we have this gesture from Black Heart in the woods. (Chapter 41) Due to the incident in the kisaeng house, Min had lost his privileged position with the king. Hence he got jealous. He could no longer screw” the protagonist, while he had to watch the lord’s slow ascension. To sum up, the loss of Jihwa’s topknot led to the “symbolic castration” of the infamous couple: Min and the noble with the mole.

But it is time to return our attention to the knife and the loss of the topknot. First, it is relevant to remember the following rule. Baek Na-Kyum will through the path than the main lead’s. Since the painter has been constantly cutting his hair, he never had the chance to get long hair and as such a topknot. And the lord was in a similar situation. He only got his topknot very late… but the only difference is that he had a long braid the entire time. This hair dress was the symbol of his servitude. (chapter 57) Hence the author drew slaves with braids constantly. (chapter 77) And now, you comprehend why the pedophile cut off Lee Jihwa’s topknot! The latter had been blamed for the lord’s change of hair dress. (chapter 59) Because of this, Yoon Seungho had become a lord, a noble. That’s the reason why we are not able to distinguish the main lead’s hair dress properly, neither in the last picture and in this one: (chapter 57) The hair was short or not? Now, I don’t think so. The mystery of Yoon Seungho’s suffering is linked to the hair dress, yet the readers shouldn’t realize it too quickly. According to me, he still had the braid, until the doctor questioned why Yoon Seungho still had no topknot. (chapter 57) Don’t forget that in each visit of a physician, the latter would question the butler: (chapter 33) (chapter 55) And who had given him the topknot? Naturally… Kim! Because he didn’t want to be perceived as someone who was violating social norms. However, there is no ambiguity that he hid his responsibility. That’s how Lee Jihwa and his “servant” got framed. They were responsible for giving the main lead the new hair dress. On the other side, I still believe that Yoon Seungho must have lost his hair too, but only once to the difference of Baek Na-Kyum! My reason is simple. Since the painter and Lee Jihwa lost their hair, and Yoon Seungho’s destiny is mirroring his lover’s, it signifies that the lord’s hair must have been cut too. But who did it? Let’s not forget that when Yoon Seungho punished his friend in front of the scholar’s home, (chapter 101) the loss of the topknot had four significations: admission of a sin, mercy, forgiveness but also ABANDONMENT! He was cutting ties with his childhood friend. So he must have known the last meaning, but from a different source, as the first incident represented a sign of leniency. Consequently, I ended up with the following theory. Yoon Seungho must have cut off his own hair, yet he had been manipulated by Kim. Let’s not forget that the painter continues cutting his own hair and there is no sign of trauma linked to such an event. He had been encouraged to lose his hair by his noona. From my point of view, this must have happened between these two scenes: (chapter 77) and this one (chapter 83) The length was almost the same, yet 3 or 4 years had passed in the main time. Let’s not forget that this scene represents the patriarch’s abandonment (chapter 77) and Kim had also experienced rejection from Yoon Seungho (chapter 77) in that scene. For the butler, this gaze could be judged as betrayal and abandonment. Under this new perspective, it becomes comprehensible why the main lead was encouraged to blame and resent his father. If this theory is true, Kim pushed the main lead to cut off his braid, he did it out hatred and anger towards the Yoons. This would mask his own manipulation and culpability too. At the same time, the pedophile could benefit from it. The main lead was now an orphan, thus the bearded man could use him like he wished. I have an evidence for this interpretation. This is what Baek Ha said to her husband: (chapter 23) Being slave meant being orphan. The pedophile could feign ignorance about the main lead’s true origins. If he truly cared for him, he just needed to ask this: papers! (chapter 24) This shows that in Painter Of The Night, all the elders were depraved and violent hypocrites. Like mentioned above, the pedophile had a huge interest to keep the main lead as his slave, thus he was turned into an orphan and asked to keep a braid. And Yoon Seungho’s mother could do nothing, for the son had cut off his own hair, a huge symbolic act. He was no longer considering her his mother. But because of his status as slave, the pedophile could never trust the main lead. Then the suicide from the mother put an end to this farce. Hence lord Song could tell his sex partner that he had become the head of the Yoons and let him “have” the properties, while it was never his intention to let him become responsible. If he had become a lord, he could escape from his claws. He needed him to remain in an infantile and dependable state.

Since I detected that rumors often become a reality, I deduce that after the lord’s vanishing, Heena’s words will come to the surface and become the verity: (chapter 1) While in the past the father could judge this grapevine as positive, for he was portrayed as a honest and respectable man, the town folks will perceive him as the opposite: cruel, depraved and selfish. And this because of the false accusation: (chapter 94) By framing the elder master Yoon, Kim can deny any responsibility in the loss of hair of Yoon Seungho and in the messenger’s death. It was the father’s doing. The nobles like the Lees and Yoon Chang-Hyeon are now accountable for the corpses. In the gibang, Yoon Seungho never killed anyone and he even spared his friend, though the latter had kidnapped Baek Na-Kyum. Finally, the town folks are now aware of Lee Jihwa’s homosexuality and his relationship with the protagonist. So I believe that people will jump to the conclusion that father Yoon had turned his elder son into a sodomite and sold him him to the Lees which is not false too. The king has a reputation to maintain and he needs scapegoats in order to hide his involvement and his crimes from the past.

4. The reason behind the loss of the topknot

And before closing this essay, I would like to point out another similarity between A Sip Of Poison and Painter Of The Night. Though Baek -Ha is the daughter of Nan-Woo’s enemy, the prince couldn’t hurt her in the end, for she saved him: (chapter 33) (chapter 33) She not only treated his wounds, but also helped him to overcome on his guilt. He felt responsible for his brother’s death, for Nan-Woo had attempted once to commit suicide on the battlefield, and his brother had sacrificed himself to protect him. He was definitely plagued with remorse, self-loathing and shame. And that’s exactly what Baek Na-Kyum has been doing too: by simply loving him so selflessly and purely. Finally, Baek-Ha’s fate made him realize the Empress’ immense culpability. She was so greedy and selfish that (chapter 34) she had abandoned her own child! Thus he was freed from his hatred and guilt. Nan-Woo was able to perceive the wrongness of this social norm which was common in Joseon: the child is responsible for the parents’ sins! (chapter 33) Being an orphan outlined her innocence. And since I have already connected Baek Na-Kyum to the mysterious lord Song, I am quite sure that the painter will have a similar attitude than Baek Ha: (chapter 33) He will feel responsible for Yoon Seungho’s martyrdom. And if he is truly his son, his abandonment can serve an evidence of his innocence. On the other hand, the readers shouldn’t forget that his surrogate parents, Jung In-Hun and Heena, played a role in lord Yoon’s torment as well. Thus he can only indebted towards his husband.

Chyomchyom and Byeonduck explained perfectly why the protagonists would suffer so much: ambition. (Doctor Frost, chapter 225) With this picture, the manhwaphiles can detect the presence of the endless vicious circle, the ouroboros, which I had described as a kaleidoscope. The absence of empathy in both stories was the reason why no one stopped the main perpetrators. Woo Jang-Hon felt guilty, for he had raised his younger sister who had become a monster. Kim felt deep down guilty, but chose to reject his responsibility by putting the blame on others. Out of fear, he preferred hiding his wrong decisions and later wrongdoings. And now it has become his MO. This distinguishes him from the general who chose to put an end to his guilty conscience and paid for his crimes.. (chapter 34)

To conclude, the loss of the topknot has many significations: punishment, castration, loss of power, servitude, guilt, abandonment, absence of protection, cruelty, betrayal, but also freedom, loyalty, leniency and forgiveness. As you can see, the gesture is associated to opposite notions: servitude versus liberty, betrayal versus loyalty etc…. as it depends on the perspective.

Thanks to Yoon Seungho, Lee Jihwa was able to free himself from his guilt and he could liberate himself from social norms (peers pressure, his father’s expectations,) and his shame due to his sexual orientation. Before losing his topknot, he had admitted his sins to his friend and it also indicated his loyalty towards Yoon Seungho. And this was the same for the general. The latter could finally find peace in his mind and redeem himself. Yet, now, he is no longer a powerful general, he is just the puppet of the prince. However, the moment the red-haired aristocrat lost his topknot, he was no longer the king’s puppet. Therefore he was no longer useful for the mysterious lord Song. That’s the reason why the antagonist got aware that he shouldn’t expect any forgiveness or mercy from “Captain Hook”. No matter what he would say, he would be suspected of a crime (chapter 101) and this because of the first incident with the topknot!! Since Black Heart and the noble with the mole had been able to avoid punishment after this incident in the kisaeng house (chapter 1), he assumed that he could repeat his actions!! But he got proven wrong, for he ended up losing his life.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Tumblr-Twitter account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.

Painter Of The Night: Heena’s secrets 🔐

This is where you can read the manhwa. https://www.lezhinus.com/en/comic/painter But be aware that this manhwa is a mature Yaoi, which means, it is about homosexuality with explicit scenes. If you want to read more essays, here is the link to the table of contents:  https://bebebisous33analyses.wordpress.com/2020/07/04/table-of-contents-painter-of-the-night/ 

It would be great if you could make some donations/sponsoring: Ko-fi.com/bebebisous33  That way, you can support me with “coffee” so that I have the energy to keep examining manhwas. Besides, I need to cover up the expenses for this blog.

Recently, Lezhin released a message on Instagram announcing the return of manhwas in hiatus for November. And unfortunately, Painter Of Night was not part of them. 😭 Later, the author announced that due to a surgery, the release of season 4 has been delayed. She apologized, for she couldn’t keep her promise. This means, either it will start at the end of December or in January. Nevertheless, this doesn’t change my resolution to keep analyzing this story, for Yoon Seungho’s suffering and the painter’s past have not been entirely unveiled. Like a detective, I am trying to put the pieces of the puzzle together. In this essay, I would like to elaborate my new discoveries concerning Heena which led me to develop new theories.

1. Heena: a mother or a sister?

During season 2, I had trouble to figure out her true identity. Was she the head-kisaeng who had adopted Baek Na-Kyum? (chapter1) Or was she simply the noona? (chapter 70) At some point, I came to realize that Heena had acted as the surrogate mother, but she had never clearly stated that she was the painter’s mother. In other words, his adoption was never official, which explicates why the main lead only considered her as his older sister. This is important, because her ambiguous status can not only generate problems, but also expose her betrayal towards Baek Na-Kyum. Note that in chapter 97, the noona treated Baek Na-Kyum as her “child” who wouldn’t listen to her (Chapter 97), while later she implied that they were both equal, for she employed the personal pronoun “us”. (chapter 97) On the other hand, she used her seniority as status, when she called him a fool (Chapter 97). He lacked experiences, hence he was too naïve, and as such he would trust the protagonist too easily. As you can see, Heena herself had an ambiguous relationship with her brother. Nonetheless, thanks to chapter 93, I got finally a definitive answer about Heena’s true identity. She is indeed the head-kisaeng in the gibang. I realized that the protagonists were invited to stay in Heena’s personal room. (Chapter 93) That’s the reason why the seat of the host was empty and why Yoon Seungho didn’t go there. He would have violated social norms, if he had taken her seat.. Moreover, by doing so, he would have revealed that he knew where the woman was. This could have raised questions.

2. Heena’s study

But how did I come up to this revelation? What caught my attention is the type of the door from that room (rectangles). Its pattern diverges from the ones in the hallway. (Chapter 93) This means that the figures were not sitting in the room shown in the last panel. On the other hand, their voices in the hallway exposed their location. The noonas and Heena were not far away from that door hidden by the veil. That’s how I got aware where Heena’s room was situated. In the last picture, the readers are turning their back from Heena’s study, which is right after the corner. Thus I could recognize the design of the building: ][ In the center, there is this huge hallway with the purple veils, but at its end, on each both sides, there exists a corridor perpendicular to the one with the purple curtains. What the beholder imagined as a door at the end of the hallway, (Chapter 68) was in truth a huge window. How do I know this? First, in this scene, the scholar was hiding a huge white vase with red flowers. Hence I deduced that Jung In-Hun couldn’t have walked through that “gate”, it was just a window. Therefore I assumed that he had to walk past the flowers, either turn to the right or the left. Secondly, observe that next to the lantern on the left, there is a small white panel. This means that the view from chapter 93 was more or less taken from the right corner. Moreover, in the next chapter, Heena is not facing this “window”, when she is in the same building. (Chapter 69) This time, the white vase with the flowers is standing in front of a wall. That’s how I deduced that Heena had to turn to the left in order to go to the hallway. (chapter 69) On the other hand, another element caught my notice. In this picture, (chapter 69) the purple curtain is covering the wall and is very close to the lantern, which is not the case in this picture from chapter 93. (chapter 93) And now, if you pay attention to the curtains in the hallway, you can detect a huge difference. (chapter 69) On the right side, there is no white wall between the purple veils, while it is not the case on the left side. And all these observations (the window in the background, the length and position of the purple veils, the white wall) made me realize that Jung In-Hun and Heena were actually walking in the same direction. At first glance, the beholder has the impression that the learned sir was leaving the building, whereas Heena was supposed to return to her private room. However, as you can see, this is just a deception. Furthermore, what caught my attention is the presence of a tiny window . (chapter 93) which is not present in episode 69. (chapter 93) Since I came to the conclusion that Heena’s private room was on the right side after the corner, I deduce that the kisaeng was not on her way to her room. Moreover, since the kisaeng was walking in the same direction than the scholar, I can only conclude that Heena was actually approaching the entrance of the building. I believe that she had turned around, but the author didn’t reveal this. One might argue that it is possible that in chapter 68, the learned sir could have gone with the painter to Heena’s bedroom. However, back then the latter was not the head-kisaeng. We know this due to the presence of a kisaeng standing right behind Yoon Chang-Hyeon during the sexual lesson. (chapter 86) She was the superior. Moreover, we saw the teacher walking through the countryside during the night. (chapter 70) That’s how I realized that Byeonduck had deceived the readers once again. She was playing with reflections. That’s the reason why I deduced that Heena was not talking loudly by accident in front of Black Heart. (chapter 69) It was done on purpose!! She wished that Min would take care of her brother. Under this new light, it becomes comprehensible why the noona has a drop of sweat on her cheek. She is faking ignorance, she is acting, as if she was very protective of her brother. She uses illusion to manipulate people. In reality, she was acting here. One might argue that I am overthinking again. This is not possible, for Heena didn’t know Min at all. Hence she couldn’t manipulate him. The latter had heard of her for the first time in Yoon Seungho’s mansion. (chapter 66) But let me ask you this. How could Heena have never met Min, when she was the head-kisaeng? Secondly, just because the servant had never heard of the noona, this doesn’t mean that it was the case for Black Heart. The domestic assumed Black Heart’s ignorance, just like the readers. Moreover, recently I had detected that Heena had been standing in front of a mansion belonging to a noble. (chapter 46) This was not Yoon Seungho and Lee Jihwa’s mansion, for the gate and walls (chapter 67) diverge. Moreover, Min has been seen in the kisaeng house in so many chapters , (chapter 19) (chapter 59). Here, I would like to point out that in episode 59, Lee Jihwa had visited the kisaeng house on different occasions, for his hair was slowly growing. (chapter 59) Moreover, note that his visits took place during the day and not during the night. Why? It was for privacy and so far, during the day, the manhwaphiles never saw any kisaeng in the gibang. (chapter 1) (chapter 94) Lee Jihwa was not supposed to meet kisaengs. As you can see, Min had strong connections with the gibang, just like Lee Jihwa. Hence Black Heart should have known Heena, for she was the head-kisaeng. But I would like to bring up a more conclusive proof for this interpretation. (chapter 19) This image was showing us that Yoon Seungho was visiting the gibang. However, pay attention to the pattern of the doors in the last picture and the next: (chapter 19) The motive diverges, it looks like the one from the hallway with the purple veils. This means that the party was not taking place in the room shown in the former picture. What caught my notice is the presence of the white vase with the red flowers in front of the building. It was present in each scene taking place in the gibang. (chapter 68) (chapter 69) (chapter 93) For me, the red flowers symbolize Heena noona. This explicates why during the painter’s dream, the flowers were not present. (chapter 87), as Heena was not included in his vision. And this image (chapter 19) made me think of Yoon Chang-Hyeon due to the writing on the wooden planks. (chapter 44) Due to the similarities, I believe that in chapter 19, Byeonduck was actually exposing the ghost head-kisaeng. Exactly like the father, she was hiding. Why? It is because she is involved in Yoon Seungho’s suffering. And now, imagine her reaction, when she hears that Black Heart has organized a feast for the main lead’s honor. The woman could only avoid the main character. And now, you have the explication why Heena as the head-kisaeng was not present during that festivity. It was deliberate. (chapter 19) Striking is that the kisaeng had a similar hair dress than Heena, This is no coincidence. She was acting as the head-kisaeng. The manhwalovers will certainly remember that only two kisaengs had no braided bun or braids: this one and Heena. Look at all the others: (chapter 51) (chapter 93) (chapter 93) (chapter 95) The extravagant hair dress was exposing the kisaeng’s status. And now, you comprehend why the other noona explained the disappearance of Heena during that night. (chapter 93) She was the head-kisaeng’s right-hand. She had to give an explanation why the noona wouldn’t appear in her bedroom.

But let’s return our attention to chapter 19. What did the kisaeng do during that party? She questioned the main character. (chapter 19) But how could she sense that the noble was in a good mood? The latter was silent and not even smiling. (chapter 19) How could she claim this? In reality she was actually spying on him. Heena had no idea why the lord would come to the gibang, especially after suffering there so much. The kisaeng’s task was to dig up information. This visitation must have bothered the head-kisaeng.

3. Heena and Min

According to my theory, Heena was walking in front of the room where Black Heart was on purpose. She wished to push him to remove the painter from Yoon Seungho’s side. Yet one might reject this thought, because it was impossible for her to know about the man’s presence. The entire time she was looking straight (chapter 69), and Min was sitting on the floor in the corner of the room. (chapter 69) She was even turning her back to him. But actually, she could have detected his presence, exactly like I had recognized him: through his laugh!! (chapter 69) And this would actually reinforce my interpretation that the noona was familiar with Min, and her encounter with him was not recent. Moreover, I would like to point out another discrepancy. This is what the kisaeng claimed to Yoon Seungho: (chapter 99) He was wearing a veiled hat, yet in chapter 69, this was not the case. (chapter 69) They could have seen his face, and as such recognize him as lord Min!! The kisaengs claimed that they had no idea, for they couldn’t see his face. But like pointed out, Black Heart was not wearing a veil in chapter 69! So they could identify him properly. People could have noticed that he was impersonating Lee Jihwa. That’s the reason why the villain had to change the hat!! Moreover, in this scene, he was not alone, he had been followed by his best friend, the noble with the mole. (chapter 69) That’s the reason why the trick with the first impersonation failed. Under this new approach, it becomes understandable why in season 3, Min was no longer followed by his friend and why he was wearing the hat with the black veil. They needed to ensure that no one would recognize his face. That way, the impersonation would be perfect, and Lee Jihwa could be framed easily. But this means that Black Heart must have got aware that the head-kisaeng had tried to trick him with her words in the hallway. This explains why in season 3, the woman got deceived herself with illusions. (chapter 88) (chapter 97) This was her karma. She had spoken with ill intentions (to achieve her goal by using a pawn), therefore she couldn’t speak in front of blood. This is no coincidence that her hands were covering her mouth, the opposite of her behavior in the hallway. Moreover, she had acted, as if she was caring for her brother, but the reality is that she cared more for the scholar than Baek Na-Kyum. In other words, the noona and Min were both fooling each other, they were constantly acting in front of each other. Hence when the noona saw the Joker in front of the scholar’s house, she feigned ignorance, while it was the opposite. (chapter 99) Under this new light, Min’s words get a new signification: (chapter 99) He was implying that they knew each other for a long time! The irony is that the manhwaphiles had the impression that their relationship was recent, and his cynical tone contributed to it. Secondly, he called her Heena, a sign that they were close to each other. Note that Lee Jihwa never mentioned her name. (chapter 99) His words even insinuate that Black Heart had just given the following order. The red-haired master should just fetch a kisaeng and in my opinion, Heena was waiting for Lee Jihwa’s arrival to leave the gibang. According to his words, he had no idea about the kisaeng’s identity. But is it true? I have my doubts now, and this for two reasons. Why would he ask about her identity, when he already knows that she is a kisaeng? The drop of sweat on his face is an indication that he is lying. But the problem is to determine if the deception is only referring to “I heard not a word” and to all the questions. Let’s not forget that he knew about Min’s initial intention. The moment Lee Jihwa arrived in the gibang, she just followed him. That way, they would avoid to attract attention, and with her new hair dress (chapter 99), she could no longer be recognized as the head-kisaeng. And this leads me to the following observation. When Heena was sent to the storage room, she actually lost her position as head-kisaeng. (chapter 93) In other words, when Yoon Seungho jailed her (chapter 93), the gibang had lost its “leader”. This explains why this noona as her right-hand had to explain the absence of the owner. (chapter 93). This scene (chapter 93) was actually announcing the downfall of Heena. She was about to desert the kisaeng house. She was giving up on her possessions and her position for “freedom”.

4. Heena and Yoon Chang-Hyeon

Because of the empty seat, I couldn’t help myself thinking of the elder master Yoon. (chapter 86) The latter had been eyeing the throne in the family mansion, but he failed to take over the mansion. This was the negative reflection of Heena. Whereas the kisaeng had a powerful position in the gibang, it was the opposite for the patriarch. He was no longer recognized as the head of the Yoons. Yet, both have something in common. Both lost their position for good, for Heena and Yoon Chang-Hyeon couldn’t take or keep the seat. We could say that both got defeated by Yoon Seungho. In chapter 93, the main lead acted as a respectful and calm master, whereas in the bedchamber he showed no respect to his own father. He talked back and even made fun of him. (chapter 87) This picture stands in opposition to this one: (chapter 93) To conclude, the surrogate mother and the patriarch made a similar experience in season 3. Both got deceived by manipulations and in both cases, letters played a huge role.

On the other hand, the noona chose to give up on her seat and position in order to avoid trouble with justice. The elder master Yoon decided to act the opposite. He made accusations against his son (chapter 94), definitely thinking that he was doing the right thing. He thought that he could never get into trouble. But this is just a deception in my opinion. As for the former head-kisaeng, she has to run away, for she did something wrong! In the past and in the present! She definitely plotted, and she is aware that her actions will have terrible repercussions.

5. Heena’s departure

This means that Heena chose to renounce on her position and wealth in order to save her own skin! That’s the reason why she faked her death. (chapter 99) No one would be looking for her. The problem is that the witnesses of her curtains all vanished. Lee Jihwa ran away, Black Heart got killed with his friends, and the only survivor, lord Jang, was confronted with real corpses in the shaman’s house. (chapter 102) That’s why I come to the deduction that her murder will be questioned. Why? There is no blood contrary to the bloodbath in the shaman’s house and there is no corpse!! Since Black Heart used different corpses in order to deceive Heena and the couple, there is no ambiguity that the head-kisaeng’s curtains will be doubted. Striking is that Heena staged her death out of cowardice and selfishness, while Yoon Seungho made the opposite decision. He was resolute to commit suicide in order to follow his lover in his death. During that night, Heena and Yoon Seungho lost their “home”, but at the end, he found his true home: the painters embrace. (chapter 102) He gave up on everything (fortune, house and life), hence he will be rewarded for all his sacrifices. Under this new light, I am more than ever convinced that Heena has not reached the bottom. Her karma is to be punished for her deceptions and acting!

As you can imagine, the moment I questioned the relationship between Heena and Min, everything appeared in a different light. It becomes comprehensible why Min would whisper to the head-kisaeng, why she didn’t push away his hand (chapter 96) (chapter 96), though he is a noble. Besides, I am suspecting her of suffering from genophobia (fear of sex and intimacy) Their behavior exposes closeness and a certain trust. But how is this possible? It is because she knows that Min is a sodomite, and he is not looking for sexual favors. That’s the reason why she trusted Black Heart in my opinion. Moreover, he is smiling like Jung In-Hun. Therefore it is not surprising that she was speaking like the Joker in chapter 97. Here, the man had actually projected his own thoughts onto Yoon Seungho, and due to her own belief, Heena was more than willing to believe Black Heart. . (chapter 97) That’s how I came to realize why in season 2, Jung In-Hun was mentioned in front of Min. (chapter 52) It is because Black Heart knew Heena! I even believe that he had already met the scholar. Note that the man with the black hanbok was repeating the rumors about the learned sir. And the other questioned the main lead’s action exposing that he had never heard about this grapevine before. Hence I am deducing that the one spreading this rumor could only be MIN!! That’s the reason why he just said this (chapter 52) That means that the noble knew the teacher in the end. Therefore it is no coincidence that Min was aware where the learned sir lived!! (chapter 83) And now, if you connect the two scenes from chapter 97 and chapter 52 , you can only come to the conclusion that Min was the learned sir’s previous sponsor, but at the end he changed his mind (chapter 52). Why? It is because there was an incident in the gibang!! (chapter 01) And who had covered up the incident? Heena, for she was the head-kisaeng! She had lied to her brother by blaming the biggest victim, Yoon Seungho, who was the man with the braid! This image is a real memory of Baek Na-Kyum from that night, yet from far away, the painter couldn’t see the face of the sodomite! This is another secret Heena has been hiding from her brother!

That’s how I realized that season 3 focused on the “face”, the symbol for identity. The readers could never see the face of all the corpses (chapter 94) (chapter 97) (chapter 97) (chapter 101), and even Kim hid his face under a hanbok. (chapter 92) That’s the reason why I believe that in season 4, the visage will play a major role! The couple will recognize people due to the face!! In my eyes, the former head-kisaeng knows the identities of all the persons involved in Yoon Seungho’s suffering.

Hence I am encouraging you to read Painter Of The Night once again under the following theory: Heena and Min knew each other, and Jung In-Hun had already been in contact with Min…. This is no coincidence that Black Heart had to die at the end. Jung In-Hun was killed, after Min had betrayed and abandoned the scholar. If he had kept his words… the murder of Jung In-Hun wouldn’t have taken place. But let’s not forget that according to me, this scene in the gibang (chapter 1) corresponds to Yoon Seungho’s first liberation. This means that the sponsorship was doomed to fail, because the gods would no longer tolerate the abuse. Min’s promise was short-lived, because his dream couldn’t come true. He had no longer any use of the scholar. This truly exposes that Heena told many stories to her brother in the past and in the present, yet only now, (chapter 97) her brother is detecting her deception.

Feel free to comment. If you have any suggestion for topics or manhwas, feel free to ask. If you enjoyed reading it, retweet it or push the button like. My Reddit-Instagram-Tumblr-Twitter account is: @bebebisous33. Thanks for reading and for the support, particularly, I would like to thank all the new followers and people recommending my blog.